CC 220 Connectivity Manual

Antriebs- und Steuerungstechnik

CC 220 Connection Conditions Part 1 and Part 2

Version 103

Automationstechnik CC 220 Connection Conditions Part 1 and Part 2 1070 073 301-103 (95.05) GB

(Z25 WJ and D25 GJ)

E 1995

Discretionary charge 40.– DM CC220 Contents Connectionconditions

Contents

New or amended modules/sections (in relation to the previous edition of the manual) are identified with a ‘". In the manual itself such changes are identified by means of correction bars in the margin.

Connection conditions part 1

Page

Safety notes ‘

Foreword ‘

1. System configuration

1.1 General ...... ‘ 1 − 1 1.2 Card rack ...... ‘ 1 − 4 1.2.1 NC card rack 1.05...... 1 − 5 1.2.2 NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8...... 1 − 6 1.2.3 NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 ...... ‘ 1 − 6 1.2.4 Slot variations ...... ‘ 1 − 7 1.3 Operating panels ...... ‘ 1 − 14 1.3.1 14" standard colour panel ...... ‘ 1 − 14 1.3.2 12" monochrome panel ...... ‘ 1 − 25 1.3.3 14" special colour panel ...... ‘ 1 − 34 1.4 Extended modules...... 1 − 51 1.4.1 MTB1 I/O ...... ‘ 1 − 51 1.4.2 Handwheels ...... ‘ 1 − 59 1.4.3 ASCII keyboard...... 1 − 59 1.4.4 DNC interfaces ...... ‘ 1 − 60 1.5 PLC couplings ...... ‘ 1 − 69 1.5.1 PIC 250 ...... ‘ 1 − 70 1.5.2 CL 300 ...... 1 − 72 1.5.3 PC 600 ...... 1 − 73 1.5.4 Limits to PLC program generation...... 1 − 76 1.5.5 Possible PLC couplings ...... ‘ 1 − 78 1.5.6 PLC modules (AG/NC3S, AG/ZS, E24/DC 95way) ...... ‘ 1 − 81 1.6 External expansion units...... 1 − 87 1.6.1 DCR cassette player...... 1 − 87 1.6.2 MiniCass cassette player...... 1 − 89 1.6.3 Punched tape reader...... 1 − 91 1.6.4 Diskette unit CC disk...... 1 − 95 1.6.5 PG4 programming unit...... 1 − 96 1.6.6 XTRANS ...... 1 − 96 1.6.7 Biburn ...... 1 − 96

Contents−1 CC220 Contents Connectionconditions

2. Dimensions, installation and connection conditions

2.1 Dimensions − card rack...... 2 − 1 2.1.1 NC card rack 1.05...... 2 − 1 2.1.2 NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7...... 2 − 2 2.2 Dimensions − operating panels...... 2 − 3 2.2.1 12" monochrome panel...... 2 − 3 2.2.2 14" colour panel ...... ‘ 2 − 4 2.3 Dimensions − MTB1 I/O ...... 2 − 5 2.4 Dimensions − ASCII keyboard...... 2 − 5 2.5 Dimensions − handwheels ...... ‘ 2 − 6 2.6 Installation ...... ‘ 2 − 7 2.6.1 Operating panel installation ...... ‘ 2 − 7 2.6.2 Installing drawer with keyboard ...... ‘ 2 − 8 2.6.3 Installing the MTB1 I/O ...... ‘ 2 − 9 2.6.4 Installing the electronic handwheel ...... ‘ 2 − 9 2.6.5 Installing the card rack ...... ‘ 2 − 10 2.7 Electrical connections ...... ‘ 2 − 12 2.7.1 General data for power supply(ies) ...... ‘ 2 − 12 2.7.2 24 V power supply modules for load and logic supply ...... ‘ 2 − 13 2.7.3 PE conductor and screening ...... ‘ 2 − 14 2.7.4 Interference suppression ...... ‘ 2 − 15 2.7.5 Voltage connection ...... ‘ 2 − 17 2.7.6 Notes on switch cabinet construction ...... ‘ 2 − 21 2.8 Field service conditions ...... ‘ 2 − 22 2.9 Maintenance ...... ‘ 2 − 24

3. Plugin modules

3.1 CP/MEM5 computer/memory module ...... ‘ 3 − 2 3.2 SERVOi servo loop interface ...... ‘ 3 − 10 3.2.1 Overview ...... ‘ 3 − 10 3.2.2 Measuring system inputs ...... ‘ 3 − 12 3.2.3 8way analog input, high Speed I/O...... 3 − 22 3.2.4 Probe inputs / 5 V probe power supply ...... ‘ 3 − 26 3.2.5 Analog setpoint outputs ...... ‘ 3 − 29 3.3 I/O 24/0.2 module with PIC 250 (digital I/O with integrated PLC) ...... ‘ 3 − 31 3.4 NCPLCbit module (bit coupler) ...... ‘ 3 − 39 3.5 NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler) ...... ‘ 3 − 42 3.6 SCP2 module (serial couple processor) ...... ‘ 3 − 45 3.7 PCI/OS module with intigratet PIC 250 ...... ‘ 3 − 50 3.8 PS 75 power supply module ...... ‘ 3 − 53

Contents−2 CC220 Contents Connectionconditions

Connection conditions part 2

Page

4. Digital interface

4.1 Interface tables ...... 4 − 1 4.1.1 Signals from PLC to CNC...... 4 − 2 4.1.2 Signals from CNC to PLC...... 4 − 8 4.1.3 PLC input addresses of the MTB1 I/O inputs ...... 4 − 14 4.1.4 PLC output addresses of the MTB1 I/O outputs...... 4 − 16 4.1.5 Signals to the machine (PIC 250 only)...... 4 − 17 4.1.6 Signals from the machine (PIC 250 only) ...... 4 − 18

4.2 Signal descriptions ...... 4 − 20 4.2.1 Control inputs (PLC outputs) ...... 4 − 22 4.2.2 Control outputs (PLC inputs)...... 4 − 92

4.3 Other signals ...... 4 − 144 Ready2 ...... 4 − 144 MTB I/O inputs/outputs...... 4 − 144 HighSpeed I/O of the SERVOi control loop card...... 4 − 145

4.4 Signal register ...... 4 − 150

Parts list ‘

Glossary

Contents−3 CC220 Contents Connectionconditions

Contents−4 CC220 Safetynotes Connectionconditions

Safety notes

Pictograph and symbol explanations

The following warning stickers can be attached to control units themselves to draw attention to certain points:

’ Danger of electrocution!

’ Danger of battery leakage!

’ Danger: electrostatic components!

’ Remove plug before opening!

’ Bolts only for PE conductor connection!

’ Only for cable screen connection!

Symbols used in the manual:

To draw attention to particular points:

IMPORTANT (Under this heading are contained supplementary explanations, recommenda tions, information and tips)

To draw your attention to particular safetycritical points or instructions:

CAUTION (Damage to equipment can result if instructions are not observed! For example, files can be erased or modules can be damaged. Failure to observe instructions will invalidate the guarantee.)

CAUTION (Damage to equipment or even personal injury can result if instructions are not ! observed.) CC220 Safetynotes Connectionconditions

READY2 signal

Owing to the particular, safetycritical significance with regard to drive movements or the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we draw your attention to the control signal READY2 (for relay contact, see section PS 75 in this manual; also the Other sig nals" section of the chapter Digital interface" in the manual Connection condi tions part 2").

CAUTION The READY2 contact must be networked to the emergency stop circuit! ! The control is not ready if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason all dan gerous functions must be made safe immediately after opening the contact!

System components / plugin modules

CAUTION −All plugin modules may only be inserted or removed when the control is switched off! − Unauthorised opening or removal of CNC components or improperly carried ! out repairs can result in death, physical injury or serious damage to equip ment! − After removal or opening of casing or protective guards, or after opening the ! switch cabinet it is possible that certain system components will be exposed which are live and dangerous! − Repairs or maintenance of CNC components may only be carried out by the ! Bosch Service Department or by maintenance centres authorised by Bosch. − The modules contain components which can be destroyed by static dis charges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching a module or components of the module. − Plugin modules should only be transported in antistatic packaging! −Do not place plugin modules on conductive surfaces, as this can result in buffered data being lost!

Screen connection / PE conductor connection

CAUTION − Screen connections on the front side of the plugin modules can only be used for connecting cable screening and not for connecting a protective earth (PE)! − Cable screening must have largesurface contact with the strainrelief clamp in the case of conductive plug housing. If no metallic/conductive plug hous ing can be used, the cable screening of the screen connection must be con nected to the respective module (taper pin)! Conductive plug housing is rec ommended. CC220 Safetynotes Connectionconditions

Interfaces / interface modules

CAUTION − Inadequate screening reduces immunity to interference and can lead to sys ! tem faults! Refer to the section PE conductors and screening" in the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions", and to the respective pin assignment plans and diagrams given! − Incorrect assignment of interface leads can destroy the interface chips! For this reason, check that the pin assignment is correct before using the inter face leads. − Static discharges can destroy interface chips! For this reason, ensure equi potential bonding before touching the module/interface. −In the case of interfaces which link together units in different locations (re ! gardless of the distance or supply system), the user must ensure absolute equipotential bonding between the units to be linked before the initial startup! Data terminal units to be coupled must be connected to the net work. − Observe the connection conditions of the data terminal unit! If the data ter minal unit does not allow the interface cable to be connected or discon nected when voltage is applied, then the panel/CNC and the data terminal unit must also be switched off! Recommendation: only connect or discon nect connection cables when voltage is not applied. CC220 Safetynotes Connectionconditions

CC220 Foreword Connectionconditions

Foreword

This manual describes software version Z25 WJ" for control unit CC 220 M and D25 GJ" for control unit CC 220 T.

IMPORTANT The group operating mode DIAGNOSIS contains instructions for the current con trol unit software version which may be accessed via the softkey DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL or SOFTWARE VERSION.

As the title suggests, this manual contains information required for normal oper ation of the control unit. For reasons of clarity, however, not every detail of every possible control variant can be included. Similarly, as the control unit is usually only part of a larger installation or system, not every conceivable aspect of integration, operation or maintenance is covered. Your Bosch service branch or customer advisory service will be pleased to help you if you require more detailed information. Please contact them also if problems with the control unit should arise which are not sufficiently dealt with in this manual.

This manual is intended for technically qualified personnel.

CAUTION Configuration, commissioning or maintenance may only be carried out by suitably ! qualified personnel! Such personnel must be able to recognise the dangers which can be caused by mechanical, electrical or electronic equipment.

Please consult our comprehensive training program. An overview of courses may be found on the inside front cover of this manual. Our training centre will be pleased to provide you with further information (Tel: 06062/78258). CC220 Foreword Connectionconditions Systemconfiguration CC220 General Connectionconditions

1. System configuration

1.1 General

The CC 220 is a modular system, i.e. the various functional areas such as com puter, control loops etc. are located on separate plugin modules. The card rack is provided to accommodate all the required plugin modules. It combines the individual modules to form a single electrical and mechanical entity (logic section). Three different types of card rack are available (NC card rack 1.05, NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and NC/CL3 card rack 1.0−5/7).

The control and the operator communicate (displays, inputs) via the operating panel. The panel is available as a 12" monochrome version (with grey tones) or as a 14" colour version.

Module MTB1 I/O is available as an additional module to the panel. Here signal cables can be connected to and from the machine panel, e.g. pushbuttons, lamps, handwheels, potentiometers, etc. These signals are then transmitted to the PLC via the CNC.

The ASCII keyboard is available also as an additional panel module for easy input (e.g. when programming the machine or using the CC 220 as a programming sta tion). A dropdown drawer is available for spacesaving installation of the key board on the machine.

External CARDRACK addon units (serial)

PLC COUPLING PANEL (Bitor word) ext. DNC computer

ASCII MTB1I/O keyboard

CNCsystemconfiguration:overview

1−1 Systemconfiguration CC220 General Connectionconditions

System configuration CC 220

ËËËËË Example:

ËËËËË NC card rack containing CP/MEM5 Servo i, I/O

I/O 24/0.2 and PS 75 PS75 and monochrome or colour panel SERVOi CP/MEM5

X21 BLANKPANEL

X22

X22 X22 X21

12" monochrome 14" paper white or colour (order no. 063 (order no. 063 554) 547)

X62 X61 X71 X62 X61 X71

X62 X61 X62 X61

MTB1I/O MTB1I/O

ASCIIkeyboard ASCIIkeyboard

1−2 Systemconfiguration CC220 General Connectionconditions

System configuration CC 220 with special colour panel for integrating a PC

A further PC apart from the CNC can be con

ËËËËË nected to the special colour panel (order no.

071339) with this configuration. ËËËËË

An MF2 keyboard is coupled to the panel in I/O

PS75 stead of the CNC ASCII keyboard.

SERVOi The panel can be connected to either the CNC CP/MEM5 or the PC by changing over via an interface sig X21

BLANKPANEL nal.

X22

PC without monitor

Keyboard cable (max. 25m)

VGA cable (max. 25m)

X22 X21 X33 X23

14" colour (order no. 071 339)

X32 X62 X61 X71 X31 X12

X62 X61

MTB1I/O

MF2keyboard

1−3 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

1.2 Card rack

Three different card rack versions are available for the CC 220:

‘ NC card rack 1.05 NC logic section with max. 5 plugin modules.

‘ NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 NCPLC I/O logic section with max. 5 plugin modules and 8 PLC I/O modules.

‘ NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 NCPLC I/O logic section with max. 5 plugin modules and the CL300 modules: power supply module NT301/300, central processing unit ZE300 and 5 PLC modules (permissible combinations according to the basic unit GG300K).

CAUTION The card rack must be connected using the earthing stud on the PE conductor sys ! tem. The earthing stud is located on the inside of the card rack, directly next to the left cable bushing opening (facing the front).

The individual plugin modules contain components which can be destroyed by static discharges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching the modules or components of the modules.

Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions" for information on dimensions and instructions for installation, electrical connec tions and maintenance. The section PLC couplings" gives possible PLC couplings to the CNC.

1−4 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

1.2.1 NC card rack 1.05

This rack is designed to accommodate a maximum of 5 CNC plugin modules. The fan unit beneath the switch group is driven with 24 VDC.

O I

Example: NC card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard I/O 24/0.2 and PS 75

Ordering information Type No.

NC card rack 1.05 065 610 Fan unit 242 054 092

1−5 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

1.2.2 NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 The CNC section is enlarged to accommodate PLC I/O modules. A total of 8 slots are available for PLC I/O modules.

The ventilation unit beneath the PLC switch groups (24 VDC) is prewired to the fan

unit. ËËËËËËËËËËË I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

I/OBUS CP/MEM5 BLANKPANEL PC−I/O−S PS75 SERVOi BLANKPANEL

Example: NC/PLC card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard, PCI/OS, PS 75 and PLC I/O cards

1.2.3 NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

The ventilation unit beneath the PLC switch groups (24 VDC) is prewired to the fan

unit. ËËËËËËËËËËË I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

I/OBUS ZE300 NT300 SERVOi BLANKPANEL CP/MEM5 BLANKPANEL NC−PLC−BIT PS75

Example: NC/CL3 card rack fitted with the modules CP/MEM5, Servo icard, NCPLC bit coupler, PS 75 and CL 300

Ordering information Type No.

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 066 750 incl. fan unit NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 066 860 incl. fan unit

1−6 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

1.2.4 Slot variations

The diagrams schematically depict the possible slot variations for the NC card rack 1.05, the NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 and the NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 re spectively.

NC card rack 1.05

‘ CP/MEM5, computer/memory module − Max. 512 kByte RAM (user memory) − Max. 1 MByte EPROM (customer EPROM) − Max. 128 kByte EEPROM

‘ Power supply module PS 75 − The power supply module supplies the internal voltages for the logic circuits of all plugin modules.

1. 5. Slot

CP/ MEM5 PS75

Slot 1 and 5 In all card racks, slots 1 and 5 are reserved for modules CP/MEM5 and PS75.

1−7 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

‘ Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards) − Servo 4i with 4 analog setpoint outputs and 3 measuring system inputs − Servo 6i with 7 analog setpoint outputs and 6 measuring system inputs − Servo i EXE3/S with 3 integrated EXEs. If no SCP2 cards are used, or a second I/O card is used, then 2 Servo icards may be connected. Note that the total number of system axes is limited to 8!

2. 3. Slot

BLANK PANEL

Second I/O

SERVO CARD SERVO CARD

SCP2

Slot 2 Slot 2 is provided for the first Servo icard respectively in all card rack versions (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3).

Slot 3 Slot 3 is provided for either a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3), a second I/O card (without PIC250) or one SCP2 card. The fitting of slots 2 and 4 is decisive. A dummy cover is used instead of a second servo or I/O card or the SCP card.

1−8 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

‘ PLC alternatives − I/O 24/0.2 with PIC 250 I/O card with 64 inputs and 40 outputs and internal PLC (PIC 250). A second I/O card (without PIC 250) can be fitted. −Bit coupling NCPLC bit coupler, connection module to external PLC (PC600, CL300). − Word coupling NCPLC word coupler (WK3); Connection module to external PLC (PC600). Used only with CC 220 M. − PCI/OS coupling Direct coupling with PLC I/O cards housed in the combination rack or an external rack. ‘ DNC versions EDNC (additional card available for modules I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250, PCI/OS, NCPLC bit and NCPLC word3) LSV2DNC (as for EDNC) LSV2DNC with SCP2 (only if no second servo card or second I/O card is fitted)

3. 4. Slot

BLANK I/O PANEL 24/0.2

Second NC−PLC I/O BIT

SERVO NC−PLC card WORD*)

SCP2 PC− I/O−S

*)CC220Monly

Slot 3

Slot 3 is provided for either a second I/O card (without PIC250), a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3) or one SCP card. The fitting of slots 2 and 4 is decisive. If the slot is not fitted, it is covered with a dummy cover.

Slot 4

This slot is provided for either an I/O card (with PIC250), the NCPLC bit coupling card, the NCPLC word3 (CC 220 M only) or the PCI/OS coupling card. The section PLC couplings" gives information on the possible individual PLC couplings.

1−9 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 or NC/CL3 card rack

‘ CP/MEM5 computer/memory module − Max. 512 kByte RAM (user memory) − Max. 1 MByte EPROM (customer EPROM) − Max. 128 kByte EEPROM

‘ Power supply module PS 75 or PS 200 − The power supply module supplies the internal voltages for the logic circuits of all plugin modules.

1. 5. 6. Slot

PLCsection BLANK PS75 PANEL CP/ MEM5

PS200

In addition, slot 6 is provided with a dummy cover for NC/PLC card rack and NC/ CL3 card rack. This makes it possible in the case of both racks to use the more powerful power supply module (which requires slots 5 + 6) instead of the PS75 at slot 5 and the dummy cover at slot 6.

1−10 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

‘ Servotypes, servo loop modules (servo cards) − Servo 4i with 4 analog setpoint outputs and 3 measuring system inputs − Servo 6i with 7 analog setpoint outputs and 6 measuring system inputs − Servo i EXE3/S with 3 integrated EXEs If no SCP2 cards are used, or a second I/O card is used, then 2 Servo icards may be connected. Note that the total number of system axes is limited to 8!

2. 3. Slot

BLANK PANEL PLCsection

SERVO card

Slot 3 Slot 3 is provided for either a second Servo icard (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3) or a dummy cover.

1−11 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

‘ PLC alternatives −Bit coupling NCPLC bit coupler, connection module to external PLC (PC600, CL300). − PCI/OS coupling (NCPLC card rack 1.05/8 only) Direct coupling with PLC I/O cards housed in the combination rack or an external rack. ‘ DNC versions − EDNC (with additional card for modules PCI/OS and NCPLC bit) − LSV2DNC (as for EDNC)

For NCPLC card rack 1.05/8:

3. 4. 6. Slot

BLANK PC− PANEL I/O−S PLCsection

NC−PLC SERVO card BIT

Slot 3 Slot for a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3). If the slot is not fitted it is covered with a dummy cover.

Slot 4 This slot is provided for PCI/OS or NCPLCbit coupling card. The connection be tween the NC and the PLCI/O modules is created internally via the backplane. The section PLC couplings" gives information on possible PLC couplings.

For NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7:

3. 4. 6. Slot

BLANK PANEL PLCsection

NC−PLC BIT

SERVO card

1−12 Systemconfiguration CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

Slot 3 Slot for a second servo card (Servo 4i, Servo 6i, Servo i EXE3). If the slot is not fitted it is covered with a dummy cover.

Slot 4 Slot for the NCPLC bit coupling card. The connection between the NC and the CL300 modules is created internally via the backplane. In addition, one PLC expan sion unit with digital I/O modules can be connected via socket X11 of the NCPLC bit. No switch groups which may interrupt other units or which are addressed on the extended field (EI/EO) may be used in this expansion unit! The section PLC couplings" gives information on possible PLC couplings.

1−13 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

1.3 Operating panels ‘ 14" standard colour panel ‘ 12" monochrome panel with grey tones ‘ 14" special colour panel for additional connection to PCs Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions" for information on dimensions and instructions for installation, electrical connec tions and maintenance. 1.3.1 14" standard colour panel The 14" operating panel has graphics capabilities. The colour can be modified by machine parameters and within CPL programs. Ordering information Type No.

Colour panel 1.014" 063 554 The interfaces for connecting the ASCII keyboard, MTB1 I/O and CP/MEM5, an LED and a fuse may be found on the backplane of the panel. A brightness potentio meter is located on the front panel, to the left of the monitor. This is operated with a screwdriver.

Electrical connections and controls

Connection cable RGB cable CP/MEM5 max.25mcablelength X22 X21

14" Mains connection colour 230 VAC panel

MTB1I/O X71 X61 X62 Brightness ‘ 64inputs ‘ potentiometer max.2m 32outputs cablelength max.1,5m Connectionfor cablelength ‘ 3or2potentiometers ‘ 1digitalhandwheel

ASCIIkeyboard

Controls and ports at a glance

Brightness potentiometer Potentiometer for adjusting screen brightness. Screen brightness can be suited to the local lighting conditions. Light filters should be used to prevent glare if necess ary. CAUTION Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture tube. This invalidates the guarantee!

1−14 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Interface section of the colour panel

Fuse (M 4 A) LED, green

ASCII keyboard Socket X71, SubD, 25 pin

MTB1 I/O Socket X61, SubD, 37 pin

MTB1 I/O Socket X62, SubD, 25 pin

CP/MEM4 CP/MEM4 Connector X22, SubD, 20 pin Connector X21, RGB interface incl. BNC socket (video signal) SubD, 15 pin

Colour panel rear view (interface strip only)

Fuse (M 4 A)

Protects the 24 V= input voltage to X22.

CAUTION Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.

LED

The green LED indicates that the 24 V= supply voltage from the CP/MEM4 is on.

1−15 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Panel − CP/MEM4

The panel is connected to the CP/MEM4 by means of the cables X21 and X22. Cable X22 contains the leads for the 24 V supply voltage for the panel, analog sig nals (potentiometers) and keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted down an internal coax lead. RGB video signals are carried by cable X21.

Connector X22 20 pin subD connector of special design with additional BNC socket for video sync signal transmission.

Pin Assignment 1 AVCC 2 AGND 3 VREF 4 IN3 5 IN1 6 IN4 7 RESERVE1 8 RESERVE2 9 GND(PHGinterface) 10 +12VP(CPinterface) 11 AGND 12 +24V 13 PGND 14 IN2 15 IN0 16 PGND 17 +12V(PHGinterface) 18 TX+ 19 RX+ 20 RS+ A1 CSYNC

Connector X21 Video interface for transmission of RGB video signals and colour monitor identifica tion. Cable assignment:

SocketX21 ConnectorX21 Pin Pin Core colour Signal

8 8 red Red 15 15 Screen(red) Groundred 14 14 gn Green 7 7 Screen(gn) Groundgn

6 6 bl Blue 13 13 Screen(bl) Groundbl 5 Bridge black 12 Coreno.7

4 Bridge black 11 Coreno.8

1−16 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

Special socket, SubD, 20pin Special connector, SubD, 20pin to panel to CP/MEM4 max. 25 m

Screened cable 2 x 8 x 0.14 1 x 4 x 0.31 1 x mini coax section

Cablediameter: 11+/−0,5mm Bending radius: single: 55 mm multiple: 110 mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right.

screen Connection cable X22 panel − CP/MEM

Ordering information Type No. Length

Connection cable X22 048 028 2.5 m 052 265 5 m 048 029 10 m 048 668 20 m 065 617 25 m

Special socket, SubD, 15pin Special connector, SubD, 15pin to panel to CP/MEM4

max. 25 m

Screened cable

Cablediameter: 9,1+/−0,5mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right.

Connection cable X21 panel − CP/MEM 4 Screen

Ordering information Type No. Length

RGB cable X21 065 620 2.5 m 065 622 10 m 065 624 25 m

1−17 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting pushbuttons and switches to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Up to 64 switching elements (make/break contact elements and pushbuttons) can be connected to panel interface X61. Pushbuttons and switches must be suited to a switched current of approx. 3 mA (gold contacts). Required minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2. Screened cables must be used.

CAUTION Signals SCAN8 to SCAN15 are LOW active!

Connection of input signals to X61:

from X61 to switching element All diodes: Type 1 N 4148 Panel X61 max. 2.5 m Data0 21 AddressE32.0 Data1 20 AddressE32.1 Data2 2 AddressE32.2 Data3 1 AddressE32.3 Data4 3 AddressE32.4 Data5 22 AddressE32.5 Data6 4 AddressE32.6 Data7 23 AddressE32.7

ByteE33

ByteE34

Scan8 27 Scan9 8 Scan10 7 Scan11 5 Addresses35.0−35.7 Scan12 6 Addresses36.0−36.7 Scan13 24 Addresses37.0−37.7 Scan14 25 Addresses38.0−38.7 26 Scan15 Addresses39.0−39.7

1−18 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting output elements to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Up to 32 output elements can be connected to the panel interfaces X61 and X62. The LOW active outputs OUT1 and OUT2 are specially designed for the connec tion of filament lamps (12 V, max.100 mA, not short circuitproof!). LEDs or amplifiers can be connected to the LOW active outputs OUT3 to OUT32 (short circuitproof, internal resistance: 511 W). Required minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2. Screened cables must be used.

Connecting output elements to X61 and X62:

from X61/X62 to output element Panel X61 max. 2.5 m +12Vout 13 Imax = 800 mA

9 OUT1 AddressA32.0 28 OUT2 AddressA32.1 10 OUT3 AddressA32.2 OUT4 29 AddressA32.3 11 OUT5 AddressA32.4 30 OUT6 AddressA32.5 12 OUT7 AddressA32.6 31 OUT8 AddressA32.7

Panel X62 OUT9 1 AddressA33.0 OUT10 2 AddressA33.1 OUT11 3 AddressA33.2 OUT12 4 . AddressA33.3 . . . OUT31 23 AddressA35.6 OUT32 25 AddressA35.7

CAUTION − OUT1 and OUT2: Imax = 100 mA per output OUT3 to OUT32: Imax = 20 mA per output − Signals OUT1 to OUT32 are LOW active!

1−19 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting potentiometers to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

A total of 5 potentiometers (1kW) can be connected to X61. 3 potentiometer inputs (IN0, IN1, IN4) are evaluated absolutely, i.e. the resistance value determines the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer setting. Suitable for, e.g. rapid, feed and spindle override). 2 potentiometer inputs (IN2, IN3) are evaluated incrementally, i.e. changes in re sistance determine the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer turning speed. Suit able for e.g. connecting an analog handwheel or endless potentiometer).

Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5 m. Use a screened 3core lead (minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2) for each potentiometer. Avoid open leads. The connection diagram is as shown:

Panel X61 max. 5 m

19 AVCC 33 IN0 1 kOhm P1 36 AGND

15 IN1 1 kOhm P2

35 IN4 1 kOhm P3

34 IN2 1 kOhm P5

16 IN3 1 kOhm P6 Screenvia Analog metalcover handwheel tohousing Screened cable 3 x 0.14 Both ends of the screen must be connected to the casing.

Connection of potentiometer directly to X61

1−20 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − MTB1 I/O

Connection is by means of two subD sockets X61 and X62.

Socket X61, subD, 37 pin Pin configuration, socket X61 (37 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 DATA3 19 AVCC 2 DATA2 20 DATA1 3 DATA4 21 DATA0 4 DATA6 22 DATA5 5 SCAN11 23 DATA7 6 SCAN12 24 SCAN13 7 SCAN10 25 SCAN14 8 SCAN9 26 SCAN15 9 OUT1 27 SCAN8 10 OUT3 28 OUT2 11 OUT5 29 OUT4 12 OUT7 30 OUT6 13 +12VOUT 31 OUT8 14 SCAN5 32 PGND 15 IN1 33 IN0 16 IN3 34 IN2 17 24VOK 35 IN4 18 MTB1on 36 AGND 37 −−−

Socket X62, subD, 25 pin Pin configuration, socket X62 (25 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 OUT9 14 OUT22 2 OUT10 15 OUT23 3 OUT11 16 OUT24 4 OUT12 17 OUT25 5 OUT13 18 OUT26 6 OUT14 19 OUT27 7 OUT15 20 OUT28 8 OUT16 21 OUT29 9 OUT17 22 OUT30 10 OUT18 23 OUT31 11 OUT19 24 PGND 12 OUT20 25 OUT32 13 OUT21

1−21 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

Connector, subD, to panel Socket, subD, to MTB1 I/O

max. 2 m

Screened cable 36 x 0.14 or 25 x 0.14

Cablediameter: X61:11mm X62:9,5mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right. Connection cable X61 panel − MTB1 I/O Screen Connection cable X62 panel − MTB1 I/O

Ordering information Type No. Length

Cable X61 065 619 2 m Cable X62 065 618 2 m

‘ Connection panel − ASCII keyboard

Socket X71, SubD, 25 pin Connection is by means of a 25 pin subD socket.

Pin configuration, socket X71

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 GND 14 GND 2 D7 15 −−− 3 D6 16 −−− 4 D5 17 −−− 5 D4 18 −−− 6 D3 19 −−− 7 D2 20 −−− 8 D1 21 −−− 9 D0 22 −−− 10 −−− 23 −−− 11 STRB 24 −−− 12 −−− 25 VCC 13 VCC

Ordering information Connection cable Type No. Length

ASCII keyboard 050 461 1.5 m Cyrillic ASCII keyboard 062 521 1.5 m

1−22 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Power supply connection 230 VAC

Power supply connection 230 VAC with integrated fuse: 2 x M2A

PEterminal

Ventilationinlets

Rear view colour panel (interface strip with power supply connection only)

230 VAC power supply input (nonheating unit socket with integrated fuse holders). Fuses: 2 x M 2 A.

CAUTION Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuses is not permitted. The operating panel must always be switched on together with the control (logic section)! Remove mains plug before opening the panel casing! The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic ventilation unit on the rear side, within the casing. The ventilation unit switches on automatically if the ambient tem perature within the casing is greater than or equal to 45°C (±5°C). The ventilation unit switches off again if the temperature drops below <35°C (±5°C). Danger of injury! ! Never place your hands inside the fan impeller in case it switches on suddenly. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller!

‘ Specifications

Ambient temperature + 5°C to + 55°C Storage temperature − 25°C to + 70°C Humidity class Class F to DIN 40040 Moisture condensation is not permitted The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust, acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, me tallic vapours and other conductive impurities.

Mechanical strength to IEC 6826/IEC 68227 Air pressure max. 1000 m above sea level

Protection standard to DIN 40050 Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20

Power supply 230 V a.c.; +6% / −10%

1−23 Operating panels CC220 14" standard colour panel Connectionconditions

Power circuit breaker 2 x M2A (integrated in nonheating unit socket) Frequency 50 ... 60Hz ± 1% Power input max. 80 W

Screen diagonal 14" Screen resolution 27 lines, 64 characters 512 x 384 pixels Horizontal deflection frequency 20.6 kHz Vertical deflection frequency 50 Hz Xray radiation conforms to Xray regulations (BGBI. I S. 114) dated 8 Jan. 87 § 5, section (2)

1−24 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

1.3.2 12" monochrome panel

The 12" monochrome panel has graphics capabilities. The user is able to set 7 grey tones with background colour for all screen areas using machine parameters (P 3600 grey tone settings).

Ordering information

Type No.

Monochrome 1.012" 063 547

The interfaces for connecting the ASCII keyboard, MTB1 I/O and CP/MEM5, an LED and a fuse may be found on the backplane of the panel. A brightness potentio meter is located on the front panel, to the left of the monitor. This is operated with a screwdriver.

Electrical connections and controls

Connectioncable,max.25m CP/MEM5

X22

12" Monochrome panel

MTB1I/O X71 X61 X62 Brightness potentio ‘ 64inputs meter ‘ max.2m 32outputs cablelength max.1,5m Connectionfor cablelength ‘ 3or2potentiometers ‘ 1digitalhandwheel

ASCIIkeyboard

Controls and ports at a glance

CAUTION Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture tube. This invalidates the guarantee!

1−25 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Interface section of the 12" monochrome panel

Fuse (F1) LED, green

ASCII keyboard Socket X71, SubD, 25 pin

MTB1 I/O Socket X61, SubD, 37 pin

MTB1 I/O Socket X62, SubD, 25 pin

CP/MEM5 Connector X22, SubD, 20 pin incl. BNC socket (video signal)

Rear side Monochrome panel (interface strip only)

Fuse (F1)

Fuse (M 4 A) to protect the 24 V= input voltage to X22.

CAUTION Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.

LED

The green LED indicates that the 24 V= supply voltage from the CP/MEM5 to X22 is on.

1−26 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Panel − CP/MEM5

The 12" monochrome panel is connected to the CP/MEM5 in the card rack of the NC by one special cable (two in the case of colour panels). The cable contains the leads for the 24 V supply voltage for the panel, analog signals (potentiometers) and keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted down an integrated coax lead.

Connector X22 20 pin subD connector of special design with additional BNC socket for video sync signal transmission.

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 AVCC 11 AGND 2 AGND 12 +24V 3 VREF 13 PGND 4 IN3 14 IN2 5 IN1 15 IN0 6 IN4 16 PGND 7 RESERVE1 17 +12V(PHinterface) 8 RESERVE2 18 TX+ 9 GND(PHGinterface) 19 RX+ 10 +12VP(CPinterface) 20 RS+ A1 −−−−

Special socket, SubD, 20pin Special connector, SubD, 20pin to panel to CP/MEM5

max. 25 m

Screened cable 2 x 8 x 0.14 1 x 4 x 0.31 1 x mini coax section

Cablediameter: 11+/−0,5mm Bending radius: single: 55 mm multiple: 110 mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right.

Connection cable X22 panel − CP/MEM Screen

Ordering information

Type No. Length

Connection cable X22 048 028 2.5 m 052 265 5 m 048 029 10 m 046 668 20 m 065 617 25 m

1−27 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting pushbuttons and switches to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

CAUTION Signals SCAN8 to SCAN15 are LOW active!

Connection of input signals to X61:

ByteE33

ByteE34

Scan8 27 Scan9 8 Scan10 7 Scan11 5 Addresses35.0−35.7 Scan12 6 Addresses36.0−36.7 Scan13 24 Addresses37.0−37.7 Scan14 25 Addresses38.0−38.7 26 Scan15 Addresses39.0−39.7

1−28 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting output elements to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Connecting output elements to X61 and X62:

from X61/X62 to output element Panel X61 max. 2.5 m +12Vout 13 Imax = 800 mA

9 OUT1 AddressA32.0 28 OUT2 AddressA32.1 10 OUT3 AddressA32.2 29 OUT4 AddressA32.3 11 OUT5 AddressA32.4 30 OUT6 AddressA32.5 12 OUT7 AddressA32.6 31 OUT8 AddressA32.7

Panel X62 OUT9 1 AddressA33.0 OUT10 2 AddressA33.1 OUT11 3 AddressA33.2 OUT12 4 . AddressA33.3 . . . OUT31 23 AddressA35.6 OUT32 25 AddressA35.7

CAUTION − OUT1 and OUT2: Imax = 100 mA per output OUT3 to OUT32: Imax = 20 mA per output − Signals OUT1 to OUT32 are LOW active!

1−29 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting potentiometers to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5m. Use a screened 3core lead (minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2) for each potentiometer. Avoid open leads. The connection diagram is as shown:

Panel X61 max. 5 m

19 AVCC 33 IN0 1 kOhm P1 36 AGND

15 IN1 1 kOhm P2

35 IN4 1 kOhm P3

34 IN2 1 kOhm P5

16 IN3 1 kOhm P6 Screenvia Analog metalcover handwheel tohousing Screened cable 3 x 0.14 Both ends of the screen must be connected to the casing.

Connection of potentiometer directly to X61

1−30 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − MTB1 I/O

Connection is by means of two subD sockets X61 and X62.

Socket X61, subD, 37 pin Pin configuration, socket X61 (37 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Socket X62, subD, 25 pin Pin configuration, socket X62 (25 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1−31 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

Connector, subD, to panel Socket, subD, to MTB1 I/O

max. 2 m

Screened cable 36 x 0.14 or 25 x 0.14

Cablediameter: X61=11mm X62=9,5mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right. Connection cable X61 panel − MTB1 I/O Connection cable X62 panel − MTB1 I/O Screen

Ordering information Type No. Length

Cable X61 065 619 2 m Cable X62 065 618 2 m

‘ Connection panel − ASCII keyboard

Socket X71, SubD, 25 pin Connection is by means of a 25 pin subD socket.

Pin configuration, socket X71

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Ordering information Connection cable Type No. Length

ASCII keyboard 050 461 1.5 m Cyrillic ASCII keyboard 062 521 1.5 m

1−32 Operating panels CC220 12" monochrome panel Connectionconditions

‘ Specifications

Ambient temperature + 5°C to + 55°C Storage temperature − 25°C to + 70°C Air humidity Humidity class F to DIN 40040 Moisture condensation is not permitted The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust, acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, me tallic vapours and other conductive impurities.

Mechanical strength to IEC 6826/IEC 68227 Air pressure max. 1000 m above sea level

Protection standard to DIN 40050 Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20

Power supply 24 V= Fuse F1 M 4 A

Screen diagonal 12" Screen resolution 27 lines, 64 characters 512 x 384 pixels Horizontal deflection frequency 20.6 kHz Vertical deflection frequency 50 Hz Xray radiation conforms to Xray regulations (BGBI. I S. 114) dated 8. Jan. 87 § 5, section (2)

1−33 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

1.3.3 14" special colour panel (colour PL114"2F)

Ordering information

Type No.

Colour panel colour PL114"2F 071 339 Both the CNC and an external PC may be operated using this panel. The panel can be set to either NC mode" (A35.7=LOW) or to PC mode" (A35.7=HIGH) by switching over the NC/PLC output signal. Address for word coupling = A251.7.

If NC mode is selected, the panel behaves as a standard colour panel and is active exclusively as an NC panel. An MF2 keyboard is used in NC mode instead of the NC ASCII keyboard so far used. It is no longer possible then to connect an additional NC ASCII keyboard to X71. If PC mode is active, the panel conveys data from the MF2 keyboard to the PC or from the PC to the keyboard. The VGA video signals of the PC are displayed on the panel.

Transmission of MTB1 data between the panel and the logic section of the CNC is not affected by the NC/PC changeover.

Starting/stopping sequence for CNC and PC

A keyboard test, amongst other things, is performed by PC systems during system startup. If the PC does not recognise a keyboard during this test, further procedure is dependent on the relevant PCBIOS. Some of the systems continue the startup without initialisation of the keyboard; others stop the test program at this point and require a keyboard input. The startup is continued only when a keyboard is con nected and a key is pressed. If a PC startup is performed with keyboard initialisation, the following points must be taken into account when switching on: The PC may only be switched on when the NC and panel startup in NC mode are complete. This is ensured when the signal CCMZA1 is output to the NC digital inter face for the first time. 1. Switch on CNC and panel and perform initialisation (selftest) 2. Switch panel to PC mode 3. Switch on PC Similarly, a certain sequence must be observed when switching off: 1. Switch off PC 2. Switch off CNC and panel

CAUTION If the switchingon sequence is not observed, the PC cannot initialise the keyboard correctly. This can lead to malfunctioning between the PC and the keyboard! If the switchingoff sequence is not observed, it is possible that the PC may recogn ise an unwanted keyboard input or a keyboard error!

1−34 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

Electrical connections and controls

Several extensions are available in addition to the interfaces provided on the 14" standard colour panel:

X11: Video out − connection for colour panel multifrequency monitor X12: currently unused X23: VGA IN − connection for VGA video interface of PC X31: currently unused X32: MF2KB − connection of MF2 keyboard X33: PCKB − connection of MF2 keyboard interface of PC

CAUTION Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

Connection cable (max.25m) Brightness po RGB cable (max.25m) CP/MEM5 tentiometer

X22 X21 X33 Keyboard cable (max.25m) VGA cable PC 14" special (max.25m) colour panel X23 Mains connection

230 VAC

X32 X61 X62 MTB1I/O X31 X12 ‘ 6424V_inputs ‘ max.1,5m X71 max.2m 3224V_/0.1Aoutputs cablelength cablelength Connectionfor ‘ Potentiometers: 3 x absolute ASCIIkeyboard 1 x incremental MF2keyboard (onlyifnoPCandnoMF2 keyboardareused) ‘ 1digitalhandwheel

Controls and ports at a glance

Brightness potentiometer

Potentiometer for adjusting screen brightness. Screen brightness can be suited to the local lighting conditions. Light filters should be used to prevent glare if necess ary.

CAUTION Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture tube. This invalidates the guarantee! Interface plugs may only be connected or removed when all units are switched off!

1−35 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Interface section of the colour panel

Fuse (M 4 A) PCKB DIN connector X33, 5 pin LED, green

MF2KB DIN socket X32, 5 pin ASCII keyboard Socket X71, subD, 25 pin DATA PNL2 Socket X31, subD, 9 pin currently unused

VIDEO OUT PNL2 HD socket X12, 15 pin currently unused MTB1 I/O Socket X61, subD, 37 pin

VIDEO OUT HD socket X11, 15 pin

Adjust VGA

MTB1 I/O Socket X62, subD, 25 pin VGA IN HD socket X23, 15 pin

Adjust NC CP/MEM5 CP/MEM4 Connector X22, subD, 20 pin Connector X21, RGB interface incl. BNC socket (CSYNC) subD, 15 pin

Colour panel rear view (interface strip only)

Fuse (M 4 A)

Fuse to protect the 24 V_/ input voltage to X22.

CAUTION Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.

LED The green LED indicates that the internal voltage is present.

ADJUST NC / ADJUST VGA Using these two potentiometers, the video signal input levels from the NC and the VGA may be adjusted in such a way that the brightness of both displays is equal.

1−36 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Panel − CP/MEM5

The panel is connected to the CP/MEM5 by means of the cables X21 and X22. Cable X22 contains the leads for the 24V supply voltage for the panel, analog sig nals (potentiometers) and keyboard signals. The video sync signal is transmitted down an internal coax lead. RGB video signals are carried by cable X21.

Connector X22 20 pin subD connector of special design with additional BNC socket for video sync signal transmission.

Connector X21 Video interface for transmission of RGB video signals and colour monitor identifica tion. Cable assignment:

SocketX21 ConnectorX21 Pin Pin Core colour Signal

8 8 red Red 15 15 Screen(red) Groundred 14 14 gn Green 7 7 Screen(gn) Groundgn

6 6 blue Blue 13 13 Screen(bl) Groundbl 5 Bridge black 12 Coreno.7

4 Bridge black 11 Coreno.8

1−37 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

Special socket, subD, 20pin Special connector, subD, 20pin to panel to CP/MEM5 max. 25 m Screened cable 2 x 8 x 0.14 1 x 4 x 0.31 1 x mini coax section

Cablediameter: 11+/−0,5mm Bending radius: single: 55 mm multiple: 110 mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right.

Screen Connection cable X22 panel − CP/MEM5

Ordering information

Type No. Length

Connection cable X22 048 028 2.5 m 052 265 5 m 048 029 10 m 048 668 20 m 065 617 25 m

Special socket, subD, 15pin Special connector, subD, 15pin to panel to CP/MEM5

max. 25 m

Screened cable

Cablediameter: 9,1+/−0,5mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right.

Connection cable X21 panel − CP/MEM5 Screen

Ordering information

Type No. Length

RGB cable X21 065 620 2.5 m 065 621 5m 065 622 10 m 065 623 20 m 065 624 25 m

1−38 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting pushbuttons and switches to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Up to 64 switching elements (make/break contact elements and pushbuttons) can be connected to panel interface X61. Pushbuttons and switches must be suited to a switched current of approx. 2 mA and a switching voltage of 9 V (gold contacts). Required minimum conductor cross section: 0.14 mm2. Screened cables must be used.

CAUTION Signals SCAN8 to SCAN15 are LOW active!

Connection of input signals to X61:

ByteE33

ByteE34

Scan8 27 Scan9 8 Scan10 7 Scan11 5 Addresses35.0−35.7 Scan12 6 Addresses36.0−36.7 Scan13 24 Addresses37.0−37.7 Scan14 25 Addresses38.0−38.7 26 Scan15 Addresses39.0−39.7

1−39 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting output elements to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

Note The panel can be set to either NC mode" (A35.7=LOW) or to PC mode" (A35.7=HIGH) by switching over the NC/PLC output signal A35.7 (OUT32).

Connecting output elements to X61 and X62:

from X61/X62 to output element Panel X61 max. 2.5 m +12Vout 13 Imax = 800 mA

9 OUT1 AddressA32.0 28 OUT2 AddressA32.1 10 Rv OUT3 AddressA32.2 29 Rv OUT4 AddressA32.3 11 Rv OUT5 AddressA32.4 30 Rv OUT6 AddressA32.5 12 Rv OUT7 AddressA32.6 31 Rv OUT8 AddressA32.7

Panel X62 OUT9 1 Rv AddressA33.0 OUT10 2 Rv AddressA33.1 OUT11 3 Rv AddressA33.2 OUT12 4 Rv AddressA33.3 . . . R . OUT31 23 v AddressA35.6 R OUT32 25 v AddressA35.7

CAUTION − OUT1 and OUT2: Imax = 100 mA per output OUT3 to OUT32: Imax = 20 mA per output − Signals OUT1 to OUT32 are LOW active!

Calculation of Rv 12V−UF Rv = − 500 W IF UF = LED conductingstate voltage IF = LED conductingstate current

1−40 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connecting potentiometers to the panel (systems without MTB1 I/O)

A total of 5 potentiometers (1 kW) can be connected to X61. 3 potentiometer inputs (IN0, IN1, IN4) are evaluated absolutely, i.e. the resistance value determines the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer setting. Suitable for, e.g. rapid, feed and spindle override). 2 potentiometer inputs (IN2, IN3) are evaluated incrementally, i.e. changes in re sistance determine the correcting quantity ( = potentiometer turning speed. Suit able for e.g. connecting an analog handwheel or endless potentiometer).

Panel X61 max. 5 m

19 AVCC 33 IN0 1 kOhm P1 36 AGND

15 IN1 1 kOhm P2

35 IN4 1 kOhm P3

34 IN2 1 kOhm P5

16 IN3 1 kOhm P6 Screenvia Analog metalcover handwheel tohousing Screened cable 3 x 0.14 Both ends of the screen must be connected to the casing.

Connection of potentiometer directly to X61

1−41 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − MTB1 I/O (MTB1 I/O X61 and MTB1 I/O X62)

Connection is by means of two subD sockets X61 and X62.

Socket X61, subD, 37 pin Pin configuration, socket X61 (37 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Socket X62, subD, 25 pin Pin configuration, socket X62 (25 pin)

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1−42 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

Connector, subD, to panel Socket, subD, to MTB1 I/O

max. 2 m

Screened cable 36 x 0.14 or 25 x 0.14

Cablediameter: X61:11mm X62:9,5mm

Screen attachment: metal bracket from body (screen is located in between) tightened evenly left and right. Connection cable X61 panel − MTB1 I/O Screen Connection cable X62 panel − MTB1 I/O

Ordering information Type No. Length

Cable X61 065 619 2 m Cable X62 065 618 2 m

1−43 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − ASCII keyboard (ASCIIKB)

Socket X71, subD, 25 pin Connection is by means of a 25 pin subD socket.

CAUTION This interface may only be used when no PC and MF2 keyboard are in operation!

Pin configuration, socket X71

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Ordering information Connection cable Type No. Length

ASCII keyboard 050 461 1.5 m Cyrillic ASCII keyboard 062 521 1.5 m

1−44 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − MF2 keyboard (MF2KB)

Socket X32, DIN, 5 pin Connection is by means of a 5 pin DIN socket. Interfaces are operated synchronously in series. All signal leads have TTL level. Data outputs are connected as opendrain. Idle state of CLOCK and DATA signal leads: HIGH. CAUTION A German MF2 keyboard with 102 keys and SCANSet2 must be used to oper ate the CNC! The IBMMF2 compatible Cherry keyboard G801800 HAD is recommended as the input keyboard. Using a different keyboard can lead to transmission problems which result in key board entries being unrecognised. If this occurs, the PC and the panel must be reset.Interface X32 may then be used only if no NC ASCII keyboard is connected to X71!

Pin configuration, socket X32 Pin Assignment

1 KEYBOARD−CLOCK 2 KEYBOARD−DATA 3 −−− 4 KEYBOARD−GROUND 5 KEYBOARD−5V

Note In NC mode, CNCspecific functions on the MF2 keyboard (group operating modes, softkeys, etc.) are assigned to different keys from the NC ASCII keyboard! Operating manuals prod. no. 4181 (CC220/320M) and prod. no. 4243 (CC220T) contain the relevant keyboard assignment diagrams. In PC mode, keyboard signals from and to the connected PC (on interface PCKB, X33) are transmitted 1:1.

‘ Connection panel − PC keyboard interface (PCKB) Connector X33, DIN, 5 pin Connection to the PC keyboard interface is by means of a 5 pin DIN plug. Cable length to PC: max. 25 m Assignment, connector X33 Pin Assignment 1 PC 2 PC 3 −−− 4 PC

5 PC Connection cable Ordering information: Type No. Length Cable MF2 X33 916 834 6 m

1−45 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Connection panel − multifrequency monitor (VIDEO OUT)

Socket X11, HD, 15 pin All signals for connecting the multifrequency monitor are available at X11. BL1_OUT (blue) are in the range 0 to 0.7 V. The level 0 V corresponds to a dark display. Synchronisation signals have TTL level with frequencies HSYNC: 20.6 kHz to 31.5 kHz VSYNC: 50 Hz to 70 Hz.

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 RD1_OUT 9 −−− 2 GN1_OUT 10 V_GND1 3 BL1_OUT 11 V_GND1 4 −−− 12 −−− 5 −−− 13 HSYNC1 6 RD1_OUT_SH 14 VSYNC1 7 GN1_OUT_SH 15 −−− 8 BL1_OUT_SH

‘ Connection panel − PCVGA interface (VGA IN)

Socket X23, HD, 15 pin The interface recieves the VGA video signals of the connected PC (cable length to PC: max. 25 m only with special cable) Analog signals with levels between 0 and 0.7 V are permissible for colour signal inputs RED_VGA, GRN_VGA and BLUE_VGA. For synchronisation signals, TTL le vels with frequencies HSYNC 31.5 kHz and VSYNC 50 Hz to 70 Hz are permissible.

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 RED_VGA 9 −−− 2 GRN_VGA 10 V_GND3 3 BLUE_VGA 11 V_GND3 4 −−− 12 −−− 5 −−− 13 HSYNC_VGA 6 RED_VGA_SH 14 VSYNC_VGA 7 GRN_VGA_SH 15 −−− 8 BLUE_VGA_SH

Note The potentiometers ADJUST NC and ADJUST VGA may be used to adjust the CNC and VGA video levels to the same brightness.

1−46 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Power supply connection 230 VAC

Power supply connection 230 VAC with integrated fuse: 1 x T 4 A

PEterminal

Ventilationinlets

Rear view colour panel (interface strip with power supply connection only)

230 VAC power supply input (nonheating unit socket with integrated fuse holders). Fuses: 1 x T 4 A

CAUTION Only use the fuse type recommended. Jumpering the fuses is not permitted. The operating panel must always be switched on together with the control (logic section)! Remove mains plug before opening the panel casing! The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic ventilation unit within the cas ing. The ventilation unit switches on automatically if the ambient temperature within the casing reaches approx. 48°C. Danger of injury! ! Never place your hands inside the fan impeller in case it switches on suddenly. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller!

‘ Specifications Ambient temperature +5°C to +50°C Storage temperature −25°C to +70°C Humidity class Class F to DIN 40040 Moisture condensation is not permitted The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust, acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, metallic vapours and other conductive impurities. Mechanical strength to IEC 6826/IEC 68227 Air pressure max. 1000 m above sea level Protection standard to DIN 40050 Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20 Power supply 230 V AC; +6% / −15% Power circuit breaker (integrated in nonheating unit socket) 1 x T 4 A Frequency 50 / 60 Hz −+ 1% Power input max. 80 W Screen diagonal 14" Horizontal deflection frequency 20.6 − 31.5 kHz Vertical deflection frequency 50 − 70 Hz Xray radiation conforms to Xray regulations (BGBI. I S. 114) dated 8. Jan. 87 § 5, section (2)

1−47 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

‘ Multifrequency monitor

The monitor ‘ can store and recognise up to 13 different screen formats. ‘ processes analog RGB signals in line frequency range 15 to 36 kHz; 45 to 120 display images per second can be output, according to the number of lines. ‘ is capable of displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics in colour. ‘ can be synchronised to green, separate CSYNC, or H and VSYNC via CSYNC. ‘ is designed for use in the northern hemisphere (if used south of the equator, colour purity and convergence errors can arise which are outside of the specified values).

Use of the unit The unit may be used only for the transmission of analog RGB signals from video sources with max. 1.0 V video signal at 75 W.

CAUTION Do not open the unit Certain components within the unit carry high voltage! Touching these components is highly dangerous.

Use a mains cable in good condition A damaged mains cable can cause fire or electrocution. Only touch the connector when connecting or removing the mains cable.

Ensure sufficient heat dissipation The ventilation outlets fitted on the unit must not be obscured. Ensure sufficient air circulation.

Do not place any objects in the unit Objects placed in the unit can cause damage to the unit or personal injury.

Do not place any objects on top of the unit Any fluids entering the unit can cause fire or electrocution.

Avoid unnecessary shaking of the unit Only use the original packaging when transporting. Take particular care to protect the picture tubes from jolts or knocks.

1−48 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

Image distortion through magnetic interference fields

Sufficient distance from magnetic interference field generators (e.g. motors, con tactors) must be ensured when the unit is installed. Even interferencefield strengths of Hss = 1 A/m can cause image shaking, ge ometry distortion and/or movement of the display. If units are installed next to each other, a mutual clearance of at least 30 cm must be maintained. When installing or assembling units on steel bases (tables, shelves etc.), note that magnetisation can in time lead to colour distortion and convergence errors. The colour purity of the picture tube can be negatively affected by the earth’s mag netic field if the unit is turned or tilted when switched on. As the builtin demagnetisation device is only effective when the unit is switched on when cold, a delay of approx. 10 minutes should be left between switchons to allow the demagnetisation to become effective again.

Brightness

Brightness at the site of installation should not exceed 300 lux. Glare suppression is effective only if the screen surface is free from dust and grease. Units should be installed in such a way that the screen does not reflect any lights, shiny surfaces or light wall surfaces. A display which is adjusted too light reduces the service life of the picture tube.

CAUTION The unit may be operated only on earthed power supplies or mains connectors with PE conductors and only when properly installed. Operation on IT systems, i.e. systems without earthed conductors is not permitted.

Storing picture setting data

Note These units are equipped with multistandard monitors capable of storing picture setting data from a maximum of 13 video sources. Once stored, the image belong ing to the video source appears on the screen always in the right size and position.

‘ Apply video signal and switch on the unit.

‘ The position, size and geometry of the display can be adjusted and stored using the builtin rotary switch and the +/− store keys. The rotary switch and the keys are situated on the backplane beneath a small cover. If all adjustments are carried out, they can be transferred to the EEPROM of the monitor by pressing the store key. The store key must be held down until the builtin red LED lights up and goes out again. This indicates that storage has been completed successfully.

1−49 Operating panels CC220 14" special colour panel Connectionconditions

Rotary switch pos. 1 Picture height 0 1 The required picture height may be ad justed by using the +/− keys alternately.

Rotary switch pos. 2 Picture width 0 The required picture width may be ad 2 justed by using the +/− keys alternately.

Rotary switch pos. 3 Vertical hold 0 The required vertical hold may be ad justed by using the +/− keys alternately. 3

Rotary switch pos. 4 Horizontal hold

0 The required horizontal hold may be ad justed by using the +/− keys alternately.

Rotary switch pos. 5 Pincushion distortion 0 The required pincushion distortion may be adjusted by using the +/− keys alter nately.

Settings 1 − 5 may be carried out in any sequence and as often as desired.

Note ‘ When storing, the rotary switch must be set to one of the positions 1−5. ‘ If the rotary switch is set to position 0, storing will not be carried out. ‘ When storing is completed, the rotary switch should be returned to position 0 (operation" setting). ‘ The +/− and store keys then have no function; the red LED shines con stantly.

1−50 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

1.4 Extended modules Please refer to the chapter Dimensions, installation and connection conditions" for information on dimensions and instructions for installation, electrical connec tions and maintenance. 1.4.1 MTB1 I/O The MTB1 I/O is an extended module for connection to the 12" or 14" panel. It trans mits signals between the machine panel and the PLC, and is connected to the 12" or 14" panel by means of two 2 m long cables.

CAUTION − Timecritical signals (e.g. Mstrobe) must not be passed across the MTB1 I/O. −All inputs that are signalled via the MTB1 I/O to the PLC must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles. − The inputs/outputs of the MTB1 I/O may only be used for the machine panel (pushbuttons and indicator lights).

MTB1 I/O 24V/0.1A Absolute potentiometers Panel port 32 outputs Digital handwheel

X14 X13 X12 X11 X62 X61 X71 X73

Fuse F1 LED for (6.3 A) supply voltage

PE conductor X28 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X72 X10 connection

Incremental Supply 64 inputs potentiometers voltage

The MTB1 I/O offers the following connections:

‘ 64 inputs (24 V=) for pushbuttons and switches (X21−X28) ‘ 32 outputs (24 V=, max. 100 mA) for indicators and controls (X11−X14) ‘ Three connections for absolute potentiometers (feed / rapid / spindle correc tion) (X71) ‘ Two connections for incremental potentiometers. (one of these for an analog handwheel (X72)) ‘ One connection for digital handwheel (X73) ‘ Two panel connections (X61 / X62) ‘ One supply voltage connection (X10) The MTB1 I/O requires a 24 V supply voltage (+20% / −15%) loaded to 4 A max. (supplied from external load power supply module).

Note All input and output leads and the potentiometers are connected by means of print plugin terminals MSTB1.5 to the MTB1 I/O.

1−51 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

‘ Connection to panel The MTB1 I/O is linked to the panel via 2 cables.

Port X61 (connection to panel) Connector, subD, 37 pin

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Ordering information Type No. Length

Cable X61 065 619 2 m Cable X62 065 618 2 m

Port X62 (connection to panel) Connector, subD, 25 pin System connection with TTL level between panel and MTB1 I/O. This interface is used to transmit switching information between the machine panel and the PLC.

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1−52 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

‘ Power supply

Supply voltage input (Port X10) Supply 24 V=, +20%/−15%; at the 4 pin plugin terminal X10. The supply voltage must be provided by the load power supply module (see section Electrical con nections"). IIN: max. 4 A. The input is protected against polarity reversal. Fuse F1 trips out if the 24 V supply is connected with reversed polarity.

CAUTION Only use the recommended type of fuse. Jumpering the fuse is not permitted.

X10

0V l =max.4A 0V in

6.3A 24V = Voltagesupply 24V = fromloadpowersupplymodule F1

CAUTION All inputs are signalled as LOW if the supply voltage fails. Power failures <50 ms are not recognised.

Ordering information Type No.

Input/output module MTB1 I/O 063 551 (64 inputs/32 outputs)

1−53 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

‘ Inputs

64 inputs (Ports X21−X28) 8x8 inputs for the connection of pushbuttons or switches in the machine panel, for example (8 plugin terminals, each 8 pin). The inputs are isolated from the control logic by octocouplers. Open inputs are recognised as logical LOW. The bounce time of the contacts must be < 32 ms.

Input voltage range: LOW −3 V to +5 V HIGH +17 V to +32 V

Rated input current: IIN approx. 6 mA Input signals are encoded by the MTB1 I/O and transmitted via the panel to the CNC. Evaluation by the PLC is then possible.

CAUTION All inputs relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they can be interpreted by the PLC as HIGH or LOW signals. The input and output signals may only be used for the machine panel (pushbuttons and indicator lights)!

The MTB1 I/O inputs and the PLC addresses are assigned as follows:

Address Address Word coupl. Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O inputs Remarks

A208.0 E32.0 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 0 A208.1 E32.1 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 1 A208.2 E32.2 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 2 A208.3 E32.3 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 3 A208.4 E32.4 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 4 A208.5 E32.5 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 5 A208.6 E32.6 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 6 A208.7 E32.7 CONNECTION X21, TERMINAL 7

A209.0 E33.0 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 0 A209.1 E33.1 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 1 A209.2 E33.2 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 2 A209.3 E33.3 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 3 A209.4 E33.4 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 4 A209.5 E33.5 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 5 A209.6 E33.6 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 6 A209.7 E33.7 CONNECTION X22, TERMINAL 7

A210.0 E34.0 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 0 A210.1 E34.1 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 1 A210.2 E34.2 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 2 A210.3 E34.3 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 3 A210.4 E34.4 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 4 A210.5 E34.5 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 5 A210.6 E34.6 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 6 A210.7 E34.7 CONNECTION X23, TERMINAL 7

1−54 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

Address Address Word coupl. Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O inputs Remarks

A211.0 E35.0 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 0 A211.1 E35.1 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 1 A211.2 E35.2 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 2 A211.3 E35.3 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 3 A211.4 E35.4 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 4 A211.5 E35.5 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 5 A211.6 E35.6 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 6 A211.7 E35.7 CONNECTION X24, TERMINAL 7

A212.0 E36.0 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 0 A212.1 E36.1 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 1 A212.2 E36.2 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 2 A212.3 E36.3 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 3 A212.4 E36.4 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 4 A212.5 E36.5 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 5 A212.6 E36.6 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 6 A212.7 E36.7 CONNECTION X25, TERMINAL 7

A213.0 E37.0 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 0 A213.1 E37.1 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 1 A213.2 E37.2 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 2 A213.3 E37.3 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 3 A213.4 E37.4 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 4 A213.5 E37.5 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 5 A213.6 E37.6 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 6 A213.7 E37.7 CONNECTION X26, TERMINAL 7

A214.0 E38.0 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 0 A214.1 E38.1 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 1 A214.2 E38.2 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 2 A214.3 E38.3 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 3 A214.4 E38.4 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 4 A214.5 E38.5 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 5 A214.6 E38.6 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 6 A214.7 E38.7 CONNECTION X27, TERMINAL 7

A215.0 E39.0 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 0 A215.1 E39.1 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 1 A215.2 E39.2 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 2 A215.3 E39.3 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 3 A215.4 E39.4 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 4 A215.5 E39.5 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 5 A215.6 E39.6 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 6 A215.7 E39.7 CONNECTION X28, TERMINAL 7

1−55 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

‘ Outputs

32 outputs (Ports X11−X14) 4 x 8 outputs for indicators and controls on the machine panel (4 plugin terminals, each 8 pin). By limiting the current to 250 mA, a voltage of 24V is present at the outputs; this makes the system short circuitproof.

If the output drive is heated illegally while limiting the current, it is switched off by a circuitbreaker. The output drive switches back on automatically after cooling down. Permissible load in permanent operation: 100 mA. Internal power failure at IOUT=100 mA: approx. 2 V. Status information for the following PLC output signals are passed to the MTB1 I/O via the operating panel:

Address Address Word coupl. Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O outputs Remarks

A248.0 A32.0 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 0 A248.1 A32.1 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 1 A248.2 A32.2 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 2 A248.3 A32.3 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 3 A248.4 A32.4 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 4 A248.5 A32.5 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 5 A248.6 A32.6 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 6 A248.7 A32.7 CONNECTION X11, TERMINAL 7

A249.0 A33.0 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 0 A249.1 A33.1 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 1 A249.2 A33.2 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 2 A249.3 A33.3 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 3 A249.4 A33.4 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 4 A249.5 A33.5 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 5 A249.6 A33.6 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 6 A249.7 A33.7 CONNECTION X12, TERMINAL 7

A250.0 A34.0 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 0 A250.1 A34.1 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 1 A250.2 A34.2 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 2 A250.3 A34.3 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 3 A250.4 A34.4 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 4 A250.5 A34.5 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 5 A250.6 A34.6 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 6 A250.7 A34.7 CONNECTION X13, TERMINAL 7

A251.0 A35.0 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 0 A251.1 A35.1 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 1 A251.2 A35.2 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 2 A251.3 A35.3 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 3 A251.4 A35.4 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 4 A251.5 A35.5 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 5 A251.6 A35.6 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 6 A251.7 A35.7 CONNECTION X14, TERMINAL 7

1−56 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

‘ Potentiometers

Max. cable length per potentiometer connection = 5 m. Use a screened 3core lead for each potentiometer. Avoid open leads. Potentiometers can be connected directly to X61 (panel) as well. The diagram shows the con nections directly to X61 and to X71/X72.

Panel MTB1 I/O max. 5 m X61 X71 19 0 AVCC 33 1 IN0 1 kOhm P1 36 2 AGND

15 4 IN1 1 kOhm P2 5

35 7 IN4 1 kOhm P3 8

Screenviataperpin tohousing

X72 0

34 1 IN2 1 kOhm P5 2

16 4 IN3 1 kOhm P6 Screenvia 5 Analog metalcover Screenviataperpin handwheel tohousing tohousing Screened cable 3 x 0.14 Both ends of the screen must be connected to the casing.

Connection diagram for potentiometers; connections X71/X72 (MTB1 I/O) and directly to X61 (panel)

Connection X71; P1, P2, P3 (potentiometer interface absolute) Connection of three potentiometers (1 kW) for rapid, feed and spindle correction. Potentiometer inputs are evaluated absolutely, i.e. the correcting quantity is deter mined by the resistance value (potentiometer setting).

Analog handwheel

Connection X72; P4 and P5 (potentiometer interface incremental) Connection for two endless potentiometers (1 kW). Potentiometer inputs are evalu ated incrementally, i.e. changes in resistance determine the correcting quantity (potentiometer turning speed). Pins 3, 4 and 5 are provided for the connection of an analog handwheel (endless potentiometer).

1−57 CC220 MTB1I/O Connectionconditions

Digital handwheel

Connection X73 The digital handwheel (see also section Handwheels") facilitates the positioning of synchronous and asynchronous axes as an alternative to Jog mode (exceptions being spindle axes and ANALOG axes). Connect at X73 of the MTB1 I/O or at a measuring system input of the SERVO i (for connection assignment see chapte SERVO i", for parameterisation see manual Machine parameters", set 9500).

Input for digital handwheel − technical data: Supply voltage 5 V Input signals A, A, B, B Input circuit Differential line receiver Ri = 180 Ohm; minimum voltage difference between the differential inputs 600 mV Pulse multiplication Quadrupling of input frequency Max. current input of digital handwheel 200 mA Max. input frequency 7 kHz Min. slope interval between counter pulses >200 ns Min. slope interval at reversal >0 ns Max. cable length for supply voltage 5 V 2.5 m (conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2)

MTB1 I/O, X73 max. 2.5m Digital handwheel 1 1 0 V 3 5 5 V 5 6 6 A 7 7 A 8 8 B 9 9 B

Shield bonding by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector Digital handwheel, connection diagram

‘ Specifications MTB 1 I/O

Ambient temperature +5°C to +55°C Storage temperature −25°C to +70°C Air humidity Air humidity class F to DIN 40040 Moisture condensation not permitted Protection standard to DIN 40050 IP20 Mounting position (casing) optional

The surrounding air must be free from high levels of dust, acid, caustics, corrosive agents, salts, me tallic vapours and other conductive impurities.

1−58 Systemconfiguration CC220 ASCIIkeyboard/handwheel Connectionconditions

1.4.2 Handwheels The handwheels (analog or digital) are active in Jog mode (toolsetting). The digital handwheel is effective for synchronous machining axes as well as asynchronous auxiliary axes (exception: spindle axes or ANALOG axes). Only one handwheel may be connected! Connection of analog handwheel: to X72 (MTB1 I/O) or X61 (panel) Connection of digital handwheel: to SERVO i measuring system input (X11−16) or to X73 (MTB1 I/O)

a ’

+ 0 +

ÊÊÊÊ

ÊÊÊÊ ÊÊ

ÊÊ 50 ÊÊ Analog handwheel Digital handwheel Ordering information

Type No.

Analog handwheel (1 kOhm, linear): 038 341 Special cable for analog handwheel (max. 30 m): 904 696 Digital handwheel (100 pulses/rev.): 069 167 Special cable for digital handwheel: 070/908 558

1.4.3 ASCII keyboard When programming direct at the machine or using the CC220 as a programming unit, we recommend the ASCII keyboard for fast data entry. In addition to the usual keys there are also keys for the group operating modes and function keys for the softkeys. A dropdown drawer is available for spacesaving installation at the ma chine. The ASCII keyboard is connected to the X71 interface at the panel. Data may still be input directly at the panel.

Ordering information

Type No.

ASCII keyboard: 050 461 Drawer for ASCII keyboard: 050 910

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 +/− ESC ! " # $%& / () * = 1234567890: _ @ CTR QW E R T Z U I O P LF RET + − CAP ASDFGHJ KL ; DEL < > ? SHIFT YXCVBNM, . / SHIFT TAB ? SPACE

1−59 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

1.4.4 DNC interfaces

There are two ways to couple an external computer to the CC 220 via a DNC inter face:

‘ using the plugin module SCP2 (with LSV2DNC) or ‘ using the extended module V24/20mA (with EDNC and LSV2DNC). While the SCP is designed as an intelligent plugin module for the card rack, the extended module V24/20 mA is a plugin module which can be plugged onto the plugin modules E/A 24/0.2, NCPLCBit, NCPLCWord3 (word coupler 3) or PCI/OS.

CAUTION The module contains components which can be destroyed by static discharges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching the module or com ponents on the module!

The functions of EDNC and LSV2DNC is described in the manuals DNC interface with simple protocol", prod. no. 4019 and DNC interface with LSV2 protocol", prod. no. 4140. The SCP connection assignment may be found in the chapter Plugin mod ules", section SCP2".

Extended module V24/20 mA (Order no. 056 737)

The V24/20mA interface connection may be found on the front panel of the plugin modules E/A 24/0.2, NCPLCBit, PCI/OS or NCPLCWord3. The interface con nection is indicated with X31 (socket, subD, 25 pin). Both interface variants (V24 and 20 mA) are wired on the socket. The V24 interface transmits data in the same way as the 20 mA interface. The para meterisation of the interface (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine parameter set 8500 DNC interface with simple protocol" or 8600 DNC interface with LSV2 protocol". Please refer to the manual Machine parameters".

V24 interface Level: HIGH: +3 V to +9 V LOW: −3 V to −9 V Transmission rate: max. 19200 baud with handshake. Handshake (EDNC): Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable via machine parameter P 8503. Handshake (LSV2DNC): via LSV2 protocol Cable length: max. 15 m Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2. The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX Receive data, CNC reception line. DTR Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected machine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal in standard computers).

1−60 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

DSR Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal in standard computers). GND Signal Ground. Screen contact to CNC casing via subD plug connector metallic casing. In the case of LSV2DNC and EDNC, the DTR signal remains permanently set after DNC operation is activated for the first time. With LSV2DNC, DSR is not evaluated (LSV2DNC uses no hardware handshake). The CNC does not evaluate the CTS status circuit! The RTS is set permanently to HIGH level on the CNC side! Further information on status signals (DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS) and their applica tion may be found in the section General information on status signals"!

CNC<15m HOSTcomputer SocketX31 socket SubD,25pin Plug Plug SubD,25pin TX 2 Data 3 RX RX 3 Data 2 TX DTR 20 Status 5 CTS DSR 6 Status 4 RTS GND 7 7 GND

Screentobody 1 Screen Use metal covers!

V24connectionbetweenCNCandHOSTcomputer(SubD25pin)

CNC<15m HOScomputer socketX31 Plug SubD25pin Plug Socket SubD9pin TX 2 Data 2 RX RX 3 Data 3 TX DTR 20 Status 8 CTS DSR 6 Status 7 RTS GND 7 5 GND

Screentobody Screentobody Use metal covers!

V24connectionbetweenCNCandHOSTcomputer(SubD9pin)

CAUTION − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

1−61 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

bridged with DSR on the CNC side. Similarly, if software handshake is used, DTR must be bridged with DSR on the CNC. In this case, the status leads to the external device must not be wired. At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR with DSR on the external device.

−At baud rates < 600 baud, no hardware handshake signals are evaluated on the CNC side.

−To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a V24 interface con nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20 mA inter face must be used if these lengths need to be exceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9600 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

20 mA interface (current loop)

Level HIGH: approx. 20 mA (min. 12 mA) LOW: approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA) Transmission rate: max. 9600 baud with handshake. Max. external voltage drop: 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA active) Voltage drop in control unit: max. 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA passive) Power supply of the driving device: max. 12 V Handshake (EDNC): Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable via machine parameter P 8503. Handshake (LSV2DNC): via LSV2 protocol Cable length (CNC active): max. 100 m Cable length (CNC passive): max. 50 m Cable type: screened cable Conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2.

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX+, TX− Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX+, RX− Receive data, CNC reception line. DTR+, DTR− Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected ma chine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal in standard computers). DSR+, DSR− Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal in standard computers). GND Signal Ground. Screen by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector Contact to CNC casing.

1−62 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

In the case of LSV2DNC and EDNC, the DTR signal remains permanently set after DNC operation is activated for the first time. With LSV2DNC, DSR is not evaluated (LSV2DNC uses no hardware handshake).

Further information on status signals (DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS) and their applica tion may be found in the section General information on status signals"!

CNC<50m DNcomputer SocketX31 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pin SubD25pin

RX+ 22 TX+ Data RX− 12 TX− TX+ 23 RX+ Data TX− 13 RX− DSR+ 11 DTR+ Status DSR− 14 DTR− DTR+ 19 DSR+ Status DTR− 16 DSR− Screentobody Screentobody Use metal covers! 20 mA passive (power source: interface of connected device)

With the 20 mA connection, one device must be defined as the active device and the other as the passive (active device acts as source). The 20 mA interface be comes active if pins 9 and 10 are bridged. If this bridge is not present, the interface is parameterised as passive.

CNC<100m DNcomputer SocketX31 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pin SubD25pin

RX+ 12 TX+ Data RX− 24 TX− TX+ 13 RX+ Data TX− 25 RX− DSR+ 14 DTR+ Status DSR− 18 DTR− DTR+ 16 DSR+ Status DTR− 21 DSR−

Activein 9 Activeout 10 Screentobody Screentobody Use metal covers!

20mA active (interface of extended module acts as source)

CAUTION − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

1−63 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

IMPORTANT − The handshake for the extended module V24/20 mA can be selected via ma chine parameter P 8503 (for EDNC). The softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL has no relevance for the extended module V24/20 mA. If software handshake is used, it may be necessary at X31 to bridge pin 14 with 18 (if DNC interface is switched as active) or pin 14 with 18 and pin 11 with 10 (if DNC interface is switched as passive).

−At baud rates < 600 baud, no hardware handshake signals are evaluated on the CNC side.

−To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a 20 mA connection should not exceed 50 or 100 m. The maximum cable length admissible if CNC is acting as the driving device (20 mA active) is 100 m. This is reduced to 50m if the peripheral interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20 mA passive). Suitable repeaters must be used if these lengths are exceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9200 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

1−64 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

General information on status signals

This section describes the functionality of control signals with standard PC inter faces as an example (subD, 25 pin and subD, 9 pin). Functions or pin assign ments which are different for the CNC are described unter the heading Note".

DTR / DSR The DTR and DSR connections enable standard PCs connected to each other to recognise whether the other PC is switched on or its interface is active/initialised. The diagram below shows the connection of two computers connected to each other via V24 interfaces:

Computer1<15m Computer2 Socket Socket SubD25pin Plug Plug SubD25pin TX 2 Data 3 RX RX 3 Data 2 TX RTS 4 Status 5 CTS CTS 5 Status 4 RTS DTR 20 Status 6 DSR DSR 6 Status 20 DTR GND 7 7 GND Screentobody Screentobody orpin1

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD25pin−>SubD25pin)

Computer1<15m Computer2 Socket Socket SubD25pin Plug Plug SubD9pin TX 2 Data 2 RX RX 3 Data 3 TX RTS 4 Status 8 CTS CTS 5 Status 7 RTS DTR 20 Status 6 DSR DSR 6 Status 4 DTR GND 7 5 GND Screentobody Screentobody orpin1

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD25pin−>SubD9pin)

Computer1<15m Computer2 Socket Socket SubD9pin Plug Plug SubD9pin TX 3 Data 2 RX RX 2 Data 3 TX RTS 7 Status 8 CTS CTS 8 Status 7 RTS DTR 4 Status 6 DSR DSR 6 Status 4 DTR GND 5 5 GND Screentobody Screentobody

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD9pin−>SubD9pin)

1−65 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

For example, computer 1 relays to computer 2 via its DTR connection the informa tion that its interface is activated. Computer 2 calls up this message via its DSR con nection and recognises" that a data exchange is possible in principle. In general, the DTR connection of a computer is activated always after the para meterisation/initialisation of the interface (baud rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, parity etc.). If this does not occur, communication between the two computers may be lost; e.g. computer 1 does not set its DTR output but computer 2 calls up its DSR input. In this case, the connections DTR and DSR should be bridged at computer 2.

Note With the CNC, the connections DTR and DSR are used for the hardware handshake (see following section RTS/CTS")! The functionality correponds to the RTS or CTS connections on standard PCs. If a computer connected to the CNC demands the signals DTR and DSR, the follow ing connection possibilities arise: ‘ Bridge the connections DTR and DSR at the computer. No leads are required to the CNC from these connections. Disadvantage: the computer may at tempt a data transfer even when the CNC is switched off. or ‘ Connect the DSR connection of the computer with the RTS connection of the CNC. At the CNC, RTS is set internally to HIGH level permanently.

RTS / CTS, XON / XOFF (Handshake)

During data transmission it must be ensured that the receiver is able to read in and process the incoming data fast enough, since otherwise information can be lost during transmission. For this reason a handshake" between the sender and the receiver is used during data transmission. On the one hand, handshake" refers to − the ability on the part of the receiver to indicate to the sender that it is tempor arily interrupting the data transfer, or is continuing an interrupted data transfer. On the other hand, it refers to − the ability on the part of the sender to respond correctly to these commands" of the receiver.

There are generally two conventional handshake variants: Hardware handshake (RTS/CTS) Software handshake (XON / XOFF). Although at least two additional signal leads apart from the data leads TX and RX (RTS and CTS, or DTR and DSR for the CNC!) are required between stations with hardware handshake, software handshake is performed by means of additional control characters to data leads TX and RX ( and ; =XON, =XOFF).

1−66 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD25pin−>SubD25pin)

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD25pin−>SubD9pin)

V24connectionbetweentwoPCs(SubD9pin−>SubD9pin)

For example, computer 1 transmits a file to computer 2. Each time a new character is read in from computer 2 to the interface (to be more exact, to the UART), com puter 2 must transfer this individual character to a memory area specially created for reception (an input buffer, usually in the form of a ring memory). This is per formed usually by means of an interrupt signal issued by the UART to the main pro cessor of computer 2 which executes a special, very short program routine for the transfer. The higher the transmission rate of the data leads (bits/second or baud), the lesser the time available to the main processor of computer 2 to process the characters collected in the input buffer. In order to prevent further data being read in when the input buffer is full(which would overwrite existing data), computer 2 deactivates (usually when the input

1−67 Systemconfiguration CC220 DNCinterfaces Connectionconditions

buffer has a filling factor of 75%) the RTS signal (with hardware handshake), or transmits the character XOFF" via the data lead TX (with software handshake). Computer1 subsequently interrupts the data transmission. Computer 2 can then read out and process the data contained in the input buffer. When the input buffer is emptied again to approx. 25% of its capacity, computer 2 activates the RTS signal (or sends the character XON" via data line TX), at which point computer 1 continues the data transmission.

Note The connections DTR and DSR, and not RTS and CTS, are used at the CNC for the hardware handshake! Therefore, the following connections in addition to data leads TX and RX must be created for coupling to an external computer: With hardware handshake: DTR (on CNC) to CTS (on computer) DSR (on CNC) to RTS (on computer). Also if necessary: RTS (on CNC) to DSR (on computer). With software handshake: Bridge RTS and CTS on computer Bridge DTR and DSR on computer.

1−68 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5 PLC couplings

The CC 220 is designed basically to operate with a PLC. Depending on which PLC is used, different types of coupling between CNC and PLC can be used (bit/word coupling). The type of coupling used also directly af fects the potential function scope of the whole system.

PLC Coupling Word processing PIC 250 (internal PLC, integrated on Bit coupling no I/O card or PCI/OS card in logic section) CL 300 (external PLC) Bit coupling yes PC 600 (external PLC) Bit coupling yes PC 600 (external PLC) Word coupling yes

Bit coupling means that the interrogation and setting of individual bits or of a com plete data word (word processing depends on the PLC used) within a 288 bit PLC output address area (A0.0A35.7, CNC inputs and MTB1 I/O outputs) and a 320 bit input address area (E0.0E39.7, CNC outputs and MTB1 I/O inputs) can be per formed by the PLC. Therefore the PLC can access the CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O for the CNC.

With word coupling communication" between PLC and CNC is not restricted to the CNC digital interface area and the MTB1 I/O area. CNC and PLC can access a common data stock" rapidly via the commumication memory (128 kByte dual port RAM on the NCPLC word coupling card) (in addition to the CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O this includes e.g. CNC system data such as potentiometer and panel data, value tables, correction and ZS tables, etc.). Word coupling also facili tates communication between the PLC and a DNC computer (LSV2DNC, trans parent communication).

Note Word coupling is possible only between CC 220 M and PC 600!

CAUTION PLC programming must only be carried out by qualified personnel. The applicable safety regulations and standards must be observed for the con ! figuration of the PLC adaptation. Bosch accepts no liability for resultant damage which could have been avoided through correct configuration of the PLC adaptation!

1−69 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.1 PIC 250 (Order no. 066635) The PIC 250 is a PLC in the form of an extended card which can be plugged onto the plugin module I/O 24/0.2" or PCI/OS".

CAUTION The module contains components which can be destroyed by static discharges! For this reason, ensure equipotential bonding before touching the module or com ponents on the module!

PIC 250 Performance features:

F 512 digital inputs F 32 timers F 512 digital outputs F 8 counters F 1024 markers F 2k memory (4k and 8k optional)

The active PIC 250 program is stored in the EEPROM of the PIC 250 and can be programmed and edited from the CNC operating panel. Alternatively the Bosch programming units PG4 or PG5 can be used for programming purposes. The full PIC functions are described in a separate manual.

If using the I/O 24/0.2: 64 inputs (24 VDC) and 40 outputs (24 V/0.2 A) are available for adaptation of ma chine and PLC. When using the MTB1 I/O module the number of inputs increases by a further 64 and the outputs by 32 (for a description of the MTB1 I/O see section MTB1 I/O"). There is also a socket for a second I/O 24/0.2" without PIC. This can increase the number of inputs and outputs for machine signals from 64 to 128 or from 40 to 80 (for address assignment see section Module I/O 24/0.2").

If using the PCI/OS and power supply module PS75: A maximum of 13 PLC I/O cards and 1 AG/ZS can be connected. Bear in mind that PIC250 can address only 512 input and 512 output signals! Part of this is reserved already for the CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O. Therefore the maximum which may be used for PLCI/O are addresses 40.0 to 63.7 as inputs (=192) and 36.0 to 63.7 as outputs (=224)!

AdressesPIC250 CNC E0.0−E31.7 E40.0−E63.7 Digital interface A0.0−A31.7 PIC250 Machine

I/OdataMTB1I/O A36.0−A63.7

X22 X21

X61 E32.0−E39.7 Panel MTB1I/O Machinepanel

X62 A32.0−A35.7

1−70 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

Address distribution PIC 250: Inputs: 512 CNC digital interface (256): E0.0 −E31.7 MTB1 I/O (64): E32.0 −E39.7 Machine (max. 192): E40.0 −E63.7 Outputs: 512 CNC digital interface (256): A0.0 −A31.7 MTB1 I/O (32): A32.0 −A35.7 Machine (max. 224): A36.0 −A63.7 Markers: 1024 Remanent (256): M0.0 −M31.7 Not remanent (184): M32.0 −M54.7 Markers for byte operations (144): M55.0 −M72.7 Not remanent (408): M73.0 −M123.7 Special markers (32): M124.7 −M127.7 (see machine parameter P6009!)

1−71 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.2 CL 300

The PIC 300 is a PLC with bit and word processing commands and operates in a structured modular configuration. The interface coupling is established via the CNC switching group NCPLCBit", the NCPLCBit" connection cable and the PLC connection module AG/Z or AG/P (for a description of the NCPLCBit and the cable see section NCPLCBit").

CL 300 Performance features:

F 512 digital inputs F 128 timers F 512 digital outputs F 128 counters F max. 512 analog inputs F 16kwords memory or max. 128 analog outputs F intelligent extended modules F 2048 markers (+32 special markers) F 16 ms/k processing time

Bit coupling means: connecting the CNC and MTB1 I/O interface to the CL300. The PLC sees the CNC signals as machine signals (inputs and outputs). No further data traffic between CNC and PLC is possible. The PLC functions and program ming correspond to the particular characteristics of the 300 family. Monitor functions using the CNC panel for inputs and outputs are possible. A sep arate programming unit (PG4 or PG5) is required for programming and editing the CL 300 program.

AdressenCL300:

CNC CL300 E0.0−E31.7 E0.0−E39.7 E40.0−E63.7 Digital interface NC A0.0−A31.7 PLC Machine Bit

I/OdataMTBI/O A0.0−A35.7 A36.0−A63.7 AG/ZorAG/P

X21 X22

X61 E32.0−E39.7 Panel MTB1I/O Machinepanel

X62 A32.0−A35.7

Address distribution CL 300:

Inputs: 512 CNC digital interface (256): E0.0 −E31.7 MTB1 I/O (64): E32.0 −E39.7 Machine (192): E40.0 −E63.7 Outputs: 512 CNC digital interface (256): A0.0 −A31.7 MTB1 I/O (32): A32.0 −A35.7 Machine (224): A36.0 −A63.7 Markers: 2048 Remanence is adjustable M0.0 −M255.7

The start addresses of the inputs and outputs of the CNC digital interface (incl. MTB1 I/O if present) are relocatable via machine parameter P 6008 (used when several CNCs are to be connected to a single PLC. Advisable with PC 600 only).

1−72 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.3 PC 600

The PIC 600 is a PLC with bit and word processing commands and operates in a structured modular configuration.

The interface coupling can also be bit oriented. This system allows several CC con trols to operate on a single PC 600 (multiple bit coupling). In this case the connec tion to the PLC is established via the module NCPLCBit, the connection cable NCPLCBit" and the switching group AG/Z or AG/P (max. 2 NCs per AG/Z). See section NCPLCBit" for a description of the NCPLCBit module and the connec tion cable. If more than 2 AG/Z modules (per rack) are required, then AG/P modules can be used.

The PC 600 can be wordcoupled also to the CC 220 M. In this case the connection is made via module NCPLCWord3 (WK3), the CNC − PC600 connection cable and the AG/NC3S switching group. The AG/NC3S module must be fitted to slots 10 to 14 in the PLC rack. The section NCPLCWord3" contains a description of the NCPLCWord3 and the connection cable.

Note Word coupling is possible only between CC 220 M and PC 600!

See the Price List for PLC module ordering information.

In conjunction with word coupling a monitor operation via the CNC panel facili tates the display of inputs and outputs, markers, timers, counters and data mod ules on the CNC screen. A separate programming unit (PG4 or PG5) is required for programming and edit ing the PC 600 program. The user also has the full range of PC 600 functions at his disposal, e.g. interfaces to terminals, barcode readers, tool encoding systems, analog inputs etc.

Linking one wordcoupled CNC to one or several bit coupled CNCs is possible.

PC 600 Performance features:

F 2048 digital inputs F 256 timers F 2048 digital outputs F 256 counters F 2048 analog inputs F 64k words memory (RAM, EPROM) F 512 analog outputs F intelligent extended modules F 4096 markers F 4 ms/k mean processing time

1−73 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

PC 600 with bit coupling

AddressesPC600(bitcoupled):

CNC PC600 E0.0−E31.7 E0.0−E39.7 E40.0−E255.7 Digital interface NC A0.0−A31.7 PLC Machine Bit

I/OdataMTBI/O A0.0−A35.7 A36.0−A255.7 AG/ZorAG/P

X21 X22

X61 E32.0−E39.7 Panel MTB1I/O Machinepanel

X62 A32.0−A35.7

Address distribution PC 600 (bit coupled): Inputs: 2048 CNC digital interface (256): E0.0 −E31.7 MTB1 I/O (64): E32.0 −E39.7 Machine (1728): E40.0 −E255.7 Outputs: 2048 CNC digital interface (256): A0.0 −A31.7 MTB1 I/O (32): A32.0 −A35.7 Machine (1760): A36.0 −A255.7 Markers: 4096 Not remanent (2048): M0.0 −M255.7 Remanent (2048): M256.0 −M511.7

The start addresses of the inputs and outputs of the CNC digital interface (incl. MTB1 I/O if present) are relocatable via machine parameter P6008 (used when several CNCs are to be connected to a single PLC > multiple bit coupling).

When PLC programming remember that you can define: 40 Organisation modules (OB0−OB39) 128 Program modules (PB0−PB127) 128 Function modules (FB0−FB127) 256 Extended modules (ZB0−ZB255) 128 Data modules (DB0−DB127).

1−74 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

PC 600 with word coupling (CC 220 M only)

AddressesPC600(wordcoupled):

CNC PC600 A176.0−A207.7 A176.0−A215.7 E0.0−E255.7 Digital interface NC A216.0−A247.7 PLC Machine Word

I/OdataMTBI/O A216.0−A251.7 A0.0−A175.7 AG/NC3−S

X21 X22

X61 A208.0−A215.7 Panel MTB1I/O Machinepanel

X62 A248.0−A251.7

Address distribution PC 600 (word coupled): Please note that all CNC and MTB1 I/O relevant signals must be addressed when word coupling as PLC outputs!

Inputs: 2048 from machine (2048): E0.0 −E255.7 Outputs: 2048 to machine (1408): A0.0 −A175.7 from CNC digital interface (256): A176.0 −A207.7 from MTB1 I/O (64): A208.0 −A215.7 to CNC digital interface (256): A216.0 −A247.0 to MTB1 I/O (32): A248.0 −A251.0 Markers: 4096 (see Limits) M0.0 −M 511.7

1−75 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.4 Limits to PLC program generation

Bit coupling and use of the PC 600 and CL 300: With bit coupling the following particular features should be taken into account when creating the PLC user program:

1. PLC cycle times The PLC cycle time (from EP to EP) is: 2ms < cycle time < watchdog time (defined in machine parameter 6002). The watchdog time is defined in machine parameter 6002. The time is computed indirectly since the value in P 6002 gives the number of task changes. A task change is performed in approx. 10 ms.

Example: P6002=11. Watchdog time is 10 ms x 11 = 110 ms. For the example this means that if no EP is executed in the PLC after approx. 110 ms, the error message PLC time inhibit" will appear at the CNC. The READY2 signal is deleted also!

CAUTION Calling alarm and timecontrolled modules can have a considerable effect on PLC cycle times! For this reason ensure that when generating the PLC user program the above limits for PLC cycle times are observed!

2. Alarm processing (CL 300 only) Alarm processing must be inhibited in the CL 300 while I/O display processing is in progress!

3. Step mode (CL 300 only) Step mode is not allowed!

Word coupling and use of the PC 600: A wide range of standard modules for a variety of tasks are available from Bosch (e.g. function and program modules for LSV2DNC, tool management).

The structured modular configuration of the PC 600 offers the PLC programmer the ability to define: 40 Organisation modules (OB0−OB39) 128 Program modules (PB0−PB127) 128 Function modules (FB0−FB127) 256 Extended modules (ZB0−ZB255) 128 Data modules (DB0−DB127).

To prevent these modules conflicting with your own modules, only the following module names should be used for your own developments: OB0−OB39 PB64−PB127

1−76 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

FB40−FB127 ZB0−ZB255 DB21−DB127

There are also limitations on the use of timers, counters, markers and outputs. The following are approved for use by the user: Freely usable timers (192): T0 − T191 Freely usable counters (224): Z0 − Z223 Freely usable markers (2304): M0.0 − M287.7 Freely usable scratch markers (256): M480.0 − M511.7 Freely usable outputs (960): A0.0 − A119.7 Freely usable inputs (2048): E0.0 − E255.7

CAUTION Calling alarm and timecontrolled modules can have a considerable effect on PLC cycle times! If the time defined in machine parameter P6002 is exceeded, the error message PLC time inhibit" will appear at the CNC. The READY2" signal is also cancelled for a short time! For this reason ensure that when generating the PLC user program these limits for PLC cycle times are observed!

See the Price List for PLC module ordering information.

1−77 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.5 Possible PLC couplings

CNC with I/O 24/0.2 and PIC 250

CNC−Cardrack1.05

Inputs/outputs of I/O 24/0.2. to machine: to X11 from the machine: to X21 and X22.

I/O24/0.2withintegratedPIC250 poss.addition 2ndI/OcardwithoutPIC250

CNC with PC I/O and PIC 250

CNCCardrack1.05 PLCexpansionunit ËËËËËË

PLCI/O

Connection cable for PCI/OS and AG/ZS: 0.55m: 064 754

AG/ZS (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) PCI/OSwithintegratedPIC250

Max. 1 PLC expansion rack can be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS by means of the AG/ZS.

Possibleaddition:a

NCPLC cardrack PLCexpansionunit

ËËËËËË ËËËËËË PLCI/O PLCI/O

Connection cable for PCI/OS and AG/ZS: 0.55m: 064 754

AG/ZS (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) PCI/OSwithintegratedPIC250

The connection between PCI/OS and the PLC I/O cards in the NCPLC card rack is established internally in the card rack via the backplane. Max. 1 PLC expansion unit can be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS by means of the AG/ZS.

CAUTION If the power supply module PS75 is used max. 1 PLC expansion unit (but max. 14 I/O cards in the whole system!) may be coupled via X11 of the PCI/OS and X11 of the AG/ZS! No switching groups addressed on the extended field (EI/EO) or which could interrupt other units should be used in this expansion unit!

1−78 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

CNC with bit coupling card NCPLCBit

PLCexpansionunit

ËËËËË ËËËËË PLCI/O

AG/Z (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) Cable: 041 535

CNCCardrack1.05 PLCbasicunit ËËËËË e.g.PC600 Connection cable for NCPLCBit and AG/Z: 0.5m: 041 535 0.75m: 062 970

AG/Z (can be connected to slots 1014 in the NCPLCBit PLC basic unit)

The PLC basic unit is coupled via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of the AG/Z. The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion units. Please refer to PLC documentation for possible PLCside combinations.

NC/CL3Cardrack ËËËËËË The connection between the NCPLCBit and CL300+ PLCI/O the CL300 is established internally in the cardrack via the backplane. A cable and an AG/Z are not needed in this case.

NCPLCBit

NC/CL3cardrack PLCexpansionunit

ËËËËËË ËËËËË

CL300+ PLCI/O PLCI/O

Connection cable for NCPLCBit and AG/Z: 0.5 m: 041 535 0.75 m: 062 970 AG/Z (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) NCPLCBit

Max. 1 PLC expansion unit (max. 14 I/Os in the whole system) may be coupled to the CL300 via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of the AG/Z. CAUTION No switching groups addressed on the extended field (EI/EO) or which could interrupt other units should be used in this expansion unit!

1−79 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

PLCexpensionunit ËËËËË Connection cable for SPS−E/A NCPLCBit and AG/Z: 0.5 m: 041 535 0.75 m: 062 970

AG/Z (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) Cable: 041 535

NC/PLCCardrack PLCbasicunit

ËËËËË ËËËËË

SPS−E/A z.B.PC600 AG/Z

Connection cable for AG/Z (can be connected to slots 1014 in the PLC basic unit) NCPLCBit NCPLCBit and AG/Z: 0.5 m: 041 535 0.75 m: 062 970

The PLC basic unit is coupled via X11 of the NCPLCBit and X11 of the AG/Z (in the PLC basic unit). The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion units. PLCI/O cards in the NCPLC card rack can be connected to the PLC basic unit or expansion unit via an AG/Z.

CNC with word coupling card NCPLCWord3

PLCexpansionunit ËËËËË

PLCI/O

AG/ZS (can be connected to the first slot as well as the last in the expansion unit) Connection cable for AG/NC3S and AG/ZS: 0.55 m: 064 754

CNCcardrack1.05 PLCbasicunit ËËËËË

Connection cable for PC600 NCPLCWord3 and AG/NC3S: 0.7 m: 060 742 1.5 m: 060 743

AG/NC3S (can be connected to slots 1014 in the NCPLCWord3 PLC basic unit)

The PLC basic unit is coupled via X71 of the NCPLCWord3 and X71 of the AG/NC3S. The PLC basic unit can be connected with additional expansion units. Please refer to PLC documentation for possible PLCside combinations.

1−80 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

1.5.6 PLC modules

Connection module AG/NC3S (Order no.: 071 204) The PLC module acts as an interface connection for the PC600 to the CNC on the basis of the word coupling (only in conjunction with the PLC modules ZE602, order no.: 062340, with components list index greater than/equal to 107 or ZE611, order no.: 063 804, with components list index greater than/equal to 105 or ZE612, order no.: 063 815, with components list index greater than/equal to 105!). The AG/NC3S is connected to the word coupling card NCPLCWord3 fitted in the CNC card rack (for available connection cables see Plugin modules", section NCPLCWord3"). The AG/NC3S must be fitted to slots 10 to 14 in the PLC basic unit.

BOSCH

Connection for a PLC expansion unit via AG/ZS or AG/PS (socket X61, subD, 50 pin)

AG/NC3−S

System connection to NCPLCWord3 in CNC rack (connector X71, subD, 50 pin)

Earth star point (connection for cable screening)

Front view AG/NC3S

CAUTION The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off! Similarly, connected cables must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off!

1−81 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

Connection module AG/ZS (Order no.: 064 719)

The PLC module is used

−to interface a PLC expansion unit to the PLC basic unit (via the AG/NC3S), which in turn is wordcoupled with a CNC, or −to interface a PLC expansion unit to the CNC module PCI/OS.

BOSCH

Connection for an AG/ZS or an AG/NC3S (socket X61, subD, 50 pin)

AG/Z−S

Connection for a AG/ZS or an AG/NC3S (socket X61, subD, 50 pin)

Earth star point (connection for cable screening) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Front view AG/ZS

Connecting to AG/NC3S: For this purpose the AG/ZS is connected to the connection module AG/NC3S fitted to the PLC basic unit (via socket X61) (connection cable between AG/ZS and AG/NC3S, length 0.55 m: 064 754). The AG/ZS may be connected to the first as well as the last slot in the PLC expan sion unit. The two sockets on the front panel of the AG/ZS are arranged parallel to each other so that the connection to the AG/NC3S can be made via the upper or the lower socket as desired. In any case only one AG/NC3S may be connected!

1−82 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

Connecting to PCI/OS: The connection between PCI/OS and AG/ZS is established via the connection cable 064 754 (length: 0.55 m). The AG/ZS may be connected to the first as well as the last slot in the PLC expan sion unit. The two sockets on the front panel of the AG/ZS (X61) are arranged parallel to each other so that the connection to the PCI/OS can be made via the upper or the lower socket as desired. This connection method excludes the fitting of any further con nection modules to the second socket.

Please refer to PLC documentation for descriptions of connection modules AG/Z (order no. 041 523) and AG/P (order no. 047 944). These connection modules are used for bit coupling between the CNC and the PLC (via NCPLCBit coupler).

CAUTION The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off! Similarly, connected cables must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off!

1−83 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

Digital input modules E 24 V/DC, 95way (Order no.: 071 252)

This module is intended mainly for use in CNC combiracks. A maximum of 95 input signals (24 V=) can be transmitted to the PLC logic via the module. To save space there are no LEDs on the front panel to display the logic level. Connection of all input signals is made via 12 plugin terminals, each 8pin (X210 to X221) with contact spacing of 3.5 mm. The external 24 V= supply (from load power supply module) is established via a 5pin plugin terminal (X10) with contact spacing of 5 mm.

BOSCH

0 0 Connection X210 Connection X216

7 7

Connection X211 Connection X217

Connection X212 Connection X218

Connection X213 Connection X219

Connection X214 Connection X220

0 0 Connection X215 Connection X221

7 7 S Extended field I/O field E24V= F r S1 24V Input Voltage X 24V o 24 V DC +20% /−15% max. 1 24V n 0 0V t 0V S3

S2 Address

Debounce time ON OFF Front view E24 V/DC (component side) Front view E24 V/DC

CAUTION The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off! Similarly, connected cables must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off!

1−84 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

Input voltage 24 V= (connection X10)

24 V= supply, +20%/−15%; (Weidmüller plugin terminal MSTB 1.5, 5pin) Conductor cross section max. 1.5 mm2, supply line with insulation: max. 3 mm diameter. Supply via an external load power supply module (see section Electrical connec tions"). Maximum input current: 50 mA.

NOTE Internal power input (from CNC power supply module PSxx) of module (12 V): type. 12 mA, max. 60 mA

Digital inputs (connections X210 to 221) (12 plugin terminals with contact spacing 3.5 mm, 8pin) 95 inputs are available. The inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.

CAUTION Input X221, pin 7 is indicated with S" on the front panel of the module. This pin may not be used as a normal input since the bit allocated to it monitors the 24 V= supply. In this case Bit = 0: 24 V missing Bit = 1: 24 V OK The last bit must be read cyclically by the PLC if the card is operated in the ex tended field. Otherwise all input bits remain at 0"!

Specifications of an input: Input voltage range: LOW: −3 V to +5 V HIGH: +15 V to +30 V Input current at 5 V: 0.65 mA to 0.7 mA at 15 V: 2.0 mA to 5.2 mA at 30 V: 4.0 mA to 10.4 mA Temp. mean of input current at 15 V: approx. 2.1 mA at 30 V: approx. 4.3 mA Input delay from LOW to HIGH: adjustable in 8 stages with S2 HIGH to LOW: adjustable in 8 stages with S2

Auxiliary supply approx. 11 V X210toX221 Signalinput

X10 for auxiliary supply 24V = generation 24V = l in =max.50mA Scan 24V = pulses 0V Supplyvoltage 0V fromloadpowersupply module

The input circuit is provided with a suppressor diode (limiting voltage approx. 70 V) to protect against transients.

1−85 Systemconfiguration CC220 PLCcouplings Connectionconditions

The input current is switched to pulses by the scan system as soon as the input voltage exceeds 13 V. The pulse repetition time corresponds to the minimum input delay given in table 1. Exception: The minimum pulse repetition time is 2.5 ms when the S2 switch position is 0".

Debouncing (rotary switch S2) The times for the debouncing of all inputs signals can be set by using S2. A setting between 0" and 7" should be selected (position 8" corresponds to position 0", position 9" corresponds to 1").

Switch setting S2 01 2 3 4 5 6 7

min. input delay 0 2.5 5 10 20 40 80 160

max. input delay 3.1 5.6 10.6 20.6 40.6 80.6 160.6 320.6

pulse suppressed if shorter 0.005 2 4.5 9.5 19.5 39.5 79.5 159.5

pulse recognised 3.1 5.6 10.6 20.6 40.6 80.6 160.6 320.6 if longer

Table 1 (all times in ms)

Addressing the module (S3 and S1) The module address is fixed using DIL switch S3. The address set in this way corre sponds to the address of the first byte. Slide switch S1 can be used to specify also whether the module is to be operated in the I/O field or the extended field.

Switch S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S37 S38

Significance − 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

NOTE Switch S31 is not connected. Only one evennumbered address can be set. It is advisable to leave S31 at position OFF ("0") for reasons of clarity.

CAUTION No address may be set for which the last byte of the input card lies outside the ad dressing range of the PLC or the used coupler! Otherwise all input bits remain at logical 0"!

1−86 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

1.6 External expansion units

1.6.1 DCR cassette player

Specifications

Mains voltage: 220 V/110 V (+15% −10%); 50/60 Hz; max. mains failure time: 20 ms

Dimensions and weight: Width: 265 mm Height: 149 mm Depth: 303 mm Weight: approx. 7.5 kg

Operating temperature range 10°C−45°C

Cassette recorder: TEAC MT204

Data carrier: Magnetic tape cassette to ECMA 34

Serial interface: V24 (RS 232 C), line current 20/60 mA (active/ passive) depending on connection

Parallel interface: Signal assignment conforms to Remex reader 7300 in mode 6

Max. Cable length: 15 m for V24, 100 m for 20 mA

Transmission speed: serial 100, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 baud parallel 50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600, 1200 characters/s

Operating modes: Search forwards/backwards Fast rewind serial: write/read parallel: read

Settings at the DCR

Code: BIN Baud rate: C (4800 baud) Parity: Off Stop bit: 1

Settings at the CNC

Device selection: CASSETTE 4800 BAUD

1−87 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

Connection cable CNCDCR (20 mA interface)

Connector DCR Connector X11 SubD, 25pin SubD, 25pin

2.5 m

20 mA SERIAL

strainrelief clamp

Pin assignment

Colour Connector DCR Connector X11 blue 12 23 red 13 22 violet 14 19 black 16 11 white 18 16 brown 21 14 yellow 24 13 green 25 12 Screen 1 Connector housing

Ordering information

Type No.

Connection cable CNCDCR (2.5 m) 046 266 DCR cassette player 036 485 Blank cassette (min. qty. 10) 036 087

1−88 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

1.6.2 MiniCass cassette player

Specifications

Mains voltage: 220 V / 110 V (+15% −10%) slide switch selection; 50/60 Hz

Dimensions and weight: Width: 216 mm Height: 114 mm Depth: 227 mm (with carry strap and connector 232 mm) Weight: approx. 3 kg

Operating temperature range: 5°C − 55°C

Cassette recorder: MDCR 220

Data carrier: Digital minicassette LDB 400

Serial interface: V24 (RS 232 C), line current 20/60 mA (active/ passive) depending on connection

Max. Cable length: 15 m for V24, 100 m for 20 mA

Transmission speed: 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800 7200, 9600 bit/s, selectable

Operating modes: Stop, fast rewind Write Read

Settings at the MiniCass

ISO/BIN BIN Baud rate: 7 (1200 baud) Mode: 4

Settings at the CNC

Interface: AT THE CONTROL Device selection: TTY 1200 BAUD Status: no device control, DFS identification

1−89 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

Connection cable CNCMiniCass (20 mA interface)

Connector MiniCass Connector X11 SubD, 25pin SubD, 25pin

2.5 m

20 mA SERIAL

strainrelief clamp

Pin assignment

Colour Connector MiniCass Connector X11 blue 12 23 red 13 22 violet 14 19 black 16 11 white 18 16 brown 21 14 yellow 24 13 green 25 12 Screen 1 Connector housing

Ordering information

Type No.

Connection cable CNCMiniCass (2.5 m) 046 266 MiniCass 044 198 Blank cassette (min. qty. 10) 910 749

1−90 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

1.6.3 Punched tape reader with 5¼" − spooler, type: FER 204 A/S2 Photoelectric punched tape reader with spooler. The spooler is suitable for start stop reading up to approx. 300 characters/s, respooling up to 1000 characters/s.

483 (19") 1/4 6.35 93.5

SR 57.1 132.5(5) 37.75 148 3 51 67

Specifications Operating elements: 1 touch key Spooler" 1 touch key Reader" 1 respool key left" 1 respool key right" Punched tape width: 1" Punched tape tension: 0.5−0.7 N Mains connection: 110/220/240 V, 50−60 Hz selectable Rating: Standby: 20 VA Reading: 80 VA Respooling: 40 VA Environmental: Operation: conforms to KUF DIN 40040 (0...60°C) Storage: −25°C to +75°C Humidity: 0 to 95% without condensation Weight: 6.35 kg Operating data: Read mode: − automatic from punched tape − loop mode

Respool: − manual with touch key − remote with TTL signals (SW or SRW)

1−91 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

Settings when commissioning:

Baud rate: Selectable with rotary switch S1 from 50−9600 baud:

Baud rate Switch position

50 D 75 C 110 0 134.5 B 150 1 200 A 300 2 600 9 1200* 4 1800 5 2400 3/8 4800 6 9600 7

* default set by Bosch

Data format: Selectable via DIL switch S2: ‘ 5, 6, 7 or 8 data bits ‘ 1, 1½ or 2 stop bits ‘ Even, odd or no parity

+ 12345 Default: 8databits close S2 1stopbit noparity open

S21: open: even parity close: uneven parity

S22: open: parity off (no parity) close: parity on

S23/4: open open: 8 data bits close open: 7 data bits open close: 6 data bits close close: 5 data bits

S25 open: 2 stop bits (1.5 stop bits with 5 data bits) close: 1 stop bit

1−92 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

Encoding switch S3 As the current interface is not standard, it is possible to invert − the outputs via the S31 and S33 switches − the inputs via the S32 switch

Signal description Switch open closed

READY (active) S31 current no current RUN (active) S32 current no current DATA S33 Start bit: Start bit: current no current Stop bit: Stop bit: no current current

+ 12345 close Default open

Punched tape reader PCB

S2 S3 S1

1515

1−93 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

Connection cable CNCpunched tape reader (20 mA interface)

Connector X11 Socket X2 SubD, 25pin SubD, 25pin

5 m

strainrelief clamp

Pin assignment

Colour X11 Signal X2 (reader) Signal violet 16 DTR+ 9 RUN+ pink 21 DTR 10 RUN beige 14 DSR 24 Ready+ brown 18 DSR 25 Ready blue 12 RX+ 18 TXD+ transparent 24 RX 21 TXD greenyellow housing Screen 1 Screen

Pins 9 and 10 at connector X11 are jumpered (20 mA interface of the CNC is active).

Ordering information

Type No.

Connection cable CNCPTR (5 m) 050 336 Connection cable CNCPTR (10 m) 050 337 Punched tape reader with spooler 914 122 Punched tape reader without spooler 055 078

1−94 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

1.6.4 Diskette unit CC disk

Operation For operating instructions see manual CC Disk, prod. no. 4113.

Diskettes used 3 ½ inch, MSDOS compatible Double density, double sided (2DD):720 kbytes (max. 99 programs) High density, double sided (2HD): 720 kbytes or 1.44 MByte (max. 99 / 211 programs)

Keyboard Alphanumeric ASCII keyboard, 16 function keys

Display LCD with illumination, 4 lines of 40 characters each

Codes ASCII, ISO, EIA and transparent

Editing Programs up to 256 kBytes

Interfaces − Serial RS232C (V24): SubD socket, 25pin, 1109600 baud. − Serial RS232C (V24): SubD socket, 9pin, 1109600 baud. − Balanced serial RS422 (V11): SubD socket, 15pin, 110−9600 baud. (connection to serial data interface 1 or CP/MEM4) − Current loop (20 mA passive): SubD socket, 25pin, 110−9600 baud. − Parallel Centronics (printer port). − Facit 4070, Parallel: subD socket, 25pin

Interface parameters Set at the CC Disk by software.

Settings at the CNC See manual Machine Parameters CC 220, parameter set 5500.

Ordering information

Type No.

CC disk 062 957 Connection cable CNCCC (2.5 m) 064 785 Diskettes 3½", formatted 720 kByte (min. qty. 10) 054 599 Diskettes 3½", unformatted 1.44 MByte (min. qty. 10) 915 486

1−95 Systemconfiguration CC220 Externalexpansionunits Connectionconditions

1.6.5 Programming units PG4 / PG5 / PG6 / BOT5200

Apart from their use as programming and test units for CL100 / CL300 / PC 400, PC 600, the Bosch units PG4 (80286 processor) and PG5, PG6 or BOT5200 (each with 80386 processor) can also be used as AT compatible computers. More de tailed information may be found in the manuals Programming units PG4 / PG5 / PG6 / BOT5200".

PG4 functions ‘ Developing programs

‘ Testing programs

‘ Loading programs

‘ Documenting programs

‘ Archiving programs

‘ Converting PG3 files

Ordering information See Price List PNo.: 4163.

1.6.6 XTRANS

XTRANS is a software package which can be used to transfer, manage, edit and archive CNC programs and tables of the CC 220. Use 3½" or 5¼" diskettes as data carriers. The program is run on the BOT5200, an IBMAT compatible PC or the Bosch pro gramming units PG4 and PG5.

Ordering information

Type No.

XTRANS 3½" diskette 062 625 XTRANS 5¼" diskette 064 780 V24 transmission cable 054 956

1.6.7 Biburn

Software for creating IntelHex files for customer software libraries of the CC 220.

Ordering information

Type No.

incl. software protection adaptor 3½" diskette 064 135 5¼" diskette 064 806 Without software protection adaptor 3½" diskette (Update) 066 728 5¼" diskette (Update) 066 730

1−96 Dimensions CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

2. Dimensions, installation and connection conditions

2.1 Dimensions − card rack 2.1.1 NC card rack 1.05

Frontview Sideview

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 100 mm clearance 205.4

187.5 307.5 1.5 ËËËËË

11.7 133.3 −0.3 +0.1 7 386.15 488.1 146.1 133.3 37.7

377 100 mm ~ clearance Doubleendedcableopeningfor

Fanunitconnection24V= andPEconductor ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Planview Panelcutout

160.4

187.5

M6 or ø 7

170 146.1 492 133.3 133.3 39.7

2−1 Dimensions CC220 Cardrack Connectionconditions

2.1.2 NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 or NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7

Frontview Sideview ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 100 mm clearance 480

461.9 307.5 1.5

ËËËËËËËËËËË ËËËËËËËËËËË

11.7 133.3 +0.1 −0.2 7 252.8+/−0.2 386.15 488.1 146.1 133.3 37.7

377 100 mm ~ clearance Doubleendedcableopeningfor

fanunitconnection24V=andPEconductor

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Planview Panelcutout

435 461.9

M6 or ø 7

450 146.1 492 133.3 133.3 39.7

2−2 Dimensions CC220 12"monochromepanel Connectionconditions

2.2 Operating panels

2.2.1 12" monochrome panel

Frontview Sideview 310.3 284.5

8.3 265 15 6.15 298 37.65 235 233 233 310

482.6

Planview Rearview 276

245 Earthing studs (PE terminal) 13

18 88.5 358

Panelcutout

21 321 21

452 287,5 4.5 298

45 ø 7 5.25

7 4.5 26.28 234.94 233 80 280 466

2−3 Abmessungen CC220 Bedienfeld14"−Farbe Anschlußbedingungen

2.2.2 14" colour panel

Frontview Sideview 460 284.5 310.3

Support bracket

22 8.3 13 361.6 15 6.15 298 37.68 234.94 233 233 427.5 482.6

Planview

Rearview

Power supply connection 230 V~ incl. PE terminal (nonheating unit socket) 362.5 276 13

18 88.5 358

Panelcutout 21 321 21

452 287.5 4.5 298

45 ø 7 5.25

7 4.5 26.28 234.94 233 80 280 466

2−4 Dimensions CC220 MTB1I/O,ASCIIkeyboard Connectionconditions

2.3 MTB1 I/O

Frontview Sideview

ø 4,7 260 34

X14 X13 X12 X11 X62 X61 X71 X73

Fuse F1 150 138 124 (6.3 A)

X28 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X72 X10

427 ~40

2.4 ASCII keyboard with drawer

Frontview Sideview

ø 7

CCK 88

~25° 774

466 5,9 76,2 ~90 482,6 ~200

Planview

Connectionlead1.5m Panelcutout ø 7 or M6 ASCIIkeyboard 76 240

435

466

2−5 Dimensions CC220 Electronichandwheel Connectionconditions

2.5 Handwheels

Dimension drawing of analog handwheel

Frontview Sideview 5.2

a ’

ÊÊÊÊ

ÊÊÊÊ ÊÊ

ø 50

~ ÊÊ

ÊÊ

ÊÊ ÊÊ

h 89

h 108 16 30 18 2

Dimension drawing of digital handwheel

Frontview Sideview

h 108

0 + 90 63 63 Ø Ø Ø

5.2 4 50

h 89 60 55

2−6 CC220 Installation Connectionconditions

2.6 Installation

CAUTION Units which are intended for installation in casings or switch cabinets may only be ! operated when installed. Units and particularly control elements must be installed in such way that they are protected sufficiently from accidental operation.

The relevant safety and accident prevention regulations must be observed during ! installation.

All connection cables must be laid as shown at the corresponding points. Addi ! tional isolating points are not allowed!

Connection or signal leads must be laid in such a way that no unit functions can be interrupted by capacitive or inductive interference.

2.6.1 Operating panel installation

Installation position: 0° to max. 45° oblique position. The installation of the operating panel must afford an un obstructed view of the moving machine parts!

Installation method: Installation in desk or swivel frame, sealed to IP 54. Install with a view to easy maintenance (i.e. easy access to panel connections, fuses and if necessary to MTB1 I/O). Make a note of the data on the rating plate, in case this cannot be read after installation.

max. 45° Allsides min.50mm

Panel (housing)

Side view (section)

For purposes of ventilation and cable routing, ensure a minimum clearance of 50 mm above, below, to the sides and at the backplane of the unit! All cables should be laid in loops and must have strain relief. Distances from interference sources (e.g. magnets) should be kept as great as possible. Use screening plates if required.

2−7 CC220 Installation Connectionconditions

CAUTION Owing to the weight of the units, lifting or transporting should always be carried out ! by 2 persons!

Connect operating panels to the protective circuit using earthing studs (on the ! backplane of the panel) (minimum cross section 6 mm2)!

The admissible ambient temperature range of the panels of +5 °C to +55 °C re lates to the direct environment of the panel, i.e. in the case of installed units, the temperature in the installation compartment at the highest point of the panel housing. It is most important to ensure that the maximum temperature given is not exceeded even by the highest occuring outside temperature, e.g. by installing additional ventilation units. Please ensure also that protection standard IP 54 (required for the installation com partment) is adhered to when installing additional ventilation units.

The 14" colour panel must be fixed on the outside at the panel front as well as at the rear of the housing. For this purpose a support bracket has been preassembled on the underside of the panel.

NOTE Exposure of the monitor to direct sunlight should be avoided since this impairs the legibility of the display and causes increased heating of the unit. Select position for ease of operation without excessive fatigue. Angular mounting increases the risk of soiling to the panel front.

2.6.2 Installing drawer with keyboard

Keyboard weight: approx. 0.8 kg Drawer weight: approx. 1.2 kg Length of keyboard connection cable: approx. 1.5 m

Installation position: Centred beneath the panel. The keyboard drops down approx. 25_ so the drawer should not be installed inclined more than 20_.

Installation method: The closed drawer has enclosure class IP 54. It must be sealed.

CAUTION The keyboard without (or with opened) drawer complies with protection standard IP40.

NOTE For standing operation, the best ergonomic installation height of the keyboard is between 1000 mm and 1200 mm above the floor.

2−8 CC220 Installation Connectionconditions

2.6.3 Installing the MTB1 I/O 24 V/0.1 A

Weight of MTB1 I/O: approx. 1 kg

Installation position: optional, provided heat buildup is avoided.

Installation method: Install close to panel in desk or swivel frame, sealed to IP 54. Install with a view to easy maintenance (i.e. easy access to connections and fuse). Make a note of the data on the rating plate, in case this cannot be read after installation.

The installed distance between MTB1 I/O and panel is limited by the connection cables between these two units (cable length max. 2 m).

All connection cables should be laid in loops and must have strain relief. Distances from interference sources should be kept as great as possible. Use screening plates if required.

2.6.4 Installing the electronic handwheel

The handwheel is provided for manually traversing the axes. It is best integrated in the machine panel. Protection standard: IP65 front, IP50 rear Maximum cable lengths for connecting handwheels: −analog handwheel: 20 m. Connection to MTB1 I/O (X72) or operating panel (X61). −digital handwheel: 14 m. Connection to SERVO i measuring system input (X11−16) or to MTB1 I/O (X73).

CAUTION A handwheel with magnetic holder should not be positioned in the immediate vicin ity of the monitor owing to the possible effects on the display (distortion, colour cor ruption).

2−9 CC220 Installation Connectionconditions

2.6.5 Installing the card rack

Installation position: Vertical. Installation: In switch cabinet to IP54.

The card rack can be mounted on the front or rear side. Mounting set order no. 050409 (bracket + screws) is required for rearside assembly.

For purposes of ventilation and cable routing, ensure a minimum clearance of 100 mm above, below, to the sides and at the backplane of the unit! Distances from interference sources (transformers, reactors, drive boosters, power contactors etc.) should be kept as great as possible. Use screening plates if re quired.

Ventilation plugin units for cooling the modules during operation are provided in the lower section of the rack. The ventilation units are powered with 24 V=. The ven tilation unit power supply cable can be installed on the left or right side wall of the card rack via the openings provided (see dimension drawing). Measured from the access openings, the cable must be long enough for the fan unit to be completely removed for maintenance work to be carried out. Maintenance information may be found in the section Maintenance".

CAUTION Owing to the weight of the card rack, lifting or transporting should always be carried ! out by 2 persons! The card rack must be connected via the earthing stud on the PE protective cir cuit(minimum cross section 6 mm2)! The earthing stud is located on the inside of ! the card rack, directly alongside the left cable access opening (viewed from the front).

Rearsideassembly Drillingplanforrearsideassembly

M6 or ø 7 Card rack 412,7 279,4 133,3

187.5 (Rack 1.05) Mounting set for rearside assembly 461.9 (Combirack)

2−10 CC220 Installation Connectionconditions

NOTE The maximum clearance between the CNC and a PLC card rack is limited by the length of the connection cable (for clearances and construction of PLC modules see System description PC 600, prod. no. 3594). The minimum vertical distance between the two racks is 100 mm!

Cable lengths available when using PCI/OS and PLC expansion unit: Cable PCI/OS to AG/ZS: 0.55 m (order no. 064 754)

Cable lengths available when bit coupling between CNC and PLC: Cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P: 0.5 m (order no. 041 535) Cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P: 0.75 m (order no. 062 970) Cable NCPLCBit to AG/P: 1.8 m (order no. 048 081)

Cable lengths available when word coupling between CNC and PLC: Cable NCPLCWord to AG/NC3S: 0.7 m (order no. 060 742) Cable NCPLCWord to AG/NC3S: 1.5 m (order no. 060 743) Cable AG/NC3S to AG/ZS: 0.55 m (order no. 064 754)

2−11 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7 Electrical connections

The NC machine tool system is usually supplied from the threephase main, from which all internal plant voltages are derived (230 VAC; 24 VDC). CAUTION The mains supply must be established in accordance with the relevant standards ! and codes of practice. The VDE regulations (e.g. VDE 0100 and VDE 0113) and the regulations of the local power station must be observed in particular! All connection cables must be installed as shown in the block diagrams! ! Electrical connections may only be performed by appropriately qualified person ! nel. A suitable electric tool must be used. It is most important that transformers to VDE 0551 are used! !

2.7.1 General data on power supply(ies)

230 V supply ~ 230 VAC +6% −10% ~ 48−62 Hz ~ max. break time: 10 ms every 10 sec.

24 V load supply 24 V logic supply 24 VDC, +20% −15% 24 VDC, +20% −15% max.power max.power Module Connectioninput Module Connection input I/O24.02 X10 8.3A PS75 X10 5.0A MTB1I/O X10 4.0A 12"panel X10(CP/MEM4) 1.1A SERVOi X31 0.9A 14"panel X10(CP/MEM4) 1.1A PLCmodules acc.toconstruction Fanunits 0.5A

All data relates to nominal voltage.

For load/logic supply: Ripple voltage content arising from an uncontrolled three phase bridge connection without smoothing with a ripple factor of 5% (see DIN 40 110/10.75, section 1.2) is permissible. This makes the upper voltage limit the largest absolute value of 30.2 V and the lower voltage limit the smallest ab solute value of 18.5 V.

CAUTION In the case of units powered by mains voltage, it must be ensured before commis sioning that the set/required mains voltage range corresponds to the local mains voltage. Fluctuations or deviations from the nominal value of the mains voltage must not ex ! ceed or fall below the given tolerance limits. If this happens then functional defects may result and/or the electric modules may become dangerous.

2−12 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7.2 24 V power supply modules for load and logic supply

The control requires two 24 VDC voltage sources (either 2 separated 24V power supply modules or a power supply module with 2 secondary windings), of which one supplies the logic circuits of the individual units and the other provides the load voltages (e.g. to supply the PIC250, MTB1 I/O or PLC inputs/outputs). For reasons of interference immunity is it advisable to separate logic and load voltage. Using only a single 24 VDC voltage source is only permitted if the required logic voltage is decoupled from the load voltage circuit by appropriate filters, and differential inputs for the analog nominal speed are available for the con nected drives.

CAUTION Power supply modules with transformers to VDE 0551 must be used! !

L1 L2 L3 400 V +5% Safety isolating transformer to VDE 0551. 400 V Connection to VDE 0551. 400 V −5%

Power supply modules available: 24 V=; 6 A / 3*400 V Order no.: 916535

0V 24 V=; 16 A / 3*400 V IN > 16 A Order no.: 916327 2 − 2 i t >− 50 A s + 24V

Power supply module with 2 separated secondary windings Safety isolating transformer to VDE 0551. Connection to VDE 0551. L1 L2 L3 400 V +5% 400 V 400 V 5%

0 V load 0V logic

IN > 16 A 2 − 2 i t >− 50 A s 24 V load 24 V logic

IN = rated current

2−13 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7.3 PE conductor and screen All PE conductors and 0V connections in a system were previously wired in a star configuration with only one connection to a central earthing point with the switch cabinet casing. Furthermore, the screening of all measuring system, tacho or com mand cables was connected at one end only to an insulated earthing bar which in turn was wired to the central earthing point. In this way a widelybranched screen ing system with star configuration developed. This wiring method has proved itself in the past; interference of drive components by thyristors commutated with 50 Hz or by transistors switching at low voltage (100−200 V) has been relatively low.

By contrast, the introduction of voltagesource converters powered directly from the mains leading to highly dynamic speed regulation of feed and main spindle mo tors together with the associated introduction of modern highperformance transis tors has brought about a considerable change in interference. The only adequate protection against high interference is screening connected at both ends in conjunction with a strongly meshed earthing cable!

CAUTION The protective circuit (earth connection) of the system must be meshed! ! Module housing, switch cabinet housing, mounting plates in the switch cabinet ! etc. must be connected to the protective circuit. Take particular care to ensure ad equate cable cross sections for the PE conductor wiring!

The bonding leads/PE leads of all system components (in particular between the ! NC and drives) must be kept as short as possible and must be lowresistance. All protective circuit connections must conform to EN 60204 part 1!

All screening must be connected at both ends, with the prerequisite that the system components are electrically networked and earthed. Refer to the connection conditions of the individual drives when connecting the drive cable screening in order to establish whether one or both ends should be connected.

2−14 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7.4 Interference suppression Electrically driven and controlled machine systems can generate electromagnetic fields (high and low frequencies) and causes mains disturbance. For this reason they must be suppressed in accordance with the regulations. VDE regulations are applicable in addition to the statutory requirements, e.g.: VDE 0874 Directives for radio interference suppression VDE 0875 and VDE 0871 Requirements for the radio suppression of appliances, machinery and plant for nominal frequencies from 0 to 10 kHz. Bosch control systems already incorporate the required suppression equipment.

The performance of a control system can however be affected by mainsborne dis turbance, and for this reason external circuit elements (switch cabinet) should in clude − filters − spark quenching circuits − damping of inductive switching spikes − limiting the switching voltage of highspeed semiconductors − screening (see also section PE conductor and screen") It is essential that all of these components are included in the interference sup pression system, since they achieve their optimum and most costeffective per formance in concert. The issue of electrical symmetry or asymmetry is also important. Apart from symmetrical interference voltage components that occur between the supply cables, asymmetrical interference voltages can also occur. This may arise as a result of the capacitive coupling of the interference source with the mains. The diagram below illustrates a typical suppression circuit in which the asymmetrical interference voltages are discharged to the housing via Cy. Cx damps the sym metrical interference.

L Cy

L Cx Mains

CAUTION − Suppress as close as possible to the interference source. − Limit leakage currents in accordance with safety regulations (shockhazard ! protection!). − Suppressors should be mechanically well secured to prevent failure through vibration. −Use only components which are identified as suppressors.

2−15 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

Examples of interference suppression

Contact circuits (a.c., d.c., superimposed d.c.)

a) b) c) d)

D R R VDR Rp R U

C C

re b) for sensitive contacts, residual current when contact open! re c) for highinductive load re d) voltagedependent resistor, residual current when contact open

Inductive load circuit (motors, solenoid, relays and contactor coils)

a) b) c) d) e)

D R R VDR D U

VDR C ZD C +

re c) dropout delay with relay re d) defined dropout delay with relay re e) must be optimised to the inductance!

Mains circuit

L1 L2 M Cx 3 Cy M ~ ~ L3 Cx N Cy Cx Cx Cx SL SL

2−16 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7.5 Voltage connection

The principles of voltage connection are depicted in the following diagrams. Emergency switching circuits, mains switches etc. are provided by the pro ject planner of the system as a whole.

CAUTION − When connecting the voltage the relevant safety and accident prevention re ! gulations must be observed! − Panels, CNC and PLC should be all switched on or all switched off. − When disconnecting, the drives must be switched to an inoperative state be ! fore the CNC logic voltage can be disconnected! − Owing to the particular, safetycritical significance with regard to drive oper ations or the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we would like to draw your attention to the signal READY2 (relay contact − see section PS 75"): If the READY2 ! contact is open the control is not ready for operation!

Supplyleads min.16 mm2 (green/yellow) to switch cabinet housing 16 mm2 (green/yellow) to machine 2 L1 L2 L3 N PE 6 mm (green/yellow) all housing components (PE 2 bolt) 10 mm (green/yellow) Earthing bars for 0 V wiring (see following diagram)

L1 L2 L3 N PE PE PE PE PE PEstarpoint 16 mm2 (green/yellow)

Fuses, preferably motor circuitbreakers

2 400V 4 mm (green/yellow) N conductors may be used only with Transformer to VDE 0551 the agreement of 230V the operator! 4 mm2 (green/yellow) PE N1 W1 PE

4 mm2 (green/yellow)

PE N1 W1 PE cross section greater than/equal to cross section for voltage supply lead of unit to be 230Vfan(PLC,drives) Serviceconnector(s) earthed (colour: green/yellow) colourPanel(CNC) 230Vsupply(SPS)

Cross sections dependent on power demand, but min. 1.5 mm2 L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 PE

Drives: CNCloadpowermodule CNClogicpowermodule LogicpowermoduleforTCmodule (seefollowingdiagram) (sefollowingdiagram) PEbars Powerupswitch = insulate terminals

2−17 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

Generation of 24 V logic and 24 V load voltage with 2 separated power supply modules or by using a power supply module with 2 separated secondary windings:

Cross sections Cross sections from230Vconnection from PE star point dependent on power dependent on power (seepreviousdiagram) (see previous diagram) demand, but min. demand, but min. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 Cross sections

dependent on power L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 PE demand, but min. 0.75 mm2 Load power supply Logic power supply 2 10 mm (green/yellow) module with safety module (2) with safety transformer to VDE PE N1 W1 transformer to VDE 0551 and lineside 0551 and lineside motor motor circuitbreaker circuitbreaker

400 VAC 400 VAC Cross sections dependent on power 24 VDC 24 VDC demand, but min. 4 mm2. At higher power demand 2 x 4 mm2 Length max. 4m Twisted leads 4 mm2 2 6 (1)(blue) 62 (blue) 2 Length max. 4 m (1) 4 mm

A A B A A

2 10 (green/yellow)(4) 24Vload 0Vload Earthingbars 0Vlogic 24Vlogic

A = terminal block 42 B = terminal block 102 = insulate terminals

MTB1 supply voltage input load (connection X10) HighSpeed supply (connection X31(3) at SERVOi) I/O 24/0.2 supply voltage input (connection X10) PLC (power supply for I/Os, PU, EZ, DG) Supply voltage for the CNC interface input signals Supply voltage for probe/signal Load multiterminal busbars (24 V/0 V) drives Supply voltage CNC ventilation unit

Supply 24 V at PS75 (connection X10) Supply 24 V at CP/MEM4 (connection X10)

(1) Easily visible and detachable (2) This mains connection is not active if a power supply module with 2 separate secondary windings is used. The leads to the logic terminals 0 V and 24 V must be connected then in accordance with the section 24 V power supply modules for load and logic supply", diagram "power supply module with 2 separate secondary windings". (3) The power supply to X31 may be lost if the HighSpeed inputs/outputs of the SERVOi are not used. (4) PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate. Insulated PE bars must be connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max. 20 cm copper strips. The cross section of the copper strips must correspond at least to that of the supply line.

2−18 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

Generation of the 24 V logic and the 24 V load voltage by a single power supply module:

Cross sections From230Vconnection from PE star point dependent on power (seepreviousdiagram) (see previous diagram) demand, but min. 1.5 mm2 Cross sections

dependant on power L1 L2 L3 PE demand, but min. 0.75 mm2 Power supply 2 10 (green/yellow) module with safety

PE N1 W1 transformer to VDE 0551 and lineside motor circuitbreaker

400 VAC Cross sections dependant on power 24 VDC demand, but min. 4 mm2. At higher power demand 2 x 4 mm2

2 4 Length max. 2 m DC filter 42 Twisted leads Length max. 2 m Twisted leads 42 62 (blue) 2 Length max. 4 m (1) 4

A A B A A

2 10 (green/yellow)(4) 24Vload 0Vload Earthingbars 0Vlogic 24Vlogic

A = terminal block 42 B = terminal block 102 = insulate terminals

Supply 24 V at PS200 (connection X10) Supply 24 V at CP/MEM4 (connection X10)

(1) Easily visible and detachable (3) The power supply to X31 may be lost if the HighSpeed inputs/outputs of the SERVOi are not used. (4) PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate. Insulated PE bars must be connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max. 20 cm copper strips. The cross section of the copper strips must correspond at least to that of the supply line.

2−19 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

From230Vconnection from load from logic from load (seepreviousdiagram) terminals terminals terminals (see (see (see Cross sections previous previous previous dependant on power diagram) diagram) diagram) demand, but min. 0.75 mm2 (*)

Cross sections

PE N1 W1 dependant on power demand, but min. 0.5 mm2 (*)

Cross sections dependent on power demand; but min. Poss.PLCvariant(PC600) 0.5 mm2 (*) Panel 12" 6 monochrome NT E E A PU EZ DG

230V 4 X22 PE ZE601 ZE602 W1 ZE603 6

N1 Speicher 4 PE PE 230 V MTB1 I/O

24V X10 W1 N1 0V PE PE Special connection cable 230 V Coaxial cable X22 (see section Operating panels") W1 Panel N1 14" colour PE Poss.CNCvariant X22 PE

MTB1 I/O

X10 PS75 SERVOi SERVOi CP/MEM5 I/O24/0.2 24V

0V X22

Cross sections PE dependant on power (**) (**) demand, but min. 1.5 mm2 (*) X10 X31 X31 X10 X10 Length: max. 2 m. 24V Twisted leads

3 (*) @ 24 V= 24V 0.5 mm , to 4 m 3 0.75 mm@, to 6 m 0V 1.5 mm@, to 20 m Over 20 m requires separate power PE supply module at location! 1 (**) The power supply to X31 may be lost if the fast inputs/outputs of the servo 1 card are not used. Twist the power supply leads!

2−20 CC220 Electricalconnections Connectionconditions

2.7.6 Notes on switch cabinet construction

All drive components must be assembled in a separate, fully enclosed switch cabi net compartment in order to fulfil radio interference suppression requirements in compliance with VDE 0871 / 0875 (see SERVODYN connection conditions" for further information). The starting circuit and the potentialfree 24 V logic power sup ply module which may be required for the operation of the TC module must also be installed in this compartment. The enable signal must be transmitted via a relay in order to implement the required electrical isolation to the 24 V load power supply module. This relay must also be assembled in the drive components compartment.

A minimum distance of 10 cm between the power cables and the control leads run ning parallel must be maintained when arranging the cabling.

Screened cables must be used for setpoint, tacho and encoder leads. They must be installed at a distance of min. 10 cm from motor or supply cables.

PE bars should preferably be conductive and mounted on the mounting plate. Insulated PE bars must be connected to the mounting plate at both ends with max. 20 cm copper strips. The PE bars must be arranged in such a way that the length of outgoing PE conduc tor leads to the individual modules does not exceed 1 m.

The 0 V load terminal strip must be insulated. A minimum distance of 10 cm to the power cables must be maintained when arranging the cabling.

The 24 V load terminal strip must be insulated. A minimum distance of 10 cm to the power cables must be maintained when arranging the cabling.

2−21 CC220 Fieldserviceconditions Connectionconditions

2.8 Field service conditions

The following data is valid for NC system components unless specified otherwise in the individual sections:

Temperatures Storage temperatures: −25 °C to +70 °C. Ambient temperature: +5 °C to +55 °C. Ambient temperature data is valid for precisely defined installation positions and locations. The respective installation specifications for individual units may be found in the chapter Installation". The ambient temperature may drop to 0 °C when the control is switched on. Tem perature gradients of up to 3 °C per minute are permissible.

Humidity Class F to DIN 40 040. Limits of relative humidity are 50% at 40 °C and 90% at 20 °C. The control system must not be exposed to moisture condensation.

Protection standards 12" monochrome panel: Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20 14" colour panel: Front panel IP 54, otherwise IP 20 Card rack (6 and 8): IP 20, provided for switch cabinet installation to IP 54 MTB1 I/O: IP 20 Keyboard with drawer: IP 40 when drawer open, otherwise IP 54 Digital handwheel: Front side IP 65, rear side IP 50

Mechanical strength a) Vibration test IEC 6826 Stress on 3 axes offset at 90° to one another Test conditions Frequency range: 10−150 Hz Amplitude excursion from 10−57 Hz: 0.075 mm Amplitude of acceleration from 57−150 Hz: 1 g Test duration per axis: 10 frequency cycles Frequency traverse speed: 1 octave/min

b) Shock testing IEC 68227 Shock strain with 3 shocks in each positive and negative main axis direction. Test conditions Pulse strength 15 g Pulse duration: 11 ms Pulse type: Halfsinusoidal

c) Transport shaking test to Bosch guidelines N42 AP 450

2−22 CC220 Fieldserviceconditions Connectionconditions

Corrosive influences The ambient air must be free from conductive impurities (e.g. acids, caustics, cor rosive agents, salts, metallic vapours, etc.). Suitable filters should be installed at air inlets if necessary and checked during maintenance.

Electromagnetic influences Strong electromagnetic fields must not arise near the system.

Interference immunity a) Static discharge to IEC 8012, severity 3 (issue 9/87). b) Mainsborne disturbances of the supply voltage to IEC 8014, severity 3 (issue 88). c) Nonmainsborne disturbances to IEC 8013 (issue 2/88). Test field strength in frequency band 27−500 MHz >10 V/m.

Contamination (EN 60 204, part 1 sec. 7.2.1 and 8.1.2) Our builtin units require a dustfree environment. Casings and installation com partments in which the devices are to be installed must conform to minimum en closure class IP 54 to 40 050.

Air pressure Operative up to 1000 m above sea level.

Marginal conditions (norms, provisions, guidelines, standards) The control system is based on the following norms and guidelines:

‘ Bosch Safety guidelines", issue 4, 11/91 ‘ EN 60 204 (IEC 204) (*) / VDE 0113 (issue 2/86) ‘ VDE 0160 (*) (issue 5/88) ‘ IEC 801 (interference definitions), (from which VDE 0843 is derived) ‘ IEC 68 (mechanical strain) ‘ Class F to DIN 40 040. ‘ Protection standards to DIN 40 050 (incl. IP00, IP20, IP40, IP50, IP54, IP65). ‘ Transport shaking test to Bosch norm N42 AP 450 ‘ Connection and operation of the control system to VDE 551 (*) is not fully met. This specifically refers to: Overvoltage protection to VDE 0160 : no test for system overvoltage pulse (200% UN) Safety separation: only fulfilled for NC if transformers to DIN VDE 0551 are used.

2−23 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

2.9 Maintenance

The control electronics system, the adaptation cabinet and the mechanical com ponents of a machine tool must be serviced at regular intervals in order to guaran tee smooth operation. This section contains only those maintenance operations required for the CNC.

CAUTION! Unless otherwise stated, maintenance work must always be carried out when the ! unit is switched off! If it is necessary to carry out measuring or testing operations on an active unit, the existing safety and accident prevention regulations must be ob served. A suitable electric tool must be used in any case!

Repairs or maintenance of CNC components may only be carried out by the Bosch ! Service Department or by maintenance centres authorised by Bosch.

Only replacement parts and spares authorised by Bosch may be used. ! Unauthorised opening or removal of CNC components or improperly carried out ! repairs can result in death, physical injury or serious damage to equipment!

After removal or opening of casing or protective guards, or after opening the switch ! cabinet it is possible that certain system components will be exposed which are live and dangerous!

Emergency stop devices must remain operative in all unit modes. Deactivating the ! emergency stop device must not initiate an uncontrolled or undefined restart of the machine!

2−24 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

Operating panels

Screen surface: clean at least once a week with an antistatic cloth or window cleaning agent containing alcohol. CAUTION! Do not use solvents (dilutions or similar)!

Screen brightness: adjust every six months with CNC switched on. CAUTION! Excessive brightness causes premature ageing" and burning" of the picture tube (this invalidates the guarantee!).

Air filter mats (not present in all panels) :located at rear of panel; inspect for conta mination at least quarterly. Contaminated filter mats reduce the air flow necessary for cooling. If necessary, wash in soapy water. CAUTION! The fan impeller continues to run for a time after switching off the CNC! Never place ! your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller! Only replace filter mats when completely dry.

Fan units: once annually check fan impeller at the rear of the panel for easy run ning, when the unit is switched on (air flow). CAUTION! Rotating fan impeller! Never place your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place ! any objects in the fan impeller!

Note: The 14" colour panel is equipped with an automatic fan unit at the rear side which switches on only when the temperature exceeds 45 _C (±5 °C) in the direct vicinity of the panel! The fan unit automatically switches off again if the temperature in the direct vicinity of the panel drops below 35 _C (±5 °C).

Connector and terminal connections of panels: inspect annually.

Card rack

2−25 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

Connector and terminal connections of card racks: inspect annually.

Air filter mats and fan units: inspect at least once a year for contamination and easy running of the fan units. Contaminated filter mats reduce the air flow necess ary for cooling. For this reason, contaminated filter mats must be replaced or washed in soapy water if necessary (order no.: 066796 for NC part; 066797 for PLC part).

In card racks 1.05 the fan unit (filter supporting plate with ventilators) is located beneath the plugin modules behind the cable duct.

The NC/PLC card rack or the NC/CL3 card rack has another fan unit beneath the PLCI/O modules, in addition to the fan beneath the CNC modules (see diagram).

Fastening screws for PLC fan unit cover

Fan units CNC fan unit Fastening screws for CNC fan unit cover

Diagram: NC/PLC or NC/CL3 card rack; position of fan units

2−26 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

Procedure with CNC fan unit:

1. Switch off unit.

2. Loosen fastening screws (quickrelease screws) for cable duct and remove cable duct.

3. Carefully pull forwards the fan unit. CAUTION! The fan impeller continues to run for a time after switching off the CNC! Never place ! your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller!

Be careful not to damage any connection cables when removing the fan unit!

4. Loosen the screw at the base of the fan unit and lift the filter mat holder.

5. Replace old filter mats with new ones or wash old filter mats in soapy water. CAUTION! Only replace filter mats when completely dry.

6. Position filter mat holder and attach with screws.

7. Position the fan unit in such a way that no objects can block the fan impellers and there is an unimpeded view of the of the top of the fan unit with the fan impellers. Switch on the CNC.

8. Visually check that the fan impellers are turning. CAUTION! Rotating fan impellers! Never place your hands inside a fan impeller. Do not place ! any objects in the fan impeller!

9. Switch off CNC again. Wait for the fan impellers to come to rest.

10. Carefully replace the fan unit in the corresponding card rack guide rails with the filter side down and push back in. CAUTION! Be careful not to damage any connection cables when replacing the fan unit!

11. Screw in cable duct.

2−27 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

Procedure with PLC fan unit:

1. Switch off unit.

2. Loosen the four screws of the cover. Remove cover.

3. Loosen quickrelease screws of the filter supporting frame (with screwdriver or coin; 1/4 turn to the left). CAUTION! The fan impeller continues to run for a time after switching off the CNC! Never place ! your hands inside the fan impeller. Do not place any objects in the fan impeller!

4. Push up filter supporting frame so far that the filter mat can be removed.

5. Replace old filter mats with new ones or wash old filter mats in soapy water. After washing return the filter mat again. CAUTION! Only replace filter mats when completely dry.

Push in the quickrelease screw of the filter supporting frame.

6. Screw on cover.

2−28 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

Module CP/MEM5

Change the buffer battery once a year. The battery must be changed immediately when the error message CP/MEMBATTERY LOW" appears! The battery may be changed within 5 minutes when the control system is switched off (otherwise data may be lost)! The computer/memory module CP/ MEM4 must not be removed when changing the battery!

Battery type: Alkaline battery, 4.5 V. Order no.: 107 913 572.

Procedure: 1. Switch off the control. 2. Remove the cover for EPROM modules and battery compartment. 3. Remove EPROM module. 4. Remove empty battery and insert a fresh one. Pay attention to polarity! 5. Reinsert EPROM module. 6. Screw on cover.

CAUTION! Only use original replacement batteries! Used or rechargeable batteries must be treated as special waste! Batteries should not be forcibly opened, recharged, soldered or thrown into fire! !

NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler card)

Change the buffer battery once a year. The battery must be changed immediately when the error message WKBATTERY LOW" appears! Change battery when the control system is switched on (otherwise data may be lost)! The module NCPLCWord3 must not be removed when changing the bat tery!

Battery type: Lithium, TLQ 150, taper pin connection Order no.: 046 800

Procedure: 1. Switch on control. 2. Shortcircuit new battery for approx. 2 secs. 3. Remove battery cover. 4. Remove empty battery and insert a fresh one. Pay attention to polarity! 5. Screw on cover.

CAUTION! Only use original replacement batteries! Used or rechargeable batteries must be treated as special waste! Batteries should not be forcibly opened, recharged, soldered or thrown into fire! !

2−29 CC220 Maintenance Connectionconditions

PLC modules

Please note that the batteries for PLC modules RAM600 and ZE60x must also be changed annually! See PLC manual for information concerning battery change for these modules.

2−30 Pluginmodules CC220 Generalnotes Connectionconditions

3. Plugin modules

The modules described in this chapter are all intended for use in the card rack. The chapter System configuration", section Card rack" contains information on poss ible module combinations and which plugin modules can be connected to which slots.

CAUTION! − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety ! notes" at the front of this manual!

3−1 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

3.1 CP/MEM5 Computer/memory module

BOSCH Toggle switch S1 CNC Write protection for EEPROM S I 1 O Rotary switch S2 Switch for internal test purposes S 2 (Setting 1 = normal operation)

EPROM MODULE

Battery Buffer battery for data in RAM memory

CP/MEM5

X 1 1 Serial data interface 1 V24 or 20 mA (socket X11, SubD, 25pin)

X 1 2 Serial data interface 2 V24 (socket X12, SubD, 25pin)

X RGB signal output to colour 2 panel 1 (Socket X21, SubD, 15pin)

X Connection to operating panel 2 2 (socket X22, SubD, 20pin with Panelintegrated RGB coaxial connector) V24.2 V24.1/20mA Power supply 24 V logic dc (Connection X10. Weidmüller terminal strip with max. X 24V cross section of 1.5 mm2 1 24V 0 0V Install leads twisted) 0V Identification of processor module variants FrontpanelCP/MEM5

CAUTION! The computer/memory module and the modules contained may only be inserted or removed when the control is switched off!

3−2 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

1. EPROM module with operation software. 2. EEPROM module 32k or 128k 1. 3. Graphics module 4. Processor module 15 MHz with FPU or 30 MHz with FPU or 2. 3. 30 MHz with FPU and 2 MB RAM FRONTVIEW 4.

Modules on the CP/MEM5

Toggle switch S1 Write protection for EEPROM (1 = protection on).

Rotary switch S2 Switch for internal test purposes.

Buffer battery for data in RAM The battery must be replaced once a year!

The battery voltage is checked automatically when the control is switched on, after CLEAR LOGIC, after a reset (for PS75) and, when the control is on, every 24 hours. The error message CP/MEM BATTERY LOW" is displayed if undervoltage is de tected.

CAUTION! If the control is switched off for longer than 5 minutes when the battery is empty, all data in the RAM will be irrevocably lost!

When the battery dischages normally, the data in the RAM will be buffered for at least 14 days after the error message has been displayed for the first time. The CP/MEM5 has a capacitor for shortterm buffering (max. 5 minutes!) of data in the RAM (e.g. for changing the battery when the control is switched off, or after re moving the CP/MEM5). Open battery cover to replace battery; the battery is held in place by means of a retainer. 4.5 V alkaline battery, order no. 107 913 572 For information on changing batteries see chapter 2, section Maintenance".

3−3 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

Serial data interface 1 (connection X11) V24/20mA interface for connection of a data terminal unit (socket X11, SubD, 25pin)

Both interface variants (V24 and 20 mA) are wired on the socket. The V24 interface transmits data in the same way as the 20 mA interface. The para meterisation of the interface (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine parameter set 5500 device selection" and the softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL (handshake setting). The following parameters are fixed: 7 data bits, EVEN parity, 1 start bit. Variable parameters: Baud rate 110−9600 baud, 1/1.5/2 stop bits. Software/hardware handshake.

When software handshake is set (XON/XOFF) the control transmits control char acters to the coupled device at various operating stages (in additional to those used for the handshake): − start data in: − abort data in using softkey ABORT: − abort data in via CONTROL RESET: − abort data in after timeout: at least once − abort data out via CONTROL RESET: − abort data out after timeout: − start of block during data out: − end of block during data out: − CONTROL RESET (read in/out not active): If a connected device sends a DC3 whilst no data out is active at the CNC, the con trol does not wait for a DC1 during a later data out start before beginning the trans mission (this is different for operating panel interface X11 of the CC320!).

V24 interface Level: HIGH: +3 V to +9 V LOW: −3 V to −9 V. Transmission rate: max. 9600 baud with handshake. Handshake: Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable via softkey. Cable length: max. 15 m Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX Receive data, CNC reception line. DTR Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected machine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal in standard computers). DSR Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal in standard computers).

GND Signal Ground. Screen by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector to CNC casing.

3−4 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

The CNC does not evaluate the CTS status circuit (pin 5)! The RTS (pin 4) is set permanently to HIGH level on the CNC side! Further information on status signals (DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS) and their applica tion may be found in the chapter System configuration", section DNC interfaces"!

CP/MEM5<15m Peripheral SocketX11 Plug Plug z.B.DCR SubD25pin SubD25pin TX 2 Data 3 RX RX 3 Data 2 TX DTR 20 Status 6 DSR DSR 6 Status 20 DTR GND 7 7 GND

Screento 1 Screen body Use metal covers!

V24connectionbetweenCNCandperipheral(e.g.DCR)

CAUTION! − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

−If software handshake is used, status leads to the external device do not need to be wired. At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR with DSR on the external device.

− When connecting the Bosch DCR or Bosch MiniCass (mode 4), the control must be set to hardware handshake for data out and data in (the softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL is not displayed in reverse video).

−To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a V24 interface con nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20mA inter face must be used if these lengths need to be exceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9600 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

3−5 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

20 mA interface (current loop) Level HIGH: approx. 20 mA (min. 12 mA) LOW: approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA) Transmission rate: max. 9600 baud with handshake. Max. external voltage drop: 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA active) Voltage drop in control unit: max. 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA passive) Power supply of the driving device: max. 12 V Handshake: Software or hardware handshake possible; adjustable via softkey. Cable length (CNC active): max. 100 m Cable length (CNC passive): max. 50 m Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX+, TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX+, RX Receive data, CNC reception line. DTR+, DTR Data Terminal Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the connected machine that the CNC is ready to receive (corresponds to RTS signal in standard computers). DSR+, DSR Data Set Ready, HIGH signal indicates to the CNC that the connected machine can accept data (corresponds to CTS signal in standard computers).

GND Signal ground. Screen by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector contact to CNC casing.

With the 20 mA connection, one device must be defined as the active device and the other as the passive (active: device acts as source). The 20mA interface be comes active if pins 9 and 10 are bridged. If this bridge is not present, the interface is parameterised as passive.

Further information on status signals (DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS) and their applica tion may be found in the chapter System configuration", section DNC inter faces"!

CAUTION! − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

3−6 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

CP/MEM5<50m Peripheral SocketX11 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pin SubD25pin

RX+ 22 TX+ Data RX− 12 TX− TX+ 23 RX+ Data TX− 13 RX− DSR+ 11 DTR+ Status DSR− 14 DTR− DTR+ 19 DSR+ Status DTR− 16 DSR− Screentobody Screentobody Use metal covers!

20 mA passive (interface of connected device acts as power source)

CP/MEM5<100m Peripheral SocketX11 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pin SubD25pin

RX+ 12 TX+ Data RX− 24 TX− TX+ 13 RX+ Data TX− 25 RX− DSR+ 14 DTR+ Status DSR− 18 DTR− DTR+ 16 DSR+ Status DTR− 21 DSR−

Activein 9 Activeout 10 Screentobody Screentobody Use metal covers!

20 mA active (interface of CP/MEM4 acts as source)

IMPORTANT − The operator at the CNC can select the handshake using the softkey SOFT WARE CONTROL: Hardware handshake: softkey is displayed normally Software handshake: softkey is displayed in reverse video. No handshake is supported at baud rates < 600 baud on the CNC side! −If software handshake is used, it may be necessary at X11 to bridge pin 14 with 18 (if interface is switched as active) or pin 14 with 18 and pin 11 with 10 (if interface is switched as passive). − When connecting the Bosch DCR or Bosch MiniCass (mode 4), the control must be set to hardware handshake for data out and data in (the softkey SOFTWARE CONTROL is not displayed in reverse video). −To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a 20 mA connection should not exceed 50 or 100 m. If the CNC is used as the driving device (20 mA active), a maximum cable length of 100 m is permitted. If the

3−7 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

peripheral interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20mA passive), the maxi mum permitted length is 50 m. Suitable repeaters must be used if these lengths are exceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9600 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

Serial data interface 2 (connection X12)

V24 interface (socket X12, SubD, 25pin) Technical data for V24 interface to X12: corresponds to V24 interface at X11. Note that no 20 mA interface is available at X12!

3−8 Pluginmodules CC220 CP/MEM5 Connectionconditions

‘ Connection to panel

Interface CP/MEM − panel (connection X22) The cable contains the leads for the 24 V supply voltage to the panel, analog sig nals and the serial signals of the keyboard. The video signal is also transmitted. See chapter 1 Operating panels" for pin assignment and connection cables.

RGB signal (connection X21) Incircuit link between CP/MEM5 and 14" colour panel. See chapter 1 Operating panels" for pin assignment and connection cables.

‘ Input voltage

Input voltage 24 V dc logic (connection X10)

Weidmüller terminal strip for connection of 24 V= (logic dc). The power connection must be installed twisted, directly from the logic power supply module (PS 75).

This input voltage is led internally to the connection X22 and is available there as 24 V supply voltage for the panel logic. (panel logic). The fuse (M 4 A) is located at the panel.

3−9 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

3.2 SERVOi servo loop interface

3.2.1 Overview

The servo loop card is used to issue the analog set speed values and closes the position control circuit by evalu ating the signals of the connected position measuring systems. The card also facilitates fast input/output of digi tal signals.

The servo icard is available in various hardware versions, which differ in the number of measuring system inputs and setpoint outputs. Integrated EXEs are also available.

SERVO 6i SERVO 4i Servo i EXE3/3S 6 measuring system inputs 3 measuring system inputs 3 measuring system inputs with EXE 7 analog setpoint outputs 4 analog setpoint outputs 4 analog setpoint outputs

BOSCH CNC

Measuring system input 1st axis Measuring system input 4th axis (socket X11, SubD, 15pin) (socket X14, SubD, 15pin)

Measuring system input 2nd axis Measuring system input 5th axis (socket X12, SubD, 15pin) (socket X15, SubD, 15pin)

Measuring system input 3rd axis Measuring system input 6th axis (socket X13, SubD, 15pin) (socket X16, SubD, 15pin)

8way analog input (connector X25, SubD, 15pin) High Speed I/O (connector X31, SubD, 25pin) (in preparation)

Probe inputs Probe switching voltage 5 V Earth star points Fast retract" input (connection X51)

Analog setpoint outputs 67 (connection X22)

Screen connections Analog setpoint outputs 15 (Connection X21)

SERVO6i

Front view SERVO 6i with analog setpoint outputs

3−10 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

CAUTION! The servo loop module SERVO i and all connected modules may only be inserted or removed when the control is switched off!

1. Processor module 15 MHz or 25 MHz 2. Setpoint module Analog out 4 or Analog out 7

1. FRONTVIEW

3−11 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

3.2.2 Measuring system inputs (socket X11 to X16) (X14 to X16 optional) Both encoders for direct connection as well as encoders with pulseforming elec tronics (EXE) can be connected to the measuring system inputs. The SERVO i with integrated EXE (on 3 axes) has been available since 1993. This makes possible the direct connection of encoders which would normally be connected via an external EXE to the CNC (for connection conditions see section Measuring system inputs with integrated EXE"). A digital handwheel can also be connected (see section Connecting a digital handwheel"). The connection conditions stipulated by the manufacturer for cable length and installation must be observed. The power supply of a directly connected encoder or an EXE with an external 5 V supply is implemented via the measuring system input socket. The following data applies in general for SERVO i measuring system inputs (with out integrated EXE): ‘ Max. permiss. cable length/input: 50 m or manufacturer’s specification. ‘ Max. permissible cable length difference at all inputs: 15 m ‘ Cable type: Special cable NFS 7264 10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2 (not for trailing cable operation!) ‘ Signal inputs: Differential line receiver Ri = 120 W ‘ Input signals: A, B, R, Uas , A, B, R (TTL level); min. voltage difference between > A and A, B and B, R and R=600 mV ‘ Pulse multiplication: Quadrupling of input frequency (quad slope evaluation) ‘ Max. permiss. input frequency: 800 kHz ‘ Encoder/EXE voltage supply: +5 V ‘ Max. power input of all encoder/EXEs connected to CNC: 1.5 A The signal lines of the measuring systems must be connected exactly in accord ance with these connection conditions. Switching the signal wires to change the direction is not permissible due to the coding of the reset pulse! A change of direction can be implemented with the software by means of machine parameters.

Directionofmeasurement Positive Negative Positive

aaaa abb a a a

A/Ua1

B/Ua2

R/Ua0

R/Ua0 > a = 250ns > cc b = 0ns > Bothcircuitconditionsarepermissible c = 100ns

3−12 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Permissible digital measuring systems

NOTE: The section Measuring system inputs with integrated EXE" contains information on permissible measuring systems for connecting the SERVOi with integrated EXE to the measuring system inputs.

In general, Heidenhain and Stegmann rotary encoders for direct connection can be fitted subject to the following conditions: − 5 V encoder power supply − Squarewave signal output − Line driver to RS 485 or RS 422 − Encoder power input < 250 mA > − Min. flank clearance between active counting pulses = 250 ns

Heidenhain EXEs can also be fitted subject to the following conditions: − 5 V or external 230 V power supply − Squarewave signal output − Line driver to RS 485 or RS 422 − Max. encoder and EXE power input at 5 V supply: < 350 mA > − Min. flank clearance between active counting pulses = 250 ns

Owing to frequent modifications and the increasing number of models, the follow ing list of measuring systems should be regarded as a guide only. Other measuring systems are available on request.

Rotary measuring systems If the ROD encoder is supplied by Bosch, its cable (0.5 m) is provided with a round plug of the Souriau" type. The encoder cable from NC controllers to the ROD encoder can be supplied by Bosch fully assembled in the lengths 5 m, 8 m, 16 m, 25 m, 35 m or 50 m. At the NC end it contains a 15pin subD connector, and at the encoder end it contains a 12pin Souriau" round socket.

‘ Rotary encoder for direct connection: ROD 420 (Heidenhain) ROD 426 " ROD 428 " DG 60 D (Stegmann) DG 90 D" DG 100 D" Recommended rotary encoder for direct connection: ROD 428 DG 60 D

‘ Rotary encoder for connection via EXE 604 C, EXE 605 C: ROD 250 (Heidenhain) ROD 450 " ROD 456 " ROD 700 " ROD 800 "

‘ Rotary encoder for connection via EXE 702, EXE 816: ROD 800 (Heidenhain)

3−13 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Linear measuring systems ‘ Linear measuring systems for direct connection: LS 323 (Heidenhain) LS 623 " ‘ Linear scales for connection via EXE 604 C, EXE 605 C, EXE 610, EXE 801, EXE 802, EXE 803, EXE 804, EXE 805, EXE 813: LS 403 (Heidenhain) LS 703 " LS 707 " LS 903 " ‘ Linear scales for connection via EXE 808, EXE 816: LS 300 (Heidenhain) LIDA 325 "

Distance coded measuring systems ‘ Rotary encoder: TE 60 (Stegmann) ‘ Linear scales: LIP 101 A (Heidenhain) LS xxx C" ‘ Angular position measuring systems: ROD 250 C"

Recommended pulse shaper electronic systems (EXE) If the available EXEs with an external 5V supply, we recommend: ‘ EXE 604 C (Heidenhain) It is preferable, however, to use EXEs with their own 230 V power supply.

Recommendation for pulse shaper electronic system (EXE) and encoder For rotary encoders with direct connection or EXEs, we recommend using those with no capacative connection between 0V of the supply voltage and the housing (e.g. ROD 428, EXE 604 C). This reduces susceptibility to interference. CAUTION! −If using several SERVO i’s, the total power input (at 5V supply) of all encoders and EXEs connected to the CNC must not exceed 1.5 A! Total power input (at 5 V supply) of all encoders and EXEs connected to an individual SERVO i: max. 1.5 A! −If using an EXE or an encoder for direct connection with Uas signal, the cor ! rect wiring of the Uas signal to the CNC must be checked!

IMPORTANT − The SERVO i detects a measuring system error both from the Uas input signal and when the connected encoder/EXE switch their output stages to the tris tate condition (highresistance) (e.g. for EXE 604 C and ROD 428). − The encoder supply voltage must be +5 V+/−5% for all connected encoders and permitted cable lengths (directly at encoder input). − Open Uas inputs are set to HIGH potential by internal pullup resistors (= no measuring system error present).

3−14 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Terminal assignments

The cable screen must have a continuous connection from the front panel of the SERVO i (earthing star connections) to the measuring system.

Heidenhain rotary encoders

CAUTION! Pin assignment only applies to cables and encoders supplied by BOSCH!

Socket Cable Encoder Measuring X11−X16 (10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2) signaloutput system Use metal covers max.1m A/Ua1 1 1ws/ge 0.14 1 1 br Ua1 2 2gn 0.14 2 2 gn A/Ua1 Ua1 B/Ua2 3 3gr 0.14 3 3 gr Ua2 4 4rs 0.14 4 4 rs B/Ua2 Ua2 bl 5 5br 0.5 5 5 Sensor+5V R/Ua0 6 6ws 0.14 6 6 rt Ua0 7 7ws/gr 0.14 7 7 sw R/Ua0 Ua0 8 8vio 0.14 8 8 vio Uas Uas +5V 9 9rt 0.5 9 9 br +5V 10 10sw 0.5 10 10 ws Sensor0V 11 11

12 12bl 0.5 12 12 ws 0V 0V Connectionmadebymetalbodyofsub−Dplug andpin11oftheSouriausocket max.50m

3−15 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Stegmann rotary encoders. CAUTION! When using the BOSCH cable, only the housing type 1" with a cable tail of 0.5 m is permissible for the encoder. A 12pin Souriau" type round connector must then be fitted to the encoder by the user in accordance with the following pin assign ment:

Socket Cable Encoder Measuring X11−X16 (10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2) signaloutput system Use metal covers max.1m

A/Ua1 1 1ws/ge 0.14 1 ws K1 2 2gn 0.14 2 br A/Ua1 K1 B/Ua2 3 3gr 0.14 3 rs K2 4 4rs 0.14 4 sw B/Ua2 K2 5 5br 0.5 5

R/Ua0 6 6ws 0.14 6 li K0 7 7ws/gr 0.14 7 ge R/Ua0 K0 8 8vio 0.14 8 gn Uas ALARM +5V 9 9rt 0.5 9 rt Us 10 10sw 0.5 10 11

12 12bl 0.5 12 bl 0V 0V ConnectionmadebymetalbodyofthesubDplug andpin11oftheSouriausocket max.50m

CAUTION! When using a type DG60KTB Stegmann encoder (with flange connection), the connection cable between the encoder and the SERVOi must be adapted accord ing to both the plug connector at the encoder (Interconectron, order no.: 065 615) and the pin assignment, as shown in the following diagram:

Socket Cable(10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2) Measuring X11−X16 Use metal covers system A/Ua1 1 1ws/ge 0.14 5 K1 2 2gn 0.14 6 A/Ua1 K1 B/Ua2 3 3gr 0.14 8 K2 4 4rs 0.14 1 B/Ua2 K2 5 5br 0.5 12 Us R/Ua0 6 6ws 0.14 3 K0 7 7ws/gr 0.14 4 R/Ua0 K0 8 Uas +5V 9 9rt 0.5 10 10sw 0.5 10 0V 12 12bl 0.5 11 0V 0V ConnectionmadebymetalbodyofthesubDplug andpin11oftheSouriausocket max.50m

3−16 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Heidenhain rotary encoder with pulse shaper electronics (EXE)

The connection cables from EXE to the measuring system are supplied by Heiden hain.

CAUTION! − When using an EXE, the correct wiring of the Uas signal must be checked! ! −Pin assignment only applies to cables and EXEs supplied by BOSCH!

Socket CableEXE(5V) Signal Measuring X11−X16 (10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2) output system Use metal covers 1ws/ge 0.14 1 A/Ua1 1 Ua1 Ie1+ 2 2gn 0.14 2 A/Ua1 Ua1 Ie1− 3gr 0.14 3 B/Ua2 3 Ua2 Ie2+ 4 4rs 0.14 4 B/Ua2 Ua2 Ie2− 5br 0.5 5 5 Sensor+5V 6ws 0.14 6 R/Ua0 6 Ua0 Ie0+ 7 7ws/gr 0.14 7 R/Ua0 Ua0 Ie0− 8 8vio 0.14 8 Uas Uas +5V 9 9rt 0.5 9 +5V +5V +5V 10 10sw 0.5 10 Sensor0V 11 Screen 12 12bl 0.5 12 0V 0V 0V 0V Connectionmadeby metalbodyofthesubD plugandpin11ofthe Souriausocket

Socket CableEXE(230V) Signal Measuring X11−X16 (10 x 0.14 mm2 + 4 x 0.5 mm2) output system Use metal covers 1ws/ge 0.14 1 A/Ua1 1 Ua1 Ie1+ 2 2gn 0.14 2 A/Ua1 Ua1 Ie1− 3gr 0.14 3 B/Ua2 3 Ua2 Ie2+ 4 4rs 0.14 4 B/Ua2 Ua2 Ie2− 5 5br 0.5 5 6ws 0.14 6 R/Ua0 6 Ua0 Ie0+ 7 7ws/gr 0.14 7 R/Ua0 Ua0 Ie0− 8 8vio 0.14 8 Uas Uas +5V 9 9rt 0.5 9 +5V +5V 10 10sw 0.5 10

11 Screen 12 12bl 0.5 12 0V 0V 0V 0V Connectionmadeby metalbodyofthesubD plugandpin11ofthe Souriausocket

3−17 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Servo − measuring system cable (ROD)

Connector, subD, 15pin Socket, Souriau type, 12pin

Strainrelief clamp Screen clamp on metal housing

Cable: LY 10 x 0.14 + 4 x 0.5 (max. cable length 50 m) Not suitable for trailing cable operation!

Pin assignment

Colour SubD connector Souriau socket

whiteyellow 1 1 green 2 2 grey 3 3 pink 4 4 brown 0.52 55 white 6 6 whitegrey 7 7 violet 8 8 red 0.52 99 black 0.52 10 10 blue 0.52 12 12 Screen Plug 11 housing

Ordering information

Type No.

Readyassembled cable length 5 m 048 662 Readyassembled cable length 8 m 048 663 Readyassembled cable length 16 m 048 664 Readyassembled cable length 25 m 048 665 Readyassembled cable length 35 m 048 666 Readyassembled cable length 50 m 048 667 Single parts: Cable 10 x 0.14 + 4 x 0.52 903 499 Dplug, 15pin 904 440 Metal cover for 15pin. Dplug 913 724 Socket 12 pin. Souriau 909 131 Accessory kit for Souriau socket 909 688

3−18 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Measuring system inputs with integrated EXE

Encoders with sinusoidal output signals (Heidenhain quasi standard, 11mAss) can be connected to measuring system inputs with integrated EXE. Owing to frequent modifications and the increasing number of models, it is not possible to provide a complete list of possible measuring systems. The encoders given in the section Permissible digital measuring systems" for connection via EXEs should also be regarded as a general recommendation. Other measuring systems are available on request. The following data applies in general for SERVO i measuring system inputs with integrated EXE:

‘ Cable type: Heidenhain cable, identity no. 244 955 01 ‘ Max. permiss. cable length/input: 30 m or manufacturer’s specification. ‘ Max. permissible cable length difference at all inputs: 15 m ‘ Max. permiss. input frequency: 50 kHz ‘ Encoder power supply: +5 V ‘ Max. power input of all encoder/EXEs connected to CNC: 1.5 A ‘ Signal multiplication 5way

SERVOi Cable Measuring socket 2 2 system measuringsysteminput (3 x (2 x 0.14 mm ) + 2 x 1.0 mm ) withintegratedEXE Use metal covers 1gn 0.14 1 Ie1+ 1 2 2ge 0.14 2 Ie1− 3bl 0.14 5 Ie2+ 3 4rt 0.14 6 Ie2− 4

6gr 0.14 7 Ie0+ 6 7rs 0.14 8 Ie0− 7

5br 1 3 +5V +5V 5

12 inner 12 9 screen 10we 1 4 0V 10 0V Connectionmadebymetal Connectionmadeby bodyof15pinSubDplug metalbodyof9pin coupling

max.30m

CAUTION! The 9pin coupling at the measuring system end (Heidenhain identity no. 228 562 01/237 525 04) and the 15pin subD connector at the CNC end must be fitted by the user according to the pin assignment above. Metal connector covers must be used! Cable screening must have largesurface contact with the strainrelief clamp!

3−19 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Connection to digital handwheel

The digital handwheel (order no. 069 167) can be connected to any measuring sys tem input at the SERVO i (X11 to X16). This input must be fixed using machine para meters P 9511 and P 9512. The digital handwheel is effective for synchronous machining axes as well as asynchronous auxiliary axes (exception: spindle axes or ANALOG axes).

Various cables can be used for the digital handwheel connection, but they must always be screened:

Cable min/max permissible cable lengths Remarks

7 x 0.14 mm2 2 m / 14 m Order no. 070/908558 7 x 0.25 mm2 4 m / 24 m 7 x 0.34 mm2 5 m / 33 m* 7 x 0.5 mm27 m / 50 m* 7 x 0.75 mm2 11 m / 50 m*

* = These cables are only suitable in certain cases, as the cable connection to the 9pin subD socket (at the digital handwheel) is problematic due to the size of the cable diameter.

Socket Cable Digitalhandwheel X11−X16 (7 x 0.14 mm2) (Sub−Dplug,9−pin) (Sub−D15−pin) Use metal covers A/Ua1 1 0.14 6 A 2 0.14 7 A/Ua1 A B/Ua2 3 0.14 9 B 4 0.14 8 B/Ua2 B 5 0.14 5 +5V R/Ua0 6 510Ohm, 7 0.25Watt R/Ua0 Uas 8 +5V 9 0.14 10 1 0V

0V 12 Connectionmadebymetalbocyof sub−Dplugconnection min.2m max.14m

The power supply of the digital handwheel (Uhandwheel = 5 V +/− 5%, Ihandwheel = 200 mA) is provided via the SERVO i measuring system input.

Note: − Open Uas inputs (pin 8) at X11 to 16 are set to HIGH potential by internal pullup resistors (= no measuring system error present).

3−20 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

CAUTION! − The cable screen must have a continuous connection from the front panel of the SERVO i (earthing star connections) to the handwheel. − The resistor R (510 W, 0.25 W) prevents overloading of the receiver and there fore must be used. − The total power input (at 5 V supply) of all encoders, EXEs and handwheels connected to the CNC must not exceed 1.5 A! The total power input (at 5 V supply) of all encoders, EXEs and handwheels connected to an individual SERVO i must not exceed 1.5 A! − The encoder/handwheel supply voltage must be +5 V+/−5% for all con nected encoders/handwheels and permitted cable lengths (directly at en coder input or handwheel supply voltage input). − The handwheel must be fixed. It must not be pluggable or switchable.

3−21 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

3.2.3 8way analog input (connector X25) (in preparation) These 8multiplexed inputs can be used to digitise analog voltage signals with a max. input frequency of approx. 10 Hz (8 bit resolution). The following data applies in general for the SERVO analog input: ‘ Max. permiss. cable length/input: 50 m (with 8 bit resolution) ‘ Cable type: Belden ‘ Number of input channels: 8 ‘ Max. internal resistance of the input voltage source: 10 kW ‘ Max. permiss. input voltage: +10.2 V ‘ Max. permiss. input voltage: with CNC on: +10 V ‘ Input voltage range nominal: 0 V to 10 V ‘ Max. permiss. input frequency: 10 Hz ‘ Conversion resolution nominal: 8 bit ‘ Increment voltage 8 bit: 39.2 mV ‘ Conversion time: 35 ms ‘ Linearity error: +/− ¼ LSB ‘ Min. resolution without missing codes: 12 bit ‘ Offset: +/− ½ LSB ‘ Full Scale Calibration Error: 25 mV ‘ Changeover time for channel change: max. 15 ms

Connector Cable X25 (Belden) (SubD,15pin) max.50m

Channel1 1 Analogsignal1 (0to10V) Channel2 3 Analogsignal2 (0to10V) Channel3 5 Analogsignal3 (0to10V) Channel4 7 Analogsignal4 (0to10V) Channel5 9 Analogsignal5 (0to10V) Channel6 11 Analogsignal6 (0to10V) Channel7 13 Analogsignal7 (0to10V) Channel8 15 Analogsignal8 (0to10V) 2 AnalogsignalGND 4 AnalogsignalGND 6 AnalogsignalGND GND 8 AnalogsignalGND 10 AnalogsignalGND 12 AnalogsignalGND 14 AnalogsignalGND

Connectionmadebymetalbocyof Use metal covers thesubDplugconnectionorthe screenconnectionattheSERVOifrontpanel

3−22 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

High Speed I/O (connector X31)

The High Speed ports of the SERVO i can be assigned to the individual signals at will. Refer to the manual Machine parameters", parameters P 9504 to P 9509 for information on which signals can be assigned to the individual ports.

Inputs

In contrast to standard digital interfaces, the control reacts to a signal to the fast inputs within the interpolation time set in P9901 at the latest. In the case of input signals which may directly influence axis traversing (e.g. pro bes), the max. response time is 2 x P9901. Exception: response time FEED HOLD: P 9901 In this way, for example, the signal FEED HOLD may be assigned to one of the HS inputs for safety shutdowns (see also machine parameters P 9504 to 9506). LOW level at the relevant input brings about the Feed hold". The following data should be observed for the HS inputs of the Servo i.

‘ The input signals must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree.

‘ Input voltage range: −3 V to +32 V

‘ All inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.

‘ Threshold voltage for transition from LOW to HIGH level: +8.5 V, +/−1 V

‘ Hysteresis for transition from HIGH to LOW level: 1 V, +/−0.5 V

‘ An open input is recognised as logical 0".

‘ Input current/input: max. 8 mA, +/−1 mA

‘ Screened cables must be used.

Outputs

A maximum of 9 fast output signals in the 24V level may be transferred via optical couplers to the interface unit (PLC). The control reacts to an event within the time 2 x P9901 with HIGH level at the relevant output.

Caution! Safetycritical signals must be looped via EMERGENCY STOP"! !

If the READY2 contact opens, the outputs retain their last applicable value! They ! are not set to logical 0".

3−23 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

The following can be output via the HS outputs:

−4 electronic limit switches (see machine parameters P 6201 to P 6204),

−2 inposition signals (special case),

−2 special signals RAISE" and LOWER" (see P 6403 and P 6404),

−2 spindle signals CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP" and SPINDLE RESOLUTION CHANGEOVER".

For assignment of signals to outputs see manual Machine parameters", P 9507 to P 9509. For signal descriptions see chapter Digital interface, other signals" (part two of this manual). The following should be considered for SERVO i High Speed outputs:

‘ Screened cables should be used.

‘ Output current/output: max. 100 mA (for continuous operation) max. 300 mA (for 20 ms at 10 Hz)

‘ The output stages are permanently shortcircuit proof. In an overloaded condition (the permissible power loss is exceeded), the outputs are deener gised by a temperature monitor and automatically reenergised when the service temperature falls back to within the maximum limit.

‘ Internal voltage drop at rated current: max. 2 V

‘ No active LOW level is output. LOW potential must be generated by external load resistors.

‘ All outputs are highresistance after a RESET.

Power supply of the High Speed I/O

The power supply is external via input X31 from the 24 V load supply (see chapter Electrical connections" for information on the 24 V load supply). ‘ The module is protected against damage in the case of incorrect polarity of the supply voltage. This can however cause malfunction! ‘ The status of the external voltage source is monitored (threshold: 14V, ±1 V). ‘ If the High Speed I/O signals are not used, X31 does not require a power sup ply.

3−24 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Terminal assignments

NCfrontpanel *Distributorcable Interfacecable (36 x 0.14 or (single core 0.25, ConnectorX31 single core 0.25) screened) (subD25pin) max.2m max.50m HSIn1 2 HSIn2 3 HSIn3 4 HSIn4 5 HSIn5 6 HSIn6 7 HSIn7 8 HSIn8 9 HSIn9 15

HSOut1 10 HSOut2 11 HSOut3 12 HSOut4 24 HSOut5 23 HSOut6 22 HSOut7 21 HSOut8 20 HSOut9 19

1 +24V 14 Last Twist 13 leads! 25 0V−Last

ScreenconnectionsatSERVOfront Metalbodyofplug panelorviametalbodyofsubD connectioninPLC plugconnection cabinet

*=distributorcablenotneededwheninterfacecablesaredirectlyconnectedtotheCNC

3−25 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

3.2.4 Probe inputs / 5 V probe power supply (connection X51)

At connection X51 there are 2 inputs (24 V DC, 5 V DC) for switching probes (desig nation on front panel: Pr"). Internally both inputs are linked via an OR function. The evaluation of the probe signal can be set using machine parameter P 9908 (triggering on positive edge, negative edge, both edges or no evaluation possible).

In addition a switching voltage for a 5 V probe is available (load carrying capacity: max. 10 mA). This voltage can be switched from the switch contact of a probe and be returned to the control at the 5 V DC probe input. Caution! When using several SERVO i’s, the probe signal must be fed to all probe inputs of ! those SERVO icards which operate synchronous axes!

The following should be observed in general for probe inputs of the SERVO i: ‘ The input signals must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree. ‘ Screened lines must be used. ‘ An open input is recognised as logical 0". ‘ All inputs are metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.

24 V probe input ‘ Max. permiss. input voltage: 0 V ‘ HIGH level: +17 to +32 V ‘ LOW level: −3 to +5 V (or open input) ‘ Nominal input current (at 24 V): 8 mA ‘ Typical switching threshold: 230V 5 V probe input ‘ Max. permiss. input voltage: +6 V ‘ HIGH level: +4 to +6 V ‘ LOW level: −3 to +0.8 V (or open input) ‘ Nominal input current (at 5 V): 8 mA ‘ Typical switching threshold: +3 V

Terminal assignments

Connection X51 1 24Vprobeinput 2 5Vprobeinput 3 0Vload

4 5Vvoltagesupplyforprobe(max.10mA) 5 0V

6 7 8

Screenconnectionat Servofrontpanel

3−26 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Connection examples for probes

24 V probe 5 V probe Floatingcontact,5Vswitched Floatingcontact internal5Vvoltageused 24Vswitched Terminal block (*) MT 1 1 MT 2 2 3 3

(*): Connect terminal block 4 close to cable bushing at 4 24Vload 5 switch cabinet. 5 0Vload

Driveroutput Driveroutput 24Vswitched 5Vswitched

1 1 MT 2 2 MT 3 3

4 4 24Vload 5 5 5Vexternal 0Vload 0Vexternal

Opencollector"output 0Vswitched(5Vinternal)

1 Screenconnectionsat 2 Servofrontpanel (taperpin) 3

4 MT 5

Floatingcontact 24Vand5Vswitched MT 1 24Vload 2 5Vexternal(*) 3 0Vload

4 5

(*): Potential connection to 0 V load

3−27 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Fast retract" input (connection X51)

The fast retract input is located at connection X51 and is designated on the front panel of the SERVO i by Em" (Emergency In). A positive edge at this input (HIGH level: +24 V) initiates the processing of informa tion in the programmed G98 or G33 record. This information can include an incre mental retract movement from the contour. The currently active program is interrupted abruptly. The CNC executes the G98 or G33 information not later than the time set in machine parameter P 9901. Safetycritical functions can thus be performed in conjunction with an external monitoring logic (e.g. in the event of tool failure).

Caution! Where a number of SERVO i’s are fitted, only the Fast retract" input is evaluated on ! the first SERVO i (from the left).

The following data should be observed for the Fast retract" input of the Servo i:

‘ Screened cables should be used.

‘ The input signal must be interferencesuppressed and bouncefree.

‘ Input voltage range: −3 V to +32 V

‘ The input is metallically separated from the logic voltage via optical couplers.

‘ Threshold voltage for transition from LOW to HIGH level: +8.5 V, +/−1 V

‘ Hysteresis for transition from HIGH to LOW level: 1 V, +/−0.5 V

‘ Open input is interpreted as logical 0".

‘ Input current: max. 8 mA, +/−1 mA

Terminal assignment

Connection X51

1 2 3

4 5

6 Fastretract(24V,positiveslope) 7 0Vload 8

Screenconnectionat Servofrontpanel

3−28 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

3.2.5 Analog setpoint outputs (connections X21 and X22)

Speedproportional voltages are available at these outputs to control the individual axes. In this case the spindle is to be treated as an asynchronous axis (e.g. connec tion to 7th set value output on SERVO 6i).

Caution! The output stages of the SERVO i are permanently shortcircuit proof. If, however, several outputs are shortcircuited, increased power loss can lead to destruction of the output operational amplifiers.

The setpoint outputs are set to 0 V (analog GND) immediately if the READY2 con ! tact opens. This level is guaranteed for 1 second at the most! For this reason the drives must be switched off within 1 second!

The following should be observed in general for analog setpoint outputs of the SERVO i:

‘ Recommended cable type: Belden 2 x 0.5 mm2 (876220)

‘ Max. cable length: 50 m

‘ The screen connection is dependent on the drives used (e.g. for Servodyn T: connection on both sides).

‘ Max. output voltage range: ± 13.3 V

‘ Resolution (nom.): 0.4 mV

‘ Output voltage (rapid): ±10 V

‘ The output voltages are potentialbound.

‘ Permissible load resistance at output: min. 10 kW

‘ The inputs on the drive amplifiers must be wired as differential amplifiers.

3−29 Pluginmodules CC220 SERVOiservoloopinterface Connectionconditions

Terminal assignment

Connection max.50m X22 4 0V 3 7. Setpointoutput +/−10V

2 0V 1 6. Setpointoutput +/−10V Screenconnectionat Servofrontpanel

Connection X21 10 0V 9 5. Setpointoutput +/−10V

8 0V 7 4. Setpointoutput +/−10V

6 0V 5 3. Setpointoutput +/−10V

4 0V 3 2. Setpointoutput +/−10V

2 0V 1 1. Setpointoutput +/−10V Screenconnectionat Servofrontpanel

3−30 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

3.3 I/O 24/0.2 module with PIC 250 (digital I/O with integrated PLC)

There are 64 inputs and 40 outputs available for the machine and PLC. Using the MTB1 I/O increases the number of inputs by a further 64 and outputs by a further 32. A second I/O 24/0.2 module (without integrated PIC) can be connected in order to extend the inputs and outputs (for possible slot see section Card rack"). The PIC 250 is a PLC in the form of an additional card which can be plugged onto the I/O 24/0.2 module.

BOSCH CNC

Digital outputs (socket X11, SubD, 50pin)

E/A24/0.2 WriteProt. 0 Write protection PIC 250 1 Digital inputs (connector X21, SubD, 15pin)

Digital inputs (connector X22, SubD, 50pin)

Supply voltage input for X11 24V 24V (connection X10) 0V 0V

V24 (optional) V24/20mA (EDNC/LSV2DNC) (socket X32, SubD, 25pin; (optional) currently unused) (socket X31, SubD, 25pin)

V24 V24/ 20mA

Front view I/O 24/0.2

Caution! The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC is switched off!

3−31 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

PIC 250 data:

512 digital inputs 32 timers 1024 markers 512 digital outputs 8 counters 2k memory (EEPROM) (4k or 8k optional)

The CNC interface is addressed with the PIC addresses A0.0 to A31.7 (CNC inputs) and E0.0 to E31.7 (CNC outputs), the MTB I/O inputs/outputs with A32.0 to A35.7 (MTB I/O outputs) and E32.0 to E39.7 (MTB I/O inputs), the outputs/inputs of the primary module I/O 24/0.2 (to which PIC 250 is con nected) with A36.0 to A40.7 (outputs) and E40.0 to E47.7 (inputs), the outputs/inputs of the secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250) with A41.0 to A45.7 (outputs) and E48.0 to E55.7 (inputs).

The section PLC couplings" contains further information on PIC 250.

Write protection PIC 250 Position 0: Access to the PIC program is possible (editing, deleting). Only one nonactive PIC program can be edited. Position 1: PIC 250 memory is locked against all write access.

Caution! − The write protection switch must be in position 0" when loading a PIC program. − After commissioning the PIC program, write protection must always be acti vated (position 1). If this is not done, for example, reloading the CNC operat ing system at a later time could cause the PIC memory to be overwritten and the PIC program to be lost!

3−32 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

Supply voltage input (connection X10)

24 VDC supply, +20% −15%; (Weidmüller plugin terminal, MSTB 1.5, 4pin). Pola rised supply voltage input for the digital outputs to X11. Supplied from an external 24 V load power supply module (see chapter Electrical connections"). Maximum input current (to all outputs at HIGH level): 8.3A.

F 10 A X10 24 V= F1 24 V= Power supply from 24 V load power sup 0 V ply module 0 V IMAX = 8.3 A Polarity protection

Caution! −Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging the fuse is not permitted!

Digital outputs (connection X11) (Socket, SubD, 50pin) These outputs are driven by the internal PLC (PIC 250). They are freely assignable. Signal assignment depends on the PLC program. 40 outputs are available. Specifi cations of an output:

Nominal output voltage: 24 V Max. internal voltage drop: 2 V Nominal output current (HIGH level): 200 mA Max. output current (HIGH level): 220 mA Shortcircuit current of an output: 250−500 mA Max. Output leakage current (LOW level): 0.1 mA

All outputs are set to LOW level during CNC system startup. Similarly, all outputs are set to LOW level by pressing the RESET key at PS75 or by the RESET IN signal at PS75.

Caution! − Corresponding freewheeling diodes must be wired parallel to the load when an inductive load (relay) is connected to the outputs! − Since an output does not supply an active LOW level, an external load resis tance (approx. 1kW) must be used at a highresistance seriesconnected input. − Due to the particular, safetycritical relevance with regard to drive movements or the evaluation of CNC digital I/Os, we would like to draw attention to the control signal READY2 at this point (relay contact, see section PS75"): if the READY2 ! contact is open the control system is not ready!

3−33 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

The allocation between the PLC output addresses and output pins to X11 may be derived from the following tables:

Primary module I/O 24/0.2 (with PIC 250):

ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN

36.0 27 36.1 50 36.2 09 36.3 33 36.4 26 36.5 17 36.6 08 36.7 49

37.0 25 37.1 16 37.2 07 37.3 32 37.4 23 37.5 15 37.6 06 37.7 48

38.0 22 38.1 14 38.2 05 38.3 31 38.4 21 38.5 13 38.6 04 38.7 30 X11

39.0 20 39.1 12 39.2 03 39.3 29 39.4 36 39.5 11 39.6 02 39.7 28

40.0 19 40.1 10 40.2 01 40.3 47 40.4 18 40.5 34 40.6 35 40.7 37

Secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250):

ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN

41.0 27 41.1 50 41.2 09 41.3 33 41.4 26 41.5 17 41.6 08 41.7 49

42.0 25 42.1 16 42.2 07 42.3 32 42.4 23 42.5 15 42.6 06 42.7 48

43.0 22 43.1 14 43.2 05 43.3 31 43.4 21 43.5 13 43.6 04 43.7 30 X11

44.0 20 44.1 12 44.2 03 44.3 29 44.4 36 44.5 11 44.6 02 44.7 28

45.0 19 45.1 10 45.2 01 45.3 47 45.4 18 45.5 34 45.6 35 45.7 37

Digital inputs (connections X21 and X22) (X21: connector, SubD, 15pin; X22: connector, SubD, 50pin) These inputs are interrogated by the internal PLC (PIC 250). Signal assignment de pends on the PLC program. 64 inputs are available. The inputs are metallically sep arated from the logic voltage via optical couplers. Specifications of an input:

Input voltage range LOW: −3 V to +5 V HIGH: +17 V to +32 V Open inputs are recognised as logical LOW. Input current: max. 6 mA at HIGH level

Note: − Since the inputs are scanned, the input current fluctuates between 0 and 6 mA at HIGH level.

Caution! − The input suppressor circuit limits positive and negative interference volt ages to 68 V. However, if the input voltage is greater than 61 V and at the same time the internal resistance of the input voltage source is static and less than 5 kW, the input suppressor circuit may be damaged! The input circuit would then be exposed to the full voltage present and could be damaged!

3−34 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

The allocation between the PLC input addresses and input pins to X21 and X22 may be derived from the following tables:

Primary module I/O 24/0.2 (with PIC 250):

ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN

40.0 48 40.1 47 40.2 50 40.3 49 40.4 33 40.5 32 40.6 17 40.7 16

41.0 46 41.1 15 41.2 31 41.3 45 41.4 30 41.5 14 41.6 29 41.7 44

42.0 13 42.1 12 42.2 28 42.3 43 42.4 11 42.5 27 42.6 42 42.7 10 X22

43.0 26 43.1 41 43.2 09 43.3 25 43.4 24 43.5 08 43.6 40 43.7 07

44.0 23 44.1 39 44.2 06 44.3 22 44.4 38 44.5 05 44.6 21 44.7 04

45.0 37 45.1 20 45.2 03 45.3 36 45.4 19 45.5 02 45.6 01 45.7 18

46.0 34 46.1 35 46.2 15 46.3 07 46.4 14 46.5 06 46.6 13 46.7 05 X21 47.0 12 47.1 04 47.2 11 47.3 03 47.4 10 47.5 02 47.6 09 47.7 01

Secondary module I/O 24/0.2 (without PIC 250):

ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN ADDR PIN

48.0 48 48.1 47 48.2 50 48.3 49 48.4 33 48.5 32 48.6 17 48.7 16

49.0 46 49.1 15 49.2 31 49.3 45 49.4 30 49.5 14 49.6 29 49.7 44

50.0 13 50.1 12 50.2 28 50.3 43 50.4 11 50.5 27 50.6 42 50.7 10 X22

51.0 26 51.1 41 51.2 09 51.3 25 51.4 24 51.5 08 51.6 40 51.7 07

52.0 23 52.1 39 52.2 06 52.3 22 52.4 38 52.5 05 52.6 21 52.7 04

53.0 37 53.1 20 53.2 03 53.3 36 53.4 19 53.5 02 53.6 01 53.7 18

54.0 34 54.1 35 54.2 15 54.3 07 54.4 14 54.5 06 54.6 13 54.7 05 X21 55.0 12 55.1 04 55.2 11 55.3 03 55.4 10 55.5 02 55.6 09 55.7 01

DNC interface (optional) (connection X31) (Socket, SubD, 25pin) For terminal assignments see section DNC interfaces".

3−35 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

Interface cables

X11 (PIC 250 output signals)

Connector, SubD, 50pin Terminal pin

2.5 m

400 mm

Strainrelief clamp Stripped length: 4 mm Screen clamp on metal housing

Pin assignment

Colour Pin Colour Pin Colour Pin

white 1 greybrown 18 greenblack 35 brown 2 whitepink 19 yellowblack 36 green 3 pinkbrown 20 greyblue 37 yellow 4 whiteblue 21 pinkblue 38 grey 5 brownblue 22 greyred 39 pink 6 whitered 23 pinkred 40 blue 7 brownred 24 greyblack 41 red 8 whiteblack 25 pinkblack 42 black 9 brownblack 26 blueblack 43 violet 10 greygreen 27 redblack 44 greypink 11 yellowgrey 28 whitebrownblack 45 redblue 12 pinkgreen 29 yellowgreenblack 46 whitegreen 13 yellowpink 30 greypinkblack 47 browngreen 14 greenblue 31 redblueblack 48 whiteyellow 15 yellowblue 32 whitegreenblack 49 yellowbrown 16 greenred 33 browngreenblack 50 whitegrey 17 yellowred 34

3−36 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

X21 (PIC 250 input signals)

Socket, SubD, 15pin Terminal pin

2.5 m

400 mm

Strainrelief clamp Stripped length 4 mm Screen clamp on metal housing

Pin assignment

Colour Pin white 1 brown 2 green 3 yellow 4 grey 5 pink 6 blue 7 red 8 black 9 violet 10 greypink 11 redblue 12 whitegreen 13 browngreen 14 whiteyellow 15

3−37 Pluginmodules CC220 I/O24/0.2(withPIC250) Connectionconditions

X22 (PIC 250 input signals)

Socket, SubD, 50pin Terminal pin 2.5 m

400 mm

Strainrelief clamp Stripped length: 4 mm Screen clamp on metal housing

Pin assignment

Colour Pin Colour Pin Colour Pin

white 1 greybrown 18 greenblack 35 brown 2 whitepink 19 yellowblack 36 green 3 pinkbrown 20 greenblue 37 yellow 4 whiteblue 21 pinkblue 38 grey 5 brownblue 22 greyred 39 pink 6 whitered 23 pinkred 40 blue 7 brownred 24 greyblack 41 red 8 whiteblack 25 pinkblack 42 black 9 brownblack 26 blueblack 43 violet 10 greygreen 27 redblack 44 greypink 11 yellowgrey 28 whitebrownblack 45 redblue 12 pinkgreen 29 yellowgreenblack 46 whitegreen 13 yellowpink 30 greypinkblack 47 browngreen 14 greenblue 31 redblueblack 48 whiteyellow 15 yellowblue 32 whitegreenblack 49 yellowbrown 16 greenred 33 browngreenblack 50 whitegrey 17 yellowred 34

Ordering information

Type No.

I/O 24/0.2 068 347 I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250 068 349 I/O 24/0.2 with PIC250 and with V24/20mA expansion card for DNC 068 357 Interface cable X11 048 034 Interface cable X21 048 033 Interface cable X22 048 032

3−38 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCBit Connectionconditions

3.4 NCPLCBit module (bit coupler)

Using the NCPLCBit module, an external PLC (PC600, CL300) can be coupled to the CNC on the basis of a bit coupling. To do this the PLC module AG/Z or AG/P must be on the PLC side. The PLC can then access the complete CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O in puts/outputs (if the MTB1 I/O is connected). The corresponding addresses for bit coupling can be found in the interface tables (see chapter Digital interface") under the column Address bit coupl.". It is also possible for several CNCs (CC120, CC200, CC220, CC300, CC320) to be driven on one PLC on the basis of the bit coupling (provided that the PLC has a correspondingly large I/O range). In order to avoid a conflict of addresses with PLC I/O signals assigned to the other controllers, the start address of the CC220 digital interface must be set using machine parameter P6008.

BOSCH CNC

NC−SPS Bit

System connection to the PLC (AG/Z or AG/P) (socket X11, SubD, 50pin)

V24 (optional) V24/20mA (EDNC/LSV2DNC) (socket X32, SubD, 25pin; (optional) currently unused) (socket X31, SubD, 25pin)

V24 V24/ 20mA

Front view NCPLCBit

3−39 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCBit Connectionconditions

Caution! The module must only be inserted or removed when the control and PLC are switched off!

System connection to the external PLC (terminal X11) (socket, SubD, 50pin) Bus connection between the CNC (connection X11) and the PLC module AG/Z or AG/P (also connection X11) for bit coupling between CNC and PLC.

Caution! The bus connection cable must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and ! PLC are switched off!

DNC interface (optional) (connection X31) (socket, SubD, 25pin) For terminal assignments see section DNC interfaces".

3−40 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCBit Connectionconditions

Connection cable NCPLCBit to AG/Z or AG/P

Connector, SubD, 50pin 0.5 m, 0.75 m Connector, SubD, 50pin or 1.8 m

Connector Connector X11 at X11 at AG/Z or NCPLCBit AG/P

Pin assignment

Colour Pin Pin Colour Pin Pin Colour Pin Pin

black 3 3 orangewhite 20 20 orangeblack 37 37 blue 4 4 brownwhite 21 21 brownblack 38 38 brown 5 5 bluered 22 22 redgreen 39 39 beige 6 6 yellowred 23 23 greygreen 40 40 yellow 7 7 greenred 24 24 violetgreen 41 41 green 8 8 whitered 25 25 whitegreen 4 242 violet 9 9 orangered 26 26 orangegreen 43 43 pink 10 10 brownred 27 27 browngreen 44 44 orange 11 11 redblack 28 28 redyellow 45 45 transparent 12 12 blueblack 29 29 blueyellow 46 46 redwhite 13 13 greenyellow 30 30 violetyellow 47 47 bluewhite 14 14 yellowblack 31 31 whiteyellow 48 48 yellowwhite 15 15 greenblack 32 32 brownyellow 49 49 greenwhite 16 16 violetblack 33 33 redblue 50 50 violetwhite 17 17 whiteblack 36 36

Ordering information

Type No.

NCPLCBit 044 339 NCPLCBit incl. V24/20 mA expansion card for DNC 056 752 Cable NCPLCBit 0.5 m (for AG/Z or AG/P) 041 535 Cable NCPLCBit 0.75 m (for AG/Z or AG/P) 062 970 Cable NCPLCBit 1.8 m (for AG/P) 048 081 AG/Z 041 523 AG/P 047 944

3−41 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCWord Connectionconditions

3.5 NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler)

The external PLC PC600 can be coupled to the CC 220 on the basis of the word coupling*) by means of the NCPLCWord3 module. To do this the PLC module AG/ NC3S must be on the PLC side. The data exchange between CC 220 and PC600 is performed via the communica tions memory of the NCPLCWord3. The PLC accesses this dualport RAM via special function modules. The corresponding addresses and symbol names of the word coupling may be found in the interface tables (see chapter 4, Digital interfaces") under the columns headed Word coupl. address" and Symb. PG4". Several CNCs can be connected to one PC600. It is, however, only possible to con nect a maximum of one wordcoupled CNC (the other CNCs are bit coupled). *) Word coupling between CC 220M and PC 600 only

BOSCH CNC

System connection to PC 600 (AG/NC3S) (connector X71, SubD, 50pin)

NC−SPS Word3

Battery

Battery cover

V24 (optional) V24/20mA (EDNC/LSV2DNC) (socket X32, SubD, 25pin; (optional) currently unused) (socket X31, SubD, 25pin)

V24 V24/ 20mA

Front view NCPLCWord3

3−42 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCWord Connectionconditions

Caution! The module must only be inserted or removed when the control and PLC are switched off!

System connection to PC600 (connection X71) (connector, SubD, 50pin) Bus connection between CNC (connection X71) and PLC module AG/NC3S (also connection X71) for word coupling between CC 220 M and PC600.

Caution! The bus connection cable must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and ! PLC are switched off!

Battery The battery is used to back up the communication memory. Battery type: Lithium, TLQ 150, taper pin connection, order no.: 046 800. Replacement: annually. See section Maintenance" for information on battery replacement.

Caution! The battery must be changed immediately on the first occasion the error message WKBATTERY LOW" appears, while the CNC is switched on (otherwise data will be lost)!

DNC interface (optional) (connection X31) (socket, SubD, 25pin) For terminal assignments see section DNC interfaces".

The communication memory

The communication memory (total capacity: 128 kB) is used for data exchange be tween CC 220 and PC 600. The user is able to access the data in this memory by using CPL commands at the CNC and function modules at the PLC.

CC 220 M PC 600 Data from: Interface I/O 64 kB Screen Potentiometers Panel keys System Communication DNC connec X71 X71 memory tion 64 kB W tables cable

NCPLCWord3 AG/NC3S

3−43 Pluginmodules CC220 NCPLCWord Connectionconditions

Connection cable NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S

Socket, SubD, 50pin Socket, SubD, 50pin

1.5 m or 0.7 m

Strainrelief clamp Screen clamp on metal housing

Pin assignment

Colour Pin Pin Colour Pin Pin Colour Pin Pin

white 1 1 greybrown 18 18 greenblue 35 35 brown 2 2 whitepink 19 19 pinkblue 36 36 green 3 3 pinkbrown 20 20 greyred 37 37 yellow 4 4 whiteblue 21 21 pinkred 38 38 grey 5 5 brownblue 22 22 greyblack 39 39 pink 6 6 whitered 23 23 pinkblack 40 40 blue 7 7 brownred 24 24 blueblack 41 41 red 8 8 whiteblack 25 25 redblack 42 4 2 black 9 9 brownblack 26 26 white 43 43 violet 10 10 greygreen 27 27 brown 44 44 greypink 11 11 yellowgrey 28 28 green 45 45 redblue 12 12 greenblue 29 29 yellow 46 46 whitegreen 13 13 yellowblue 30 30 grey 47 47 browngreen 14 14 greenred 31 31 pink 48 48 whiteyellow 15 15 yellowred 32 32 pinkgreen 49 49 yellowbrown 16 16 greenblack 33 33 yellowpink 5 050 whitegrey 17 17 yellowblack 34 34

Ordering information

Type No.

NCPLCWord3 060 668 NCPLCWord3 incl. V24/20mA extended module for DNC 060 670 Cable NCPLCWord3, 0.7 m (for AG/NC3S) 060 742 Cable NCPLCWord3, 1.5 m (for AG/NC3S) 060 743 Battery for NCPLCWord3 046 800 AG/NC3S 071 204

3−44 Pluginmodules CC220 SCP2 Connectionconditions

3.6 SCP2 module (serial couple processor)

As a highperformance LSV2DNC interface, the SCP2 module offers a number of advantages compared with the V24/20 mA extended module which can be plugged onto the I/O, bit or word coupling card: − Faster loading of files and faster Processing via DNC interface" (P0 operation). − 430 kByte ring buffer for direct processing" via DNC (P0 operation). Ring buffer direct on the SCP card so no more demands on part pro gram memory by DNC data. − Additional RS422 interface. This facilitates maximum transmission rates of 57.6 kBaud (as opposed to 19200 baud with V24 and 9600 baud with 20 mA) and longer transmission distances (up to 1000 m). − Extended LSV2 diagnostics.

BOSCH CNC

NMI button S1

EPROM− Modul

EPROM module

EPROM module cover SCP2

V24/RS422

V24/RS422 (socket X11, SubD, 25pin)

V24/20mA

V24/20mA (socket X12, SubD, 25pin)

Front view SCP2

Caution!

3−45 Pluginmodules CC220 SCP2 Connectionconditions

− The SCP module and its EPROM module may only be inserted or removed when the control is switched off! − The NMI button is used to debug the card. It must not be actuated during nor mal operation!

The V24/RS422 interface connection is designated by X11 (socket, SubD, 25pin) and the V24/20MA interface connection by X12 (socket, SubD, 25pin). The inter face to be used for LSV2DNC can be specified using machine parameter P 8607. The interface variants V24/20 mA and V24/RS422 are each wired to a socket. All interface variants behave in the same way with regard to data. The parameter isation of the interfaces (baud rate, stop bits etc.) is implemented via machine para meter set 8600 DNC interface with LSV2 protocol". Please refer to the manual Machine parameters".

V24 interface Level: HIGH: +3 V to +9 V. LOW: −3 V to −9 V. Transmission rate: maximum 19200 baud. Protocol: LSV2 protocol. Cable length: max. 15 m Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX Receive data, CNC reception line. GND Signal ground. Screen contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector.

Neither hardware handshake nor software handshake (XON, XOFF) are used with LSV2DNC. The CNC does not evaluate the CTS and DSR status leads. DTR (pin 20) is permanently set at the CNC end.

SCP<15m HOSTcomputer SocketX11/12 Socket SubD25pin Plug Plug SubD25pin TX 2 Data 3 RX RX 3 Data 2 TX GND 7 7 GND Screentobody 1 Screen Use metal covers

V24connectionbetweenCNCandperipheral(e.g.HOST)

Caution! − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

3−46 Pluginmodules CC220 SCP2 Connectionconditions

IMPORTANT −At times it may be necessary to bridge RTS with CTS and DTR with DSR on the external device. −To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a V24 interface con nection must not exceed 15 m. Either suitable repeaters or the 20mA inter face or the RS422 interface must be used if these lengths need to be ex ceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <19200 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

20 mA interface (current loop) Level HIGH: approx. 20 mA (min. 12 mA) LOW: approx. 0 mA (max. 3 mA). Transmission rate: max. 9600 baud. Max. external voltage drop: 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA active) Voltage drop in control unit: max. 3.5 V (switched as 20 mA passive) Power supply of the driving device: max. 12 V Protocol: LSV2 protocol Cable length (CNC active): max. 100 m Cable length (CNC passive): max. 50 m Cable type: screened cable, conductor cross section min. 0.14 mm2

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX+, TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX+, RX Receive data, CNC reception line. Screen Contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector.

For LSV2DNC the DTR signal is always set by the CNC. DSR is not evaluated here.

With the 20 mA connection, one device must be defined as the active device and the other as the passive (active: device acts as source). The 20 mA interface be comes active if pins 9 and 10 are bridged. If this bridge is not present, the interface is parameterised as passive.

3−47 Pluginmodules CC220 SCP2 Connectionconditions

SCP<50m DNCcomputer SocketX12 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pin Use metal covers SubD25pin RX+ 22 TX+ Data RX− 12 TX− TX+ 23 RX+ Data TX− 13 RX−

Screentobody Screen

20 mA passive (interface of connected device acts as power source)

SCP<100m DNCcomputer SocketX12 Plug Plug Socket SubD25pinUse metal covers SubD25pin RX+ 12 TX+ Data RX− 24 TX− TX+ 13 RX+ Data TX− 25 RX−

Activein 9 Activeout 10

Screentobody Screen

20 mA active (DNC interface of the CNC operates as power source)

CAUTION! − Refer to the safety information regarding interfaces in the chapter Safety notes" at the front of this manual!

IMPORTANT −To ensure reliable data transmission, the cable length for a 20 mA connection should not exceed 50 or 100 m. The maximum cable length admissible if CNC is acting as the driving device (20 mA active) is 100 m. If the peripheral interface is acting as the source (CNC: 20mA passive), the maximum per mitted length is 50 m. Either suitable repeaters or the RS422 interface must be used if these lengths need to be exceeded. It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values <9200 baud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

3−48 Pluginmodules CC220 SCP2 Connectionconditions

RS422 interface Line Receiver: SN 75175; min. input error voltage: ±200 mV min. input resistance: 12 kW Line Driver: SN 75174 Transmission rate: max. 57.6 kBaud Protocol: LSV2 protocol Cable length: max. 1000 m with screened twisted pair cable Conductor cross section: min. 0.25 mm2. Line termination: at cable lengths >100 m: 150 W between pin 16 and pin 3 (at X11).

The following interface circuits are used on the CNC side: TX+, TX Transmit data, CNC outgoing line. RX+, RX Receive data, CNC reception line. Screen contact to CNC housing by means of metallic casing of subD plug connector.

max. SCP1000m DNCcomputer SocketX11 Plug Plug SubD25pinUse metal covers RS422 RX+ 16 TX+ Data RX− 3 TX− TX+ 15 RX+ Data TX− 2 RX− GND 10 GND 7 9 Screentobody Screen (ScreeningseeCaution") (Pins7and9seeIMPORTANT") RS422connectionbetweenCNCandHOST

CAUTION! Be sure to verify that the screen connections of both units have the same reference ! potential before connecting the screening! If this is not done then equipotential bonding leads with suitable cross sections must be installed between the systems by the user!

IMPORTANT − The RS422 interface will only be active if pin7 is bridged with pin9 at X11 on the SCP side! − Screening at both sides provides the greatest interference immunity. Inad equate screening reduces interference immunity! −It is possible to limit the max. transmission rate to values < 57.6 kbaud if special line drivers or repeaters are used. Please refer to corresponding technical data. Only use line drivers or repeaters with metal casing (only then is the continuity of the cable screening from the CNC to the external de vice ensured).

3−49 Pluginmodules CC220 PCI/OS Connectionconditions

3.7 PCI/OS module with integrated PIC 250

This card is used for coupling PLC I/O cards which are fitted either in the CNC combirack or externally in a PLC extension rack to the integrated PLC (PIC 250). If using a combirack, the connection between the PCI/OS and the PLC I/O cards is established internally via the backplane. External PLC I/O cards are connected to the PCI/OS coupler via the AG/ZS and the AG/ZS connection cable (length 0.55 m, order no. 064 754).

BOSCH CNC

NC−SPS I/O−S

0 Write protection PIC 250 1

System connection to the PLC (AG/ZS)

(socket X11, SubD, 50pin) WriteProt.

LED Logic Logic LED 12 V 12V

24V X Supply voltage 24V input 1 0V 0 0V (connection X10)

V24 (optional) V24/20mA (EDNC/LSV2DNC) (socket X32, SubD, 25pin; (optional) currently unused) (socket X31, SubD, 25pin)

V24 V24/ 20mA

Front view PCI/O interface card

3−50 Pluginmodules CC220 PCI/OS Connectionconditions

CAUTION! The module must only be inserted or removed when the CNC is switched off! The addresses E0.0 − E39.7 and A0.0 − A35.7 are assigned by the CNC digital interface and the MTB1 I/O and may not be used for signals of the connected PLC I/O cards. For this reason address the PLC I/O cards connected to the PCI/OS (via AG/ZS) from E40.0 onwards (range: E40.0 − E63.7) or from A36.0 (range: A36.0 − A63.7)!

S1 and S2 switch the CMOS bus signals IRD and IRW. These signals must be switched off if a DESI bus master is connected! S1 S2 ON ON no DESI bus master ON OFF not permitted OFF ON not permitted OFF OFF DESI bus master possible FRONTVIEW S4 S3 S2 S1 S3 and S4 are currently not evaluated.

Write protection PIC 250 Position 0: Access to the PIC program is possible (editing, deleting). Only one nonactive PIC program can be edited.

Position 1: PIC 250 memory is locked against writing access.

CAUTION! − The write protection switch must be in position 0" when loading a PIC pro gram into the CNC. − After commissioning the PIC program, write protection must always be acti vated (position 1). If this is not done, for example, reloading the CNC operat ing system at a later time could cause the PIC memory to be overwritten and the PIC program(s) to be lost!

3−51 Pluginmodules CC220 PCI/OS Connectionconditions

Supply voltage input (connection X10)

24 VDC supply, +20% −15%; (Weidmüller plugin terminal, MSTB 1.5, 4pin). Pola rised supply voltage input for generation of internally required voltages. Supply via an external 24 V logic power supply module (see chapter Electrical connections"). Maximum input current: 1.5 A

F 10 A X10 24 V= Power supply F1 24 V= from the 24 V logic power sup 0 V ply module. IMAX = 1.5 A 0 V Install leads twisted! Polarity protection

CAUTION! −Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging the fuse is not permitted!

LED 12 V The internal 12 V supply voltage for the CMOS bus is present.

LED logic Internal logic voltage for PLC I/O cards is present.

System connection to the external PLC extension rack (connection X11) (socket, SubD, 50pin). Bus connection between CNC and PLC module AG/ZS in the PLC extension rack (extension cable AG/ZS, length 0.55 m, order no. 064 754). Access to the I/Os is then possible via PIC 250 from the PLC I/O cards installed there.

CAUTION! The bus connection cable must only be inserted or removed when the CNC and PLC are switched off!

DNC interface (optional) (connection X31) (socket, SubD, 25pin) For terminal assignments see section DNC interfaces".

Ordering information

Type No.

PCI/OS with PIC 250 071 356 PCI/OS with PIC 250 and V24/20 mA expansion card for DNC 071 358 Extension cable AG/ZS 0.55 m 064 754

3−52 Pluginmodules CC220 PS75 Connectionconditions

3.8 Power supply module PS 75 The power supply module (order no. 047 181) supplies the internal voltages for the logic circuits of all plugin modules (CP/MEM4 etc.). The measuring system and handwheel supply voltage (5 V, max. 1.5 A, see description of SERVOi) is also gen erated by the power supply module.

BOSCH CNC

PS75

LED output voltage V out

READY2 LED READY

24V input voltage 24 V

Reset Reset button

READY2 Relay contact (make contact) X 2 0 Fuse for 24 V input F10A 24V X Input voltage 1 24 V DC +20% /−15% max. 0 0V 0V

FrontpanelPS75

Caution! The PS 75 module may only be connected or removed when the controller is switched off!

3−53 Pluginmodules CC220 PS75 Connectionconditions

Output voltage LED Output voltage display. The LED is lit when the logic supply voltage is output at the PS 75.

READY2 LED (see also READY2 contact) The LED lights up if none of the following errors arise: − internal voltage error − excess temperature (> 58 °C internal) − measuring system error − control loop error − watchdog error

24V input voltage LED The green LED lights up when the 24 V input voltage to X10 is present.

Reset button Button for resetting all error messages and cold restart of the CNC (hardware reset).

READY2 contact (X20) Relay contact (make contact) opens when faults are detected as described under READY2 LED (switch rating 50 W/24 V DC, Imax. = 2 A).

CAUTION! − The control is not READY if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason ! READY2 must be connected accordingly in the interface controller (with EMERGENCY STOP)! − When switching off, the drives must be disconnected before switching off the ! CNC logic voltage!

Input voltage 24 V (connector X10) 4pin screw terminal, max. 1.52. Supply from 24 V= +20%/−15%, max. 1.2 Vss ripple voltage. The input is polarised. Power input 125 W.

F 10 A X10 24 V 24 V Power supply F1 24 V from 24 V (logic) power supply module (see Electrical connec 0 V tions") Install leads twisted! 0 V 0 V Polarity protection (internal)

CAUTION! −Only use the recommended fuse type. Bridging the fuse is not permitted!

3−54 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4. Digital interface 4.1 Interface tables

General The tables list the total interface scope between CNC / PLC / MTB1 I/O classified by addresses. The section Signal register" lists all signals in alphabetical order.

Addresses The CNC digital interface has 256 inputs and 256 outputs. The PLC addresses these signals differently depending on the type of coupling between CNC and PLC (PIC250, bit or word coupling). For word coupling, the correct addresses are found in the Address word coupl." column; for bit coupling and when using the PIC250, in the column Address bit coupl.". In the tables all addresses are PLC or PIC 250 related, i.e. I 0.0" corresponds to PLC Input signal 0.0 and O 0.0" to PLC output signal 0.0. The assignment of ad dresses for the CNC interface is contained in the Address bit coupl." column:

e.g. I 0.0 = CNC output 0.0; e.g. O 0.0 = CNC input 0.0

Symbol name (PG 4/5) The SYMBOL NAMES for word−coupling PLCs (PC 600) must be adopted by the user 1:1 because existing function modules are configured around these symbol names.

For bitcoupled PLCs (PIC 250 / PC 600) other symbol names can be used, but the default symbol names should be used to simplify troubleshooting (service).

For multiple bitcoupling (PC 600) the symbol is given an index at the first character of the symbol name (e.g. CCDRVON1" 1CDRVON1" , 2CDRVON1" 3CDRVON1").

Start address The start address for the CNC interface can be set using the machine parameter of the relevant control unit (in parameter block 6000). This avoids conflicting ad dresses where a number of bitcoupled CNCs are connected to a single PC600 (multiple bitcoupling). Example: First CNC: P6008=0; Start address of CNC digital interface at 0.0 (normal case). Second CNC: P6008=40; Start address of CNC digital interface at 40.0 The CNC input DRIVE ON 1ST AXIS" is now set by the PLC through the PLC output O40.0.

Remarks The REMARKS for the CNCPLC signals correspond to the standard Bosch Assign ment Lists. The user can change these forms to his/her own remarks provided the meaning of the signal remarks remains unchanged.

4−1 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.1 Signals from PLC to CNC

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 0 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O216.0 O0.0 0 CCDRVON1 DRIVE ON 1ST AXIS O216.1 O0.1 1 CCDRVON2 DRIVE ON 2ND AXIS O216.2 O0.2 2 CCDRVON3 DRIVE ON 3RD AXIS O216.3 O0.3 3 CCDRVON4 DRIVE ON 4TH AXIS O216.4 O0.4 4 CCDRVON5 DRIVE ON 5TH AXIS O216.5 O0.5 5 CCDRVON6 DRIVE ON 6TH AXIS O216.6 O0.6 6 CCDRVON7 DRIVE ON 7TH AXIS O216.7 O0.7 7 CCDRVON8 DRIVE ON 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 1 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O217.0 O1.0 8 CCVFRG1 FEED ALLOW 1ST AXIS O217.1 O1.1 9 CCVFRG2 FEED ALLOW 2ND AXIS O217.2 O1.2 10 CCVFRG3 FEED ALLOW 3RD AXIS O217.3 O1.3 11 CCVFRG4 FEED ALLOW 4TH AXIS O217.4 O1.4 12 CCVFRG5 FEED ALLOW 5TH AXIS O217.5 O1.5 13 CCVFRG6 FEED ALLOW 6TH AXIS O217.6 O1.6 14 CCVFRG7 FEED ALLOW 7TH AXIS O217.7 O1.7 15 CCVFRG8 FEED ALLOW 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 2 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O218.0 O2.0 16 CCREFP1 REFERENCE POINT 1ST AXIS O218.1 O2.1 17 CCREFP2 REFERENCE POINT 2ND AXIS O218.2 O2.2 18 CCREFP3 REFERENCE POINT 3RD AXIS O218.3 O2.3 19 CCREFP4 REFERENCE POINT 4TH AXIS O218.4 O2.4 20 CCREFP5 REFERENCE POINT 5TH AXIS O218.5 O2.5 21 CCREFP6 REFERENCE POINT 6TH AXIS O218.6 O2.6 22 CCREFP7 REFERENCE POINT 7TH AXIS O218.7 O2.7 23 CCREFP8 REFERENCE POINT 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 3 –––––––––––––––––––––––– O219.0 O3.0 24 CCREFR1 DIR. OF REF. 1ST AXIS O219.1 O3.1 25 CCREFR2 DIR. OF REF. 2ND AXIS O219.2 O3.2 26 CCREFR3 DIR. OF REF. 3RD AXIS O219.3 O3.3 27 CCREFR4 DIR. OF REF. 4TH AXIS O219.4 O3.4 28 CCREFR5 DIR. OF REF. 5TH AXIS O219.5 O3.5 29 CCREFR6 DIR. OF REF. 6TH AXIS O219.6 O3.6 30 CCREFR7 DIR. OF REF. 7TH AXIS O219.7 O3.7 31 CCREFR8 DIR. OF REF. 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 4 –––––––––––––––––––––––– O220.0 O4.0 32 CCRED1 (NOT) REDUCTION 1ST AXIS O220.1 O4.1 33 CCRED2 (NOT) REDUCTION 2ND AXIS O220.2 O4.2 34 CCRED3 (NOT) REDUCTION 3RD AXIS O220.3 O4.3 35 CCRED4 (NOT) REDUCTION 4TH AXIS O220.4 O4.4 36 CCRED5 (NOT) REDUCTION 5TH AXIS O220.5 O4.5 37 CCRED6 (NOT) REDUCTION 6TH AXIS O220.6 O4.6 38 CCRED7 (NOT) REDUCTION 7TH AXIS O220.7 O4.7 39 CCRED8 (NOT) REDUCTION 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 5 –––––––––––––––––––––––– O221.0 O5.0 40 CCEINFRG TRANSFER ALLOW O221.1 O5.1 41 CCEDITFR EDIT INHIBIT O221.2 O5.2 42 CCSLASHA BLOCK SLASH O221.3 O5.3 43 CCEMSTPQ (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP O221.4 O5.4 44 CCSTART CYCLE START O221.5 O5.5 45 CCHALTQ (NOT) FEED HOLD O221.6 O5.6 46 CCLOCREM LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) O221.7 O5.7 47

4−2 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 6 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O222.0 O6.0 48 CCEINM01 OPTIONAL STOP O222.1 O6.1 49 CCDIREKT DIRECT CALL O222.2 O6.2 50 O222.3 O6.3 51 CCCPLMAS CPL DIALOGUE MACHINE O222.4 O6.4 52 CCBETRKL MODE INHIBIT O222.5 O6.5 53 CCMULSTR MULTISTROBE O222.6 O6.6 54 CCABSINK ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (L/H) O222.7 O6.7 55 CCSIGN SIGN (+/–) (L/H)

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 7 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O223.0 O7.0 56 CCMMOD1 MULTIMODE VALUE 1 O223.1 O7.1 57 CCMMOD2 MULTIMODE VALUE 2 O223.2 O7.2 58 CCMMOD4 MULTIMODE VALUE 4 O223.3 O7.3 59 CCMMOD8 MULTIMODE VALUE 8 O223.4 O7.4 60 CCMMOD16 MULTIMODE VALUE 16 O223.5 O7.5 61 CCMMOD32 MULTIMODE VALUE 32 O223.6 O7.6 62 CCMMOD64 MULTIMODE VALUE 64 O223.7 O7.7 63 CCMMO128 MULTIMODE VALUE 128

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 8 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O224.0 O8.0 64 CCDAT1 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**0/2**0 O224.1 O8.1 65 CCDAT2 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**0/2**1 O224.2 O8.2 66 CCDAT3 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**0/2**2 O224.3 O8.3 67 CCDAT4 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**0/2**3 O224.4 O8.4 68 CCDAT5 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**1/2**4 O224.5 O8.5 69 CCDAT6 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**1/2**5 O224.6 O8.6 70 CCDAT7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**1/2**6 O224.7 O8.7 71 CCDAT8 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**1/2**7

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 9 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O225.0 O9.0 72 CCDAT9 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**2/2**8 O225.1 O9.1 73 CCDAT10 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**2/2**9 O225.2 O9.2 74 CCDAT11 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**2/2**10 O225.3 O9.3 75 CCDAT12 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**2/2**11 O225.4 O9.4 76 CCDAT13 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**3/2**12 O225.5 O9.5 77 CCDAT14 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**3/2**13 O225.6 O9.6 78 CCDAT15 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**3/2**14 O225.7 O9.7 79 CCDAT16 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**3/2**15

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O226.0 O10.0 80 CCDAT17 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**4/2**16 O226.1 O10.1 81 CCDAT18 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**4/2**17 O226.2 O10.2 82 CCDAT19 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**4/2**18 O226.3 O10.3 83 CCDAT20 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**4/2**19 O226.4 O10.4 84 CCDAT21 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**5/2**20 O226.5 O10.5 85 CCDAT22 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**5/2**21 O226.6 O10.6 86 CCDAT23 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**5/2**22 O226.7 O10.7 87 CCDAT24 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**5/2**23

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 11 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O227.0 O11.0 88 CCDAT25 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**6/2**24 O227.1 O11.1 89 CCDAT26 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**6/2**25 O227.2 O11.2 90 CCDAT27 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**6/2**26 O227.3 O11.3 91 CCDAT28 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**6/2**27 O227.4 O11.4 92 CCDAT29 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 1 * 10**7/2**28 O227.5 O11.5 93 CCDAT30 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 2 * 10**7/2**29 O227.6 O11.6 94 CCDAT31 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 4 * 10**7/2**30 O227.7 O11.7 95 CCDAT32 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 8 * 10**7/(+/–)

4−3 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 12 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O228.0 O12.0 96 CCHQUIT AUX.FUNCT. RECEIPT O228.1 O12.1 97 CCBSPR OPTIONAL JUMP ON O228.2 O12.2 98 O228.3 O12.3 99 CCSFTAUS SUPPRESSION OF SOFTWARE LIMITS O228.4 O12.4 100 2ND SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION (M3) / AUTOMATIC O228.5 O12.5 101 2ND SPINDLE COUNTER-CLOCKWISE ROTATION / BLOCK ‘ O228.6 O12.6 102 2ND SPINDLE STOP (M5) ‘ O228.7 O12.7 103 2ND SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 13 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O229.0 O13.0 104 CCJOG1P JOG 1ST AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O229.1 O13.1 105 CCJOG1N JOG 1ST AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O229.2 O13.2 106 CCJOG2P JOG 2ND AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O229.3 O13.3 107 CCJOG2N JOG 2ND AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O229.4 O13.4 108 CCJOG3P JOG 3RD AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O229.5 O13.5 109 CCJOG3N JOG 3RD AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O229.6 O13.6 110 CCJOG4P JOG 4TH AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O229.7 O13.7 111 CCJOG4N JOG 4TH AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 14 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O230.0 O14.0 112 CCJOG5P JOG 5TH AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O230.1 O14.1 113 CCJOG5N JOG 5TH AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O230.2 O14.2 114 CCJOG6P JOG 6TH AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O230.3 O14.3 115 CCJOG6N JOG 6TH AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O230.4 O14.4 116 CCJOG7P JOG 7TH AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O230.5 O14.5 117 CCJOG7N JOG 7TH AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION O230.6 O14.6 118 CCJOG8P JOG 8TH AXIS POSITIVE DIRECTION O230.7 O14.7 119 CCJOG8N JOG 8TH AXIS NEGATIVE DIRECTION ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 15 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O231.0 O15.0 120 CCJRAPID MANUAL FEED RAPID O231.1 O15.1 121 CCJHIGH MANUAL FEED FAST O231.2 O15.2 122 CCJMED MANUAL FEED MEDIUM O231.3 O15.3 123 CCJLOW MANUAL FEED SLOW O231.4 O15.4 124 CCEXVORS EXTERNAL FEED O231.5 O15.5 125 CCINKX INCREMENT STEPS X O231.6 O15.6 126 CCINK100 INCREMENT STEPS 100 O231.7 O15.7 127 CCINK10 INCREMENT STEPS 10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 16 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O232.0 O16.0 128 CCINK1 INCREMENT STEP 1 O232.1 O16.1 129 CCREFANF REFERENCE POINT APPROACH − O232.2 O16.2 130 CCNULSET ZERO SET O232.3 O16.3 131 CCRESTL CANCEL DIST. TO GO O232.4 O16.4 132 CCRESTA CONTROL RESET O232.5 O16.5 133 CCE100% 100% FEED ASYNCHRONOUS AXES O232.6 O16.6 134 CCEINTIP JOG (MM/MIN) O232.7 O16.7 135 CCTIPMMU JOG (MM/U) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 17 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O233.0 O17.0 136 CCVSEXT FEED POT EXTERNAL O233.1 O17.1 137 CCSPEXT SPINDLE POT EXTERNAL O233.2 O17.2 138 CCGETAUT AUTOMATIC GEARRANGE SELECTION (M40) ‘ O233.3 O17.3 139 CCZAEEIN PIECE COUNTER ON O233.4 O17.4 140 CCSPUMK SPINDLE REVERSE O233.5 O17.5 141 CCSPKONS CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED O233.6 O17.6 142 CCSP0VQ (NOT) SPINDLE COMMAND 0 VOLT O233.7 O17.7 143 CCSP100% SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%

−CC 220 M only For CC220T: 2ND 2.SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION; for CC220M: AUTOMATIC ‘CC 220 T only For CC220T: 2ND SPINDLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION; for CC220M: BLOCK

4−4 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 18 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O234.0 O18.0 144 CCGETR1 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 1 O234.1 O18.1 145 CCGETR2 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 2 O234.2 O18.2 146 CCGETR3 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 3 O234.3 O18.3 147 CCGETR4 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 4 ~ O234.4 O18.4 148 CCGETR5 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 5 / 1 (2ND SPINDLE) ~ O234.5 O18.5 149 CCGETR6 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 6 / 2 (2ND SPINDLE) ~ O234.6 O18.6 150 CCGETR7 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 7 / 3 (2ND SPINDLE) ~ O234.7 O18.7 151 CCGETR8 RECEIPT GEARRANGE 8 / 4 (2ND SPINDLE)

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 19 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O235.0 O19.0 152 CCSPRE SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION M03 (MANUAL) O235.1 O19.1 153 CCSPLI SPINDLE COUNTER–CLOCKWISE ROTATION M04 (MANUAL) O235.2 O19.2 154 CCPLCTOP SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL) O235.3 O19.3 155 CCSPRICT SPINDLE ORIENTATION M19 (MANUAL) O235.4 O19.4 156 CCAWGET1 SELECT GEARRANGE 1 (MANUAL) O235.5 O19.5 157 CCAWGET2 SELECT GEARRANGE 2 (MANUAL) O235.6 O19.6 158 CCAWGET3 SELECT GEARRANGE 3 (MANUAL) O235.7 O19.7 159 CCAWGET4 SELECT GEARRANGE 4 (MANUAL)

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 20 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ‘~O236.0 O20.0 160 CCAWGET5 SELECT GEARRANGE 5 (MANUAL) / 1 (2ND SP) ‘~O236.1 O20.1 161 CCAWGET6 SELECT GEARRANGE 6 (MANUAL) / 2 (2ND SP) ‘~O236.2 O20.2 162 CCAWGET7 SELECT GEARRANGE 7 (MANUAL) / 3 (2ND SP) ‘~O236.3 O20.3 163 CCAWGET8 SELECT GEARRANGE 8 (MANUAL) / 4 (2ND SP) O236.4 O20.4 164 CC4KREIS QUADRAN T PROGRAMMING O236.5 O20.5 165 CCRESTRT AUTOMATIC RESTART M2/M30 O236.6 O20.6 166 CCKONTUR RETURN TO CONTOUR − O236.7 O20.7 167 CC84TST SINGLE BLOCK G84 (TEST)

–––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 21 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O237.0 O21.0 168 CCDNCQTG DNC/PLC RECEIPT O237.1 O21.1 169 CCVS100% SET FEED POT TO 100% O237.2 O21.2 170 CCEG100% SET RAPID POT TO 100% ‘ O237.3 O21.3 171 CCZAEDEK COUNTE R DECREMENT ‘ O237.4 O21.4 172 CCSTZUEW TOOL LIFE MONITOR ON ‘ O237.5 O21.5 173 CCMESGEW THREAD GUAGE/REMACHINE ‘ O237.6 O21.6 174 CCTEACHV TEACH IN FEED ‘ O237.7 O21.7 175 CCTEACHS TEACH IN SPINDLE

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 22 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O238.0 O22.0 176 CCHANDR1 HANDWHEEL 1ST AXIS O238.1 O22.1 177 CCHANDR2 HANDWHEEL 2ND AXIS O238.2 O22.2 178 CCHANDR3 HANDWHEEL 3RD AXIS O238.3 O22.3 179 CCHANDR4 HANDWHEEL 4TH AXIS O238.4 O22.4 180 CCHANDR5 HANDWHEEL 5TH AXIS O238.5 O22.5 181 CCHANDR6 HANDWHEEL 6TH AXIS O238.6 O22.6 182 CCHANDR7 HANDWHEEL 7TH AXIS O238.7 O22.7 183 CCHANDR8 HANDWHEEL 8TH AXIS

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 23 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O239.0 O23.0 184 CCMSSP1A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 1ST AXIS O239.1 O23.1 185 CCMSSP2A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 2ND AXIS O239.2 O23.2 186 CCMSSP3A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 3RD AXIS O239.3 O23.3 187 CCMSSP4A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 4TH AXIS O239.4 O23.4 188 CCMSSP5A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 5TH AXIS O239.5 O23.5 189 CCMSSP6A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 6TH AXIS O239.6 O23.6 190 CCMSSP7A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 7TH AXIS O239.7 O23.7 191 CCMSSP8A INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 8TH AXIS

−CC 220 M only ~ Only four speeds are possible with CC 220 T with ‘CC 220 T only 2nd spindle" option.

4−5 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 24 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ‘ O240.0 O24.0 192 2ND SPINDLE:AUTOMATIC GEAR SELECTION ‘ O240.1 O24.1 193 2ND SPINDLE: REVERSE SPINDLE DIRECTION ‘ O240.2 O24.2 194 2ND SPINDLE: CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED ‘ O240.3 O24.3 195 2ND SPINDLE:(NOT) SPINDLE COMMAND 0 VOLT ‘ O240.4 O24.4 196 2ND SPINDLE:SET SPINDLE POT TO 100% ‘ O240.5 O24.5 197 2ND SPINDLE:EXTERNAL SPINDLE POT O240.6 O24.6 198 O240.7 O24.7 199

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 25 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O241.0 O25.0 200 CCDRKOM1 DRIFT COMP. OFF 1ST AXIS O241.1 O25.1 201 CCDRKOM2 DRIFT COMP. OFF 2ND AXIS O241.2 O25.2 202 CCDRKOM3 DRIFT COMP. OFF 3RD AXIS O241.3 O25.3 203 CCDRKOM4 DRIFT COMP. OFF 4TH AXIS O241.4 O25.4 204 CCDRKOM5 DRIFT COMP. OFF 5TH AXIS O241.5 O25.5 205 CCDRKOM6 DRIFT COMP. OFF 6TH AXIS O241.6 O25.6 206 CCDRKOM7 DRIFT COMP. OFF 7TH AXIS O241.7 O25.7 207 CCDRKOM8 DRIFT COMP. OFF 8TH AXIS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 26 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– − O242.0 O26.0 208 \ − O242.1 O26.1 209 I − O242.2 O26.2 210 I − O242.3 O26.3 211 I The meaning of these signals is set − O242.4 O26.4 212 > according to machine parameter P6516 − O242.5 O26.5 213 I − O242.6 O26.6 214 I − O242.7 O26.7 215 / ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 27 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O243.0 O27.0 216 CCUMSCHD SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE O243.1 O27.1 217 CCUMSCHF SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE O243.2 O27.2 218 CCREFCAC REFERENCE POINT APPROACH C–AXIS O243.3 O27.3 219 CCCAAKSP C–AXIS ACTIVE (PLC) O243.4 O27.4 220 − O243.5 O27.5 221 CCFRKOST START MILL. HEAD COMP. O243.6 O27.6 222 FEEDRATE REDUCTION ‘ O243.7 O27.7 223 CCGEWMOS REMACH INE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 28 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O244.0 O28.0 224 O244.1 O28.1 225 O244.2 O28.2 226 O244.3 O28.3 227 O244.4 O28.4 228 O244.5 O28.5 229 O244.6 O28.6 230 O244.7 O28.7 231

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 29 ––––––– for CPL ––––––––––––– O245.0 O29.0 232 O245.1 O29.1 233 O245.2 O29.2 234 O245.3 O29.3 235 O245.4 O29.4 236 O245.5 O29.5 237 O245.6 O29.6 238 O245.7 O29.7 239

− CC 220 M only ‘ CC 220 T only

4−6 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 30 ––––––– for CPL ––––––––––– O246.0 O30.0 240 O246.1 O30.1 241 O246.2 O30.2 242 O246.3 O30.3 243 O246.4 O30.4 244 O246.5 O30.5 245 O246.6 O30.6 246 O246.7 O30.7 247

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PLC–>NC O BYTE 31 ––––––– for CPL ––––––––––– O247.0 O31.0 248 O247.1 O31.1 249 O247.2 O31.2 250 O247.3 O31.3 251 O247.4 O31.4 252 O247.5 O31.5 253 O247.6 O31.6 254 O247.7 O31.7 255

4−7 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.2 Signals from CNC to PLC

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 0 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O176.0 I0.0 0 CCDRIV1P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 1ST AXIS O176.1 I0.1 1 CCDRIV1N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 1ST AXIS O176.2 I0.2 2 CCDRIV2P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 2ND AXIS O176.3 I0.3 3 CCDRIV2N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 2ND AXIS O176.4 I0.4 4 CCDRIV3P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 3RD AXIS O176.5 I0.5 5 CCDRIV3N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 3RD AXIS O176.6 I0.6 6 CCDRIV4P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 4TH AXIS O176.7 I0.7 7 CCDRIV4N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 4TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 1 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O177.0 I1.0 8 CCDRIV5P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 5TH AXIS O177.1 I1.1 9 CCDRIV5N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 5TH AXIS O177.2 I1.2 10 CCDRIV6P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 6TH AXIS O177.3 I1.3 11 CCDRIV6N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 6TH AXIS O177.4 I1.4 12 CCDRIV7P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 7TH AXIS O177.5 I1.5 13 CCDRIV7N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 7TH AXIS O177.6 I1.6 14 CCDRIV8P POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 8TH AXIS O177.7 I1.7 15 CCDRIV8N NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O178.0 I2.0 16 CCINPOS1 1ST AXIS IN POSITION O178.1 I2.1 17 CCINPOS2 2ND AXIS IN POSITION O178.2 I2.2 18 CCINPOS3 3RD AXIS IN POSITION O178.3 I2.3 19 CCINPOS4 4TH AXIS IN POSITION O178.4 I2.4 20 CCINPOS5 5TH AXIS IN POSITION O178.5 I2.5 21 CCINPOS6 6TH AXIS IN POSITION O178.6 I2.6 22 CCINPOS7 7TH AXIS IN POSITION O178.7 I2.7 23 CCINPOS8 8TH AXIS IN POSITION

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 3 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O179.0 I3.0 24 CCMST_1E MST AUX.FUNCT. 1/1 O179.1 I3.1 25 CCMST_2E MST AUX.FUNCT. 2/2 O179.2 I3.2 26 CCMST_4E MST AUX.FUNCT. 4/4 O179.3 I3.3 27 CCMST_8E MST AUX.FUNCT. 8/8 O179.4 I3.4 28 CCMST_1Z MST AUX.FUNCT. 10/16 O179.5 I3.5 29 CCMST_2Z MST AUX.FUNCT. 20/32 O179.6 I3.6 30 CCMST_4Z MST AUX.FUNCT. 40/64 O179.7 I3.7 31 CCMST_8Z MST AUX.FUNCT. 80/128

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 4 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O180.0 I4.0 32 CCMST_1H MST AUX.FUNCT. 100/256 O180.1 I4.1 33 CCMST_2H MST AUX.FUNCT. 200/512 O180.2 I4.2 34 CCMST_4H MST AUX.FUNCT. 400/1024 O180.3 I4.3 35 CCMST_8H MST AUX.FUNCT. 800/2048 O180.4 I4.4 36 CCST_1T ST AUX.FUNCT. 1000/4096 O180.5 I4.5 37 CCST_2T ST AUX.FUNCT. 2000/8192 O180.6 I4.6 38 CCST_4T ST AUX.FUNCT. 4000/16384 O180.7 I4.7 39 CCST_8T ST AUX.FUNCT. 8000/32768

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 5 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O181.0 I5.0 40 CCST_1ZT ST AUX.FUNCT. 1*10**4/2**16 O181.1 I5.1 41 CCST_2ZT ST AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**4/2**17 O181.2 I5.2 42 CCST_4ZT ST AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**4/2**18 O181.3 I5.3 43 CCST_8ZT ST AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**4/2**19 O181.4 I5.4 44 CCST_1HT T AUX.FUNCT. 1*10**5/2**20 O181.5 I5.5 45 CCST_2HT T AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**5/2**21 O181.6 I5.6 46 CCST_4HT T AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**5/2**22 O181.7 I5.7 47 CCST_8HT T AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**5/2**23

4−8 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 6 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O182.0 I6.0 48 CCT_1M T AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**6/2**24 O182.1 I6.1 49 CCT_2M T AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**6/2**25 O182.2 I6.2 50 CCT_4M T AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**6/2**26 O182.3 I6.3 51 CCT_8M T AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**6/2**27 O182.4 I6.4 52 CCT_1ZM T AUX.FUNCT. 1*10**7/2**28 O182.5 I6.5 53 CCT_2ZM T AUX.FUNCT. 2*10**7/2**29 O182.6 I6.6 54 CCT_4ZM T AUX.FUNCT. 4*10**7/2**30 O182.7 I6.7 55 CCT_8ZM T AUX.FUNCT. 8*10**7/(+/–)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 7 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O183.0 I7.0 56 CCMSTR 1.CHANGE SIGNAL (M–STROBE) O183.1 I7.1 57 CCSSTR 2.CHANGE SIGNAL (S–STROBE) O183.2 I7.2 58 CCTSTR 3.CHANGE SIGNAL (T–STROBE) O183.3 I7.3 59 CCHSTR 4.CHANGE SIGNAL (H–STROBE) O183.4 I7.4 60 CCHIFU5 5.CHANGE SIGNAL O183.5 I7.5 61 CCHIFU6 6.CHANGE SIGNAL O183.6 I7.6 62 CCHIFU7 7.CHANGE SIGNAL O183.7 I7.7 63 CCCPLSTR CPL CHANGE SIGNAL

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 8 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O184.0 I8.0 64 CCAUTO AUTOMATIC MODE O184.1 I8.1 65 CCSEMI SINGLE BLOCK MODE O184.2 I8.2 66 CCMDI MANUAL MODE O184.3 I8.3 67 CCMANUEL JOG MODE O184.4 I8.4 68 CCBREFAN TRAVERSE TO REFERENCE POINT MODE O184.5 I8.5 69 CCREFANG REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES O184.6 I8.6 70 CCRAPID RAPID O184.7 I8.7 71 CCPRGACT PROGRAM RUNNING

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 9 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O185.0 I9.0 72 CCTEST DRY RUN TEST O185.1 I9.1 73 CCRESETE CONTROL RESET O185.2 I9.2 74 CCSLASHE BLOCK SLASH O185.3 I9.3 75 CCMULQUI MULTI–RECEIPT O185.4 I9.4 76 CCPRGANW MANUAL PROGRAM SELECTION O185.5 I9.5 77 CCSATZVL GO BLOCK O185.6 I9.6 78 CCF0% FEED 0% O185.7 I9.7 79 CCPRGVHD PROGRAM EXISTS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O186.0 I10.0 80 CCEXPRAN EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECTION O186.1 I10.1 81 CCNCBERT NC READY (AFTER EXT.PRG.SELECT) O186.2 I10.2 82 CCDREZER SPINDLE UP TO SPEED ‘ O186.3 I10.3 83 CCEILG0% RAPID 0% O186.4 I10.4 84 CCMZA1 MZA MODE VALUE 1 O186.5 I10.5 85 CCMZA2 MZA MODE VALUE 2 O186.6 I10.6 86 CCMZA4 MZA MODE VALUE 4 O186.7 I10.7 87 CCCPLDST CPL DIALOGUE STROBE

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 11 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O187.0 I11.0 88 CCM0_M1 PROGRAM STOP AT M0 OR M1 O187.1 I11.1 89 CCM2_M30 PROGRAM END AT M2 OR M30 O187.2 I11.2 90 CCG33 THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G33) O187.3 I11.3 91 CCG63 G63 ACTIVE O187.4 I11.4 92 O187.5 I11.5 93 CCSCHFKT SWITCH FUNCTION MODE O187.6 I11.6 94 CCAM01 OPTIONAL STOP O187.7 I11.7 95 CCHIFUSP INHIBIT AUX.FUNCT.

− CC 220 M only ‘ CC 220 T only

4−9 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 12 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O188.0 I12.0 96 CCEND1 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 1 O188.1 I12.1 97 CCEND2 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 2 O188.2 I12.2 98 CCEND3 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 3 O188.3 I12.3 99 CCEND4 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 4 O188.4 I12.4 100 CCEND5 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 5 O188.5 I12.5 101 CCEND6 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 6 O188.6 I12.6 102 CCEND7 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 7 O188.7 I12.7 103 CCEND8 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 8

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 13 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O189.0 I13.0 104 CCEND9 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 9 O189.1 I13.1 105 CCEND10 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 10 O189.2 I13.2 106 CCEND11 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 11 O189.3 I13.3 107 CCEND12 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 12 O189.4 I13.4 108 CCEND13 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 13 O189.5 I13.5 109 CCEND14 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 14 O189.6 I13.6 110 CCEND15 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 15 O189.7 I13.7 111 CCEND16 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 16

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 14 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O190.0 I14.0 112 CCG95 FEED IN MM/REV. (G95) ‘ O190.1 I14.1 113 CCG96 CUTTING SPEED CONSTANT (G96) O190.2 I14.2 114 CCSPPOS SPINDLE IS ORIENTED ‘ O190.3 I14.3 115 CCWZSTZ TOOL LIFE EXPIRED ‘ O190.4 I14.4 116 CCGESSTZ LIFE OF BASIC AND ALTERNATIVE TOOLS EXPIRED ‘ O190.5 I14.5 117 CCEIL100 RAPID POT 100% SET ‘ O190.6 I14.6 118 CCSPI100 SPINDL E POT 100% SET ‘ O190.7 I14.7 119 CCSTZERR TARGET ACHIEVED

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 15 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O191.0 I15.0 120 CCREFER1 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 1ST AXIS O191.1 I15.1 121 CCREFER2 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 2ND AXIS O191.2 I15.2 122 CCREFER3 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 3RD AXIS O191.3 I15.3 123 CCREFER4 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 4TH AXIS O191.4 I15.4 124 CCREFER5 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 5TH AXIS O191.5 I15.5 125 CCREFER6 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 6TH AXIS O191.6 I15.6 126 CCREFER7 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 7TH AXIS O191.7 I15.7 127 CCREFER8 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 16 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O192.0 I16.0 128 CCPLCTHT SPINDLE STOP O192.1 I16.1 129 CCTRUDER IDLING SPEED REACHED O192.2 I16.2 130 CCSPIND0 SPINDLE POT 0% O192.3 I16.3 131 CCSPIRIT SPINDLE AT REFERENCE POINT O192.4 I16.4 132 CCCAAKNC C–AXIS ACTIVE (CNC) O192.5 I16.5 133 CCG32 THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE O192.6 I16.6 134 − O192.7 I16.7 135 CCUMKRER REVERS E RANGE REACHED

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 17 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– − O193.0 I17.0 136 CCFRKOAK MILL. HEAD COMP. ON O193.1 I17.1 137 CCWANAKT RE–ENTRY ACTIVE ‘ O193.2 I17.2 138 CCPROOPT PROGRA M OPTIMISATION ACTIVE O193.3 I17.3 139 CCLINKAK LINKING ACTIVE − O193.4 I17.4 140 CCSVLOKR STEP MODE WITHOUT CORR. O193.5 I17.5 141 CCOWZKR TEST RUN WITHOUT CORR. O193.6 I17.6 142 O193.7 I17.7 143 CCPRGABW CANCEL PROGRAM

− CC 220 M only ‘ CC 220 T only

4−10 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 18 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O194.0 I18.0 144 CCRFEND1 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 1ST AXIS O194.1 I18.1 145 CCRFEND2 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 2ND AXIS O194.2 I18.2 146 CCRFEND3 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 3RD AXIS O194.3 I18.3 147 CCRFEND4 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 4TH AXIS O194.4 I18.4 148 CCRFEND5 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 5TH AXIS O194.5 I18.5 149 CCRFEND6 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 6TH AXIS O194.6 I18.6 150 CCRFEND7 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 7TH AXIS O194.7 I18.7 151 CCRFEND8 REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSED 8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 19 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O195.0 I19.0 152 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.1 I19.1 153 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.2 I19.2 154 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.3 I19.3 155 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.4 I19.4 156 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.5 I19.5 157 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.6 I19.6 158 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS O195.7 I19.7 159 CCEXPOS1 EXT.POS.REACHED 1ST AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 20 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O196.0 I20.0 160 CCDSTART DNC/NC START O196.1 I20.1 161 CCDHALT DNC/NC FEED HOLD O196.2 I20.2 162 CCDHALTA DNC FEED HOLD OFF O196.3 I20.3 163 O196.4 I20.4 164 O196.5 I20.5 165 O196.6 I20.6 166 CCDRESET DNC CONTROL RESET O196.7 I20.7 167 CCDEIN DNC ON

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 21 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O197.0 I21.0 168 CCDREFAN DNC/REFERENCE POINT TRAVERSE O197.1 I21.1 169 O197.2 I21.2 170 CCDPRANW DNC PROGRAM SELECT O197.3 I21.3 171 CCDRPABR DNC/QUIT TRAVERSE TO REFERENCE POINT O197.4 I21.4 172 O197.5 I21.5 173 CCLSV2OK DNC/LSV2 CONNECTION O.K. O197.6 I21.6 174 O197.7 I21.7 175

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 22 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– ‘ O198.0 I22.0 176 2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE ORIENTED ‘ O198.1 I22.1 177 2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE AT REFERENCE POINT ‘ O198.2 I22.2 178 2ND SPINDLE: SPEED REACHED ‘ O198.3 I22.3 179 2ND SPINDLE: IDLING SPEED REACHED ‘ O198.4 I22.4 180 2.SPINDLE:SPIN DLE STOP ‘ O198.5 I22.5 181 2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE ‘ O198.6 I22.6 182 2.SPINDLE:SPIN DLE POT 0% ‘ O198.7 I22.7 183 2ND SPINDLE:SPINDLE POT 100% SET

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 23 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– − O199.0 I23.0 184 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 1ST AXIS − O199.1 I23.1 185 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 2ND AXIS − O199.2 I23.2 186 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 3RD AXIS − O199.3 I23.3 187 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 4TH AXIS − O199.4 I23.4 188 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 5TH AXIS − O199.5 I23.5 189 ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCH 6TH AXIS − O199.6 I23.6 190 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 7TH AXIS − O199.7 I23.7 191 ASYNCHRONO US SWITCH 8TH AXIS

− CC 220 M only ‘ Only with CC 220 T with 2nd SPINDLE" option

4−11 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 24 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O200.0 I24.0 192 CCD1A DNC/1ST AXIS O200.1 I24.1 193 CCD2A DNC/2ND AXIS O200.2 I24.2 194 CCD3A DNC/3RD AXIS O200.3 I24.3 195 CCD4A DNC/4TH AXIS O200.4 I24.4 196 CCD5A DNC/5TH AXIS O200.5 I24.5 197 CCD6A DNC/6TH AXIS O200.6 I24.6 198 CCD7A DNC/7TH AXIS O200.7 I24.7 199 CCD8A DNC/8TH AXIS

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 25 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– − O201.0 I25.0 200 \ − O201.1 I25.1 201 I − O201.2 I25.2 202 I − O201.3 I25.3 203 I The meaning of these signals is set − O201.4 I25.4 204 > according to machine parameters P6516 − O201.5 I25.5 205 I and P6517 − O201.6 I25.6 206 I − O201.7 I25.7 207 /

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 26 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– − O202.0 I26.0 208 1ST AXIS PAIR COUPLED − O202.1 I26.1 209 2ND AXIS PAIR COUPLED O202.2 I26.2 210 O202.3 I26.3 211 O202.4 I26.4 212 O202.5 I26.5 213 O202.6 I26.6 214 O202.7 I26.7 215

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 27 –––––––––––––––––––––––––– O203.0 I27.0 216 O203.1 I27.1 217 O203.2 I27.2 218 O203.3 I27.3 219 O203.4 I27.4 220 O203.5 I27.5 221 O203.6 I27.6 222 O203.7 I27.7 223

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 28 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––– O204.0 I28.0 224 O204.1 I28.1 225 O204.2 I28.2 226 O204.3 I28.3 227 O204.4 I28.4 228 O204.5 I28.5 229 O204.6 I28.6 230 O204.7 I28.7 231

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 29 ––––– for CPL –––––––––––– O205.0 I29.0 232 O205.1 I29.1 233 O205.2 I29.2 234 O205.3 I29.3 235 O205.4 I29.4 236 O205.5 I29.5 237 O205.6 I29.6 238 O205.7 I29.7 239

4−12 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. decimal Symb.PG4 Remarks

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 30 ––––– for CPL ––––––––––– O206.0 I30.0 240 O206.1 I30.1 241 O206.2 I30.2 242 O206.3 I30.3 243 O206.4 I30.4 244 O206.5 I30.5 245 O206.6 I30.6 246 O206.7 I30.7 247

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––– NC–>PLC I BYTE 31 ––––– for CPL ––––––––––– O207.0 I31.0 248 O207.1 I31.1 249 O207.2 I31.2 250 O207.3 I31.3 251 O207.4 I31.4 252 ‘ O207.5 I31.5 253 CCGEWAKT THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE − O207.6 I31.6 254 CCG86 G86 ACTIVE − O207.7 I31.7 255 CCG84 G84 ACTIVE

− CC 220 M only ‘ CC 220 T only

4−13 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.3 PLC input addresses of the MTB1 I/O inputs

Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O inputs Remarks

O208.0 I32.0 PORT X21, TERMINAL 0 O208.1 I32.1 PORT X21, TERMINAL 1 O208.2 I32.2 PORT X21, TERMINAL 2 O208.3 I32.3 PORT X21, TERMINAL 3 O208.4 I32.4 PORT X21, TERMINAL 4 O208.5 I32.5 PORT X21, TERMINAL 5 O208.6 I32.6 PORT X21, TERMINAL 6 O208.7 I32.7 PORT X21, TERMINAL 7

O209.0 I33.0 PORT X22, TERMINAL 0 O209.1 I33.1 PORT X22, TERMINAL 1 O209.2 I33.2 PORT X22, TERMINAL 2 O209.3 I33.3 PORT X22, TERMINAL 3 O209.4 I33.4 PORT X22, TERMINAL 4 O209.5 I33.5 PORT X22, TERMINAL 5 O209.6 I33.6 PORT X22, TERMINAL 6 O209.7 I33.7 PORT X22, TERMINAL 7

O210.0 I34.0 PORT X23, TERMINAL 0 O210.1 I34.1 PORT X23, TERMINAL 1 O210.2 I34.2 PORT X23, TERMINAL 2 O210.3 I34.3 PORT X23, TERMINAL 3 O210.4 I34.4 PORT X23, TERMINAL 4 O210.5 I34.5 PORT X23, TERMINAL 5 O210.6 I34.6 PORT X23, TERMINAL 6 O210.7 I34.7 PORT X23, TERMINAL 7

O211.0 I35.0 PORT X24, TERMINAL 0 O211.1 I35.1 PORT X24, TERMINAL 1 O211.2 I35.2 PORT X24, TERMINAL 2 O211.3 I35.3 PORT X24, TERMINAL 3 O211.4 I35.4 PORT X24, TERMINAL 4 O211.5 I35.5 PORT X24, TERMINAL 5 O211.6 I35.6 PORT X24, TERMINAL 6 O211.7 I35.7 PORT X24, TERMINAL 7

O212.0 I36.0 PORT X25, TERMINAL 0 O212.1 I36.1 PORT X25, TERMINAL 1 O212.2 I36.2 PORT X25, TERMINAL 2 O212.3 I36.3 PORT X25, TERMINAL 3 O212.4 I36.4 PORT X25, TERMINAL 4 O212.5 I36.5 PORT X25, TERMINAL 5 O212.6 I36.6 PORT X25, TERMINAL 6 O212.7 I36.7 PORT X25, TERMINAL 7

O213.0 I37.0 PORT X26, TERMINAL 0 O213.1 I37.1 PORT X26, TERMINAL 1 O213.2 I37.2 PORT X26, TERMINAL 2 O213.3 I37.3 PORT X26, TERMINAL 3 O213.4 I37.4 PORT X26, TERMINAL 4 O213.5 I37.5 PORT X26, TERMINAL 5 O213.6 I37.6 PORT X26, TERMINAL 6 O213.7 I37.7 PORT X26, TERMINAL 7

Note: All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they can be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.

4−14 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O inputs Remarks

O214.0 I38.0 PORT X27, TERMINAL 0 O214.1 I38.1 PORT X27, TERMINAL 1 O214.2 I38.2 PORT X27, TERMINAL 2 O214.3 I38.3 PORT X27, TERMINAL 3 O214.4 I38.4 PORT X27, TERMINAL 4 O214.5 I38.5 PORT X27, TERMINAL 5 O214.6 I38.6 PORT X27, TERMINAL 6 O214.7 I38.7 PORT X27, TERMINAL 7

O215.0 I39.0 PORT X28, TERMINAL 0 O215.1 I39.1 PORT X28, TERMINAL 1 O215.2 I39.2 PORT X28, TERMINAL 2 O215.3 I39.3 PORT X28, TERMINAL 3 O215.4 I39.4 PORT X28, TERMINAL 4 O215.5 I39.5 PORT X28, TERMINAL 5 O215.6 I39.6 PORT X28, TERMINAL 6 O215.7 I39.7 PORT X28, TERMINAL 7

Note: All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they can be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.

4−15 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.4 PLC output addresses of the MTB1 I/O outputs

Address Address Word coupl.Bit coupl. MTB1 I/O outputs Remarks

O248.0 O32.0 PORT X11, TERMINAL 0 O248.1 O32.1 PORT X11, TERMINAL 1 O248.2 O32.2 PORT X11, TERMINAL 2 O248.3 O32.3 PORT X11, TERMINAL 3 O248.4 O32.4 PORT X11, TERMINAL 4 O248.5 O32.5 PORT X11, TERMINAL 5 O248.6 O32.6 PORT X11, TERMINAL 6 O248.7 O32.7 PORT X11, TERMINAL 7

O249.0 O33.0 PORT X12, TERMINAL 0 O249.1 O33.1 PORT X12, TERMINAL 1 O249.2 O33.2 PORT X12, TERMINAL 2 O249.3 O33.3 PORT X12, TERMINAL 3 O249.4 O33.4 PORT X12, TERMINAL 4 O249.5 O33.5 PORT X12, TERMINAL 5 O249.6 O33.6 PORT X12, TERMINAL 6 O249.7 O33.7 PORT X12, TERMINAL 7

O250.0 O34.0 PORT X13, TERMINAL 0 O250.1 O34.1 PORT X13, TERMINAL 1 O250.2 O34.2 PORT X13, TERMINAL 2 O250.3 O34.3 PORT X13, TERMINAL 3 O250.4 O34.4 PORT X13, TERMINAL 4 O250.5 O34.5 PORT X13, TERMINAL 5 O250.6 O34.6 PORT X13, TERMINAL 6 O250.7 O34.7 PORT X13, TERMINAL 7

O251.0 O35.0 PORT X14, TERMINAL 0 O251.1 O35.1 PORT X14, TERMINAL 1 O251.2 O35.2 PORT X14, TERMINAL 2 O251.3 O35.3 PORT X14, TERMINAL 3 O251.4 O35.4 PORT X14, TERMINAL 4 O251.5 O35.5 PORT X14, TERMINAL 5 O251.6 O35.6 PORT X14, TERMINAL 6 O251.7 O35.7 PORT X14, TERMINAL 7

Note: All signals relayed to the PLC via the MTB1 I/O must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before they can be interpreted as HIGH or LOW signals.

4−16 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.5 Signals to the machine (PIC 250 with I/O 24/0.2)

Address Outputs of PLC PIC 250 module I/O 24/0.2 Remarks

O36.0 PORT X11, PIN 27 O36.1 PORT X11, PIN 50 O36.2 PORT X11, PIN 09 O36.3 PORT X11, PIN 33 O36.4 PORT X11, PIN 26 O36.5 PORT X11, PIN 17 O36.6 PORT X11, PIN 08 O36.7 PORT X11, PIN 49

O37.0 PORT X11, PIN 25 O37.1 PORT X11, PIN 16 O37.2 PORT X11, PIN 07 O37.3 PORT X11, PIN 32 O37.4 PORT X11, PIN 23 O37.5 PORT X11, PIN 15 O37.6 PORT X11, PIN 06 O37.7 PORT X11, PIN 48

O38.0 PORT X11, PIN 22 O38.1 PORT X11, PIN 14 O38.2 PORT X11, PIN 05 O38.3 PORT X11, PIN 31 O38.4 PORT X11, PIN 21 O38.5 PORT X11, PIN 13 O38.6 PORT X11, PIN 04 O38.7 PORT X11, PIN 30

O39.0 PORT X11, PIN 20 O39.1 PORT X11, PIN 12 O39.2 PORT X11, PIN 03 O39.3 PORT X11, PIN 29 O39.4 PORT X11, PIN 36 O39.5 PORT X11, PIN 11 O39.6 PORT X11, PIN 02 O39.7 PORT X11, PIN 28

O40.0 PORT X11, PIN 19 O40.1 PORT X11, PIN 10 O40.2 PORT X11, PIN 01 O40.3 PORT X11, PIN 47 O40.4 PORT X11, PIN 18 O40.5 PORT X11, PIN 34 O40.6 PORT X11, PIN 35 O40.7 PORT X11, PIN 37

If a second I/O card is used, the address range O41.0 to O45.7 is in addition used for a further 40 outputs. If the PCI/OS is used in conjunction with PIC 250 and an external PLC extension device, the addresses O36.0 to O63.7 can be used, subject to the capacity of the PLC I/O.

4−17 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

4.1.6 Signals from the machine (PIC 250 with I/O 24/0.2)

Address Inputs of PLC PIC 250 module I/O 24/0.2 Remarks

I40.0 PORT X22, PIN 48 I40.1 PORT X22, PIN 47 I40.2 PORT X22, PIN 50 I40.3 PORT X22, PIN 49 I40.4 PORT X22, PIN 33 I40.5 PORT X22, PIN 32 I40.6 PORT X22, PIN 17 I40.7 PORT X22, PIN 16

I41.0 PORT X22, PIN 46 I41.1 PORT X22, PIN 15 I41.2 PORT X22, PIN 31 I41.3 PORT X22, PIN 45 I41.4 PORT X22, PIN 30 I41.5 PORT X22, PIN 14 I41.6 PORT X22, PIN 29 I41.7 PORT X22, PIN 44

I42.0 PORT X22, PIN 13 I42.1 PORT X22, PIN 12 I42.2 PORT X22, PIN 28 I42.3 PORT X22, PIN 43 I42.4 PORT X22, PIN 11 I42.5 PORT X22, PIN 27 I42.6 PORT X22, PIN 42 I42.7 PORT X22, PIN 10

I43.0 PORT X22, PIN 26 I43.1 PORT X22, PIN 41 I43.2 PORT X22, PIN 09 I43.3 PORT X22, PIN 25 I43.4 PORT X22, PIN 24 I43.5 PORT X22, PIN 08 I43.6 PORT X22, PIN 40 I43.7 PORT X22, PIN 07

I44.0 PORT X22, PIN 23 I44.1 PORT X22, PIN 39 I44.2 PORT X22, PIN 06 I44.3 PORT X22, PIN 22 I44.4 PORT X22, PIN 38 I44.5 PORT X22, PIN 05 I44.6 PORT X22, PIN 21 I44.7 PORT X22, PIN 04

I45.0 PORT X22, PIN 37 I45.1 PORT X22, PIN 20 I45.2 PORT X22, PIN 03 I45.3 PORT X22, PIN 36 I45.4 PORT X22, PIN 19 I45.5 PORT X22, PIN 02 I45.6 PORT X22, PIN 01 I45.7 PORT X22, PIN 18

4−18 CC220 DigitalInterface Connectionconditions

Address Inputs of PLC PIC 250 module I/O 24/0.2 Remarks

I46.0 PORT X22, PIN 34 I46.1 PORT X22, PIN 35 I46.2 PORT X21, PIN 15 I46.3 PORT X21, PIN 07 I46.4 PORT X21, PIN 14 I46.5 PORT X21, PIN 06 I46.6 PORT X21, PIN 13 I46.7 PORT X21, PIN 05

I47.0 PORT X21, PIN 12 I47.1 PORT X21, PIN 04 I47.2 PORT X21, PIN 11 I47.3 PORT X21, PIN 03 I47.4 PORT X21, PIN 10 I47.5 PORT X21, PIN 02 I47.6 PORT X21, PIN 09 I47.7 PORT X21, PIN 01

If a second I/O card is used, the address range I48.0 to I55.7 is in addition used for a further 64 inputs. If the PCI/OS is used in conjunction with PIC 250 and an external PLC extension device, the addresses I40.0 to I63.7 can be used, subject to the capacity of the PLC I/O.

4−19 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalDescriptions Connectionconditions

4.2 Signal descriptions

Key to abbreviations

APP = Application BA = Mode CPL = Customer Programming Language DNC = Direct Numerical Control GBA = Group mode H/L signal = High/low signal HiFu = Auxiliary function IF = Interface MDI = Manual Data Input MP = Machine parameter MPP = Machine parameter program MTB = Machine Tool Builder NC / CNC = (Computer) numerical control P 7009 = Machine parameter P 7009 REF.PNT. = Reference point RWED = Read, W rite, Execute, Delete PLC = Programmable logic controllers STROBE = Change signal SW = Software SWL = Software limit switch VS = Feedrate VSHALT = Feed hold MTM = Machine tool manufacturer

Notes on signal descriptions A description of the interface signals may be found under the corresponding PIC address (in the Bit coupl." column in the interface tables).

1. The input and output signals and their meanings are described in relation to the PLC or the PIC 250!

2. In the diagrams, as opposed to point 1: I stands for a CNC input and O for a CNC output.

3. Words in upper case characters have only a direct, literal meaning with regard to interface, softkey, programming, etc. They are printed in bold typeface to give them particular emphasis. e.g. TRAVEL COMMAND (Interface) OPTIONAL STOP (Softkey) WAIT (Programming)

4. Words in normal case characters with speech marks are terms intended to be emphasised within the sentence. They may or may not refer to IF signals or soft keys. e.g. Modes interlock" All axes have reached ref. pnt."

4−20 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalDescriptions Connectionconditions

5. Help signals are given in diagrams for greater clarity. These signals are only intended to identify a particular event in the diagrams. They appear in normal case characters.

Program activation (Help signal)

PROGRAM EXISTS (IF signal, softkey or program command)

6. For signal evaluation it should be remembered that certain signals are only available in conjunction with supplied options.

4−21 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

4.2.1 Control inputs (PLC outputs)

O0.0 − O0.7 DRIVE ON 1 input signal per axis

General The DRIVE ON signal is a static axisrelated signal that should only be turned on (e.g. powerup) and off (e.g. emergency stop) at certain times. If DRIVE ON is deactivated during a travel movement, it will be necessary to select CONTROL RESET before restarting.

H signal Closes the position control circuit of the relevant CNC axis and activates lag moni toring.

L signal − Opens the position control circuit of the relevant axis and deactivates lag moni toring. − Interrupts interpolation when the axis is involved in a movement. − Set value output of zero volts as jump function. − Sets the position set value equal to the actual position. − Switches machine on and off. −For emergency stop conditions. −For driving the axis over external set value. − Deactivating or shutting down a CNC axis. − Dismantling of axes.

Notes If there is no DRIVE ON to an axis (DRIVE ON = LOW), it should not be jogged (PLC interlocked!) or programmed. Exception: dry run test. If there is no DRIVE ON to the spindle and it is driven by M3, M4, M13, then inter polation is delayed until DRIVE ON is given. Delay means no set value or travel command output. The PLC must detect an idling condition in order to signal DRIVE ON. As a rule, DRIVE ON should not be turned on by the travel command. When axes are jammed DRIVE ON may not be set to LOW because of the jam. ! Instead the start enable must be cancelled at the drive booster. During GO BLOCK, DRIVE ON must be given for the axes involved.

4−22 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Switchon conditions An axis that is shut down with DRIVE ON = LOW is excluded from the REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES modes interlock. The output signal REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES is cancelled after first startup at a later time. Deci sion criterion for continued sequence in the PLC logic either with the abovemen tioned general signal or with the single signal REFERENCE POINT REACHED.

Diagram: Switchon sequence

MACHINE/CNC ON

CNC INTERNAL TEST SEQUENCE

Contact READY2 (PS 200)

HYDRAULICS (ETC.) ON

DRIVE ON

(NOT) EMERGENCY STOP

4−23 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O1.0 − O1.7 FEED ALLOW 1 input signal per axis

General With the FEED ALLOW signal it is possible to perform a controlled override of one or more axis movements or to deactivate them. If the signal of an axis involved in an interpolation is absent, then that movement is not executed. A movement is intentionally (slope) interrupted. The axes come to a stop without an inposition message with travel commands present. The evaluation of this signal is always active, even with the spindle.

H signal Allows one or more axis movements.

L signal Prevents or interrupts one or more axis movements.

Application Interlock conditions at the machine for an orderly and safe processing sequence.

Notes This signal has the same effect on the spindle(s) as the SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT signal, but the Sword is not set to 0".

4−24 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O2.0 − O2.7 REFERENCE POINT 1 input signal per axis

General

O2.0 to O2.7 only have relevance for incremental encoders. Refer to 016.1 if using a distance coded measuring system". After activating operating mode REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (see signal 016.1), the reference to an axis must be started via the relevant signals 013.0 to O14.7 (JOG MODE). The speed of the reference approach per axis can be set via machine parameters (P502 to P504). The direction in which the axis approaches the reference point can be preset via interface signals O3.0 to O3.7. The control recognises that the reference point cam has been reached via signals O2.0 to O2.7. From this point onwards the marker search logic" is activated in the CNC. At the next zero reference mark pulse of the measuring system in the direc tion of travel, the marker search logic defines the current position as the reference point and stores this position in relation to the limit switch values.

NOTES! − The maximum following travel range is traversed during the first ref. pnt. ap proach: P 1505 to P 1506. The axes must therefore be within the travel range when the machine is switched on. If this is not the case it is possible that an axis will remain at a standstill during the Reference Point Approach, because the limit switches respond. − The ref. pnt. and the ref. pnt. marker are displaced by the ref. pnt. offset. Both the ref. pnt. marker and the ref. pnt. itself are overrun during ref. pnt. approach. For this reason the limit switches must be positioned far enough away. −If the axis is at the reference point cam before the start of the Reference Point Approach (cam pressed, i.e. signal O2.x = HIGH), then the opposite travel direction (in relation to the DIRECTION OF REFERENCE signal) is selected and the standard sequence is reselected with the signal change from O2.x. − During Reference Point Approach, the PLC sets the PLC output signal REFER ENCE POINT APPROACH if it initiated the reference. −If all axes have traversed to the reference point at least once, the signal REFER ENCE POINT APPROACH MODE is set by the CNC to LOW level and the signal REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES to HIGH level.

H signal

Activates the marker search logic. At the next zero reference mark pulse of the measuring system in the direction of travel, the marker search logic defines the cur rent position as the reference point and stores this position in relation to the limit switch values.

L signal

Marker search logic is switched off, i.e. not active.

4−25 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

SOFTWARE

Ref. pnt. reduction Ref. pnt. reduction − Slope reduction + Slope reduction

Software limit Software limit switch − switch +

Emergency stop Emergency ÁÁ

ÁÁ stop ÁÁ

ÁÁRef. pnt. cam Ref. pnt. cam

ÁÁ ÁÁ

neg. ref. pnt. direction pos. ref. pnt. direction ÁÁ

ÁÁ Mech. travel range

ÁÁ ÁÁ

HARDWARE

ÁÁ ÁÁ

Reference Point Approach (sequence)

EMERG.STOPcam Referencepointcam R

1 = repeatreferencepointapproach 1 P502 P503 2 = firstreferencepointapproach R = referencepointmarker 2 P503 P504 D1 P504 D3 D2

IS IS

P502=Referencepointspeed P503=1stReductionreferencepoint P504=2ndReductionreferencepoint D1 =Doublebacklashcompensation(P1509)(accordingtospeed+9901) D2 =ReferencepointOffsetinpos.direction(P1502) D3 =ReferencepointOffsetinneg.direction(P1502) IS =ActualPositionsettingfacility

Remarks: ForrepeatReferencePointApproachthetransitionpointfrom P502toP503iscomputed. D1toD3canbesetto0. Ifnecessary,D1andD2mustbeallowedforwhenpositioning theEMERG.STOPcam.

Notes The switch/cam track/marker arrangement should conform to the above diagram. It is possible to traverse several reference points with one axis using machine para meter P114, IF input signal INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR and the signal DIREC TION OF REFERENCE (input).

4−26 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O3.0 − O3.7 DIRECTION OF REFERENCE. 1 input signal per axis

H signal Causes axis to traverse to reference point in negative direction.

L signal Causes axis to traverse to reference point in positive direction.

Notes During the reference point traverse the direction of travel does not change when the signal changes. The DIRECTION OF REFERENCE signal is axisrelated and can be set statically to HIGH or LOW if the reference point is to be approached always from the same direction. If the direction input is dependent on the axis position and signalled to the CNC, this can be performed with the relevant cam track using a camoperated switch, for example.

If using a distance coded measuring system, the cam track must be at least twice as long as the distance between two cyclic markers (see also O16.1).

Example: Cam is pressed: Reference Point Approached in neg. direction. Cam is not pressed: reference point approached in pos. direction.

+Direction −Direction

RR CamTrack

Travelrange R = Referencepoint

4−27 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O4.0 − O4.7 (NOT) REDUCTION 1 input signal per axis

General O4.0 to O4.7 only have relevance for incremental encoders. Refer to 016.1 if using a distance coded measuring system". This signal does not need to be evaluated or activated in most cases because it is only relevant to the first ref. pnt. approach after switching on or after a ref. pnt. has been cleared. The signal is evaluated statically and is axisrelated; the speed change is con trolled.

H signal Reference point is approached the first time at full speed (definable in MP 502).

L signal Reference point is approached the first time at reduced speed (definable in MP 503).

Application Dynamic evaluation of the signal (from High to Low) is not feasible unless an ap preciable amount of time can be saved on first Reference Point Approach due to long traversing distances. Since this will be the exception rather than the rule, this additional switch evaluation process should be disregarded (added cost).

Note During the second and subsequent Reference Point Approaches, the reference point is approached at full speed (MP 502) and a reduction is calculated and in itiated automatically by the NC. The reference point can be cleared with the INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR" sig nal. After this the reference point reduction is not active until the first approach, if Low level is present at the (NOT) REDUCTION input.

Particular feature of rotary axes With repeated ref. pnt. approaches the speed is reduced and the reference point is approached within one revolution. This also applies when a number of axis rota tions have already taken place.

4−28 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.0 TRANSFER ALLOW 1 input signal

General This signal is static in operating modes Automatic, Single Block/Single Step (NC mode), Manual Data Input (MDI mode) and Switch Function (machine mode).

H signal Allows the next or the same block to be executed (depending on transfer stop; MP: P 2002).

L signal Inhibits the execution of the next block or the active block (depending on transfer stop; MP: P 2002).

Application Used for dedicated control of the program sequence at the machine. Initiated by freely programmable conditions in the PLC or alternatively by auxiliary functions programmed in the part program (e.g. M6: tool change, pallet change, etc.), TRANSFER ALLOW can also be temporarily suppressed.

Note With exclusively auxiliary functions the execution of the next block can only be in hibited when TRANSFER ALLOW is suppressed during the change signal dur ation (strobe).

Diagram see diagram under I3.0 to I7.7 MULTIPLE OUTPUT.

4−29 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.1 EDIT INHIBIT 1 input signal

General This signal acts statically on part programs and tables of various types. Also on MP file L444 and lead screw error compensation files L101−L108. Exception: W tables, e.g. for tool and workpiece handling.

H signal Changing programs and tables is not possible.

L signal Changing programs is possible with the RWED protection standard.

Application A keyswitch prevents the changing of programs and tables by unauthorised per sonnel.

Note The keyswitch is not part of the control system and should be provided by the MTM at the toolsetting panel.

4−30 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.2 BLOCK SLASH 1 input signal

General This signal acts statically on those blocks in the part program identified with a slash /".

H signal Effect is active, i.e. blocks with slash identification are masked as long as the blocks are not in the editing memory. If blocks within the editing memory should be masked, this must be done with the program using WAIT (see CPL description).

L signal The blocks identified by a slash /" are executed normally.

Application One of a number of alternatives for flexible part program configuration. In the simplest instance this input signal is combined with the NC output signal of the same name − BLOCK SLASH (I9.2). Additional interlock conditions derived from the PLC can also be included.

4−31 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.3 (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP 1 input signal

General This is a statically transmitted Not signal which is nonlatching in the CNC and acts on all axes and spindles. It is always an H signal in normal modes. This signal has the effect of Drive Off.

H signal Regular CNC mode.

L signal − Interrupts an ongoing movement and/or interpolation or inhibits it. − Sets all set value outputs to 0 volts by jump function. − The message EMERGENCY STOP ACTIVE" is displayed in the main menu of group mode diagnostics under faults.

Application EMERGENCY STOP is detected when a hazard situation arises at the machine. This can be caused automatically by the PLC or manually. The EMERGENCY ! STOP condition is latched in the PLC and transmitted continuously to the CNC by a Low signal for as long as the EMERGENCY STOP situation lasts. Before the signal is transmitted again (emergency stop condition cleared), CON TROL RESET must be signalled to achieve a starting condition in the CNC.

Special feature If EMERGENCY STOP is initiated while a spindle is running (M3, M4), the spindle logic will call for control reset" from the PLC before reacceleration. Control reset can be induced manually or with an IF signal (O16.4). In either case an output signal (I9.1) is sent to the PLC as an acknowledgement.

Notes The machine must be shut down immediately in the event of a malfunction or ! the failure of control elements. Refer to section Other signals, Ready 2". Ensure that the machine shutdown cannot be inhibited in any other way!

4−32 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.4 NC START 1 input signal

General This signal is not static and is defined in the form of a pulse (duration: min. approx. 150 ms). Active in modes Automatic, Single block/Single step, MDI and under Switch functions".

L / H slope Starts a program or axis movement or executes a block, as long as the input signal (NOT) FEED HOLD has High level.

Application The NC START" key is located in the setup panel of the machine and falls within the remit of the MTM. From this button, the signal is looped to the PLC and returned to the CNC depend ing on a number of interlock conditions. In principle, NC START should not be possible unless NC READY has High level.

Notes −A flipflop function must be provided in the PLC in conjunction with (NOT) FEED HOLD, because (NOT) FEED HOLD is not selflatching in the CNC.

−In operating modes NC (execute) and MDI, NC START should only be sig nalled by the PLC to the CNC when the CNC output signal REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES (I8.5) is set. If the output of auxiliary functions in Switch functions" mode (softkey) is required without the reference point being traversed, then the signal NC START can be enabled with the simulta neous active signal SWITCH FUNCTIONS MODE.

−If a program is selected before the machine is switched on (all signals DRIVE ! ON at LOW), the power may be switched on only when the program selected is cancelled. The signals NC READY and PROGRAM RUNNING in the Machine on" branch must be linked with AN". The message Cancel program" should be displayed via the machine status display (MSD).

4−33 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.5 (NOT) FEED HOLD 1 input signal

General This signal is static, nonlatching and is a Not signal. It does not affect auxiliary functions or asynchronous movements and only affects synchronous axis movements. Auxiliary axes are held with FEED ALLOW.

H signal Precondition for normal CNC mode, e.g. program sequence after NCSTART or jog mode.

L signal Controlled interrupt or inhibition of axis movements. No effect on spindle speed. Acts on the output signal PROGRAM RUNNING (Low signal).

Application Inclusion of machinedependent safetycritical machine functions or prevention of Feed hold" during active thread cutting (G 33) and thread tapping (G 84).

Note NC START and FEED HOLD must be configured as flipflop functions in the PLC because NC START must be able to clear the FEED HOLD conditions.

4−34 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O5.6 LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) 1 input signal

General A static signal only relevant in conjunction with DNC operation.

H signal Signifies that certain operations can no longer be performed by the host computer (DNC LOCAL mode).

L signal No restrictions on the host computer (DNC REMOTE mode).

Application The setting is usually performed by means of an external switch on the machine panel. The DNC mode can be changed at any time by setting or resetting the input signal (I5.6). The operator is not restricted in any way in terms of operating at the control in either mode.

In LOCAL mode the HOST only has a limited range of DNC functions at its disposal. It is intended for manual operations at the machine. DNC functions which inhibit manual operation or which might endanger the operator (Reference Point Ap proach, start program) are interlocked in the CNC. This only applies to com mands sent directly from the HOST to the CNC. Operations by the PLC are not inhibited by LOCAL mode. If transparent communication between HOST and ! PLC is possible then suitable interlocking in the PLC program must ensure that disturbing or hazardous functions cannot be initiated in this way.

The following DNC functions cannot be initiated by the HOST in LOCAL mode: − File transfers − Read in to existing W tables − Delete files − Reset alarms − Start programs − Select program / table − Reference Point Approaches − Initiate CONTROL RESET − Link in background − Direct execution via DNC interface

The REMOTE mode is provided for automatic production control. The HOST com puter can apply the full range of DNC functions.The user must ensure that their ! automatic production control is not disrupted by operator intervention at the CNC.

4−35 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O6.0 OPTIONAL STOP 1 input signal

General This signal acts statically on M1 blocks in the part program.

H signal The signal is active on the next M1 block if the block is not yet active in the edit mem ory. The program is interrupted as with M0. If an M1 block in the edit memory is to be effectively captured, this must be done with the program using WAIT (see CPL description).

L signal No effect.

Application One of a number of alternatives for flexible part program configuration and/or fulfil ling and calling control functions at the machine. In the simplest case this input signal must be combined with the CNC output signal of the same name − OPTIONAL STOP. Additional interlock conditions on the part of the PLC are possible.

4−36 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O6.1 DIRECT CALL 1 input signal

General If the control is located in the uppermost plane of MDI mode, a program defined in machine parameter P4016 can be activated using the DIRECT CALL softkey or the interface signal 6.1. NC START starts the program. NC and/or CPL commands are permissible in this program. M30specific oper ations are not performed, i.e. the command M30 acts as if the program defined in P4016 were a subprogram. The softkey DIRECT CALL does not appear if the value 0 is entered in P4016. In this case the interface signal will also be inactive.

L / H slope The program defined in P4016 is activated with rising slope.

Diagram

DIRECT CALL (O6.1)

MDI MODE (I8.2)

NC READY (I10.1)

NC START (O5.4)

PROGRAM RUNNING (I8.7)

O6.3 CPL DIALOGUE MACHINE 1 input signal

General If the control is located in the uppermost level of MACHINE mode, a program de fined in machine parameter P4011 under [MAC] can be started using the CPL DIA LOGUE softkey or the interface signal 6.3, if the CPL expansion option (CPL dia logue and graphics) is applied at the control. The uppermost level of machine mode can be selected with the IF signal Machine mode".

L / H slope The CPL program defined in P4011 under [MAC] is activated with rising slope at 6.3.

4−37 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O6.4 MODE INHIBIT 1 input signal

General The MODE INHIBIT signal is used to determine whether the operator can select all modes at the CNC (machine, execute, diagnostics, correction, etc.), or only move within a single mode.

L/H slope or H/L slope There is a change in the uppermost level (entry level) of the currently active mode.

H signal Only the functions of the currently active mode can be used. A change to other modes is not possible (GOM keys are disabled).

L signal Changing to all other modes is permitted.

Note A particular mode can be selected automatically after turning on the control in con junction with machine parameter P 9916 (GOM powerup state) and then fixed for the operator with MODE INHIBIT.

O6.5 MULTI STROBE 1 input signal

General This signal allows the PLC to perform a selective transfer of various data to the mul tiple input of the CNC (O8.0 − O11.7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE). The PLC cannot ! edit the data while MULTI STROBE has High level!

L / H slope Instructs the CNC to accept the data.

H / L slope Transfer time terminated by PLC.

Diagram

DATA

MULTI STROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

4−38 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O6.6 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (L/H) 1 INPUT SIGNAL

General Incremental or absolute positional set values can be defined for synchonous or asynchronous axes using the multiple data input (DATA LINE MULTIMODE) (see signals O7.0 − O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE). The PLC cannot edit this signal while ! MULTI STROBE has High level.

H signal Data at the multiple data input are interpreted incrementally by the CNC.

L signal Data at the multiple data entry are interpreted absolutely by the CNC.

Application Axis control from the PLC; transfer of values which can be evaluated by the CPL for a variety of purposes, e.g. correction value, zero offsets, etc.

Note Not required for external program selection and MSD data (machine status dis play).

4−39 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O6.7 SIGN (+/−) (L/H) 1 input signal

General This signal can also be seen in context with the multiple data input (DATA LINE MULTIMODE) of the CNC. It allows the transfer of signed data in BCD format (see also signals O7.0 − O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE). The PLC cannot edit this signal while MULTI STROBE has High level. ! H signal Data at the multiple data input are interpreted as negative values by the CNC.

L signal Data at the multiple data input are interpreted as positive values by the CNC.

Application As for ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL signal.

− Driving of axes −CPL data

Note Sign decoding is not required for external program selection and MSD data.

4−40 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O7.0 − O7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE 1−128 8 input signals

General This 8bit MULTIMODE channel must be seen in context with the multidata input. The data lines (CNC inputs 8.0−11.7: DATA LINE MULTIMODE) are interpreted dif ferently by the NC depending on which 8bit word is present here. While the MULTI ! STROBE (O6.5) signal has HIGHlevel, the PLC may not alter MULTIMODE data!

Applications − Machine errors and status display (MSD) − Transfer of axis set values from PLC to CNC − External program selection − Data exchange between PLC and a CPL task. − Changing the feed, spindle, rapid override values by the PLC (in exceptional cases only, when the potentiometers have been connected at the PLC and not at the CNC). − Switching drilling axes

Machine errors and status display (MSD) The machine error and status display (MSD) function enables the machinetool manufacturer to display plaintext messages regarding operating status and ma chine errors at the CNC panel. The CNC provides screen pages which can each display 32 MSD texts. The sum of all machine errors or status texts can be displayed in the DIAGNOSTIC mode by means of the MSD softkey. A machine error flashes in reverse video, while a true machine state is shown in continuous reverse video. In all other CNC modes, only one MSD text can be displayed in the top line of the panel (machine errors only, machine status is not displayed here). Where several errors/statuses exist simultaneously, only the machine error with the highest prior ity is shown. Priorities are defined by corresponding text numbers in the MSD file. The MSD text with the lowest text number has the highest priority.

Preconditions for machine error and status display:

− the PLC signals to the CNC the machine errors and status via the digital inter face (each time an error/status changes) − the corresponding plaintext messages (max. 224, up to 2048 with CNCPLC word coupling) are filed in an ASCII file (with DFS header) with the identifier P in the RAM, EPROM or EEPROM (e.g. P999999999). The file number used must be defined in machine parameter P9915, where up to 21 file numbers can be specified (for different languages). One of these MSD language files can then be activated as required. The following format must be applied for an MSD text in this file: (E,) for machine errors (Z,) for machine status (B,) for mode message (LSV2DNC only).

4−41 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Assignment of text numbers to screen pages: 1 to 32: Page 1, status text 1−32 33 to 64: Page 2, status text 1−32 65 to 96: Page 3, status text 1−32 97 to 128: Page 4, status text 1−32 129 to 160: Page 5, status text 1−32 161 to 192: Page 6, status text 1−32 193 to 224: Page 7, status text 1−32 Example: The second status text on the third screen page is assigned the text number 66.

The transfer of machine errors and statuses from the PLC to the CNC is performed by selecting − the required MSD page using the CNC inputs MULTIMODE VALUE (7.0 to 7.7): The PLC selects the correct MSD page with the codes shown below. The sig nals at the CNC inputs (8.0−11.7) are then interpreted as MSD statuses of the selected MSD page. CNC input 8.0 is assigned to the first status text of the selected page, and input 11.7 to the 32nd status text.

Value O7.7 O7.0 decimal: Page 1: LLLLLLLH 1 Page 2: LLLLLLHL 2 Page 3: LLLLLLHH 3 Page 4: LLLLLHLL 4 Page 5: LLLLLHLH 5 Page 6: LLLLLHHL 6 Page 7: LLLLLHHH 7

− the required MSD statuses of that page using the DATA LINE MULTIMODE multiple data input of the CNC (8.0−11.7). If an MSD condition is true, the PLC must transmit a High signal on the data line concerned.

4−42 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

CRT CNC Interface Page 1

Text selection 8.0 1 17 . DATA LINE MULTIMODE: . . . static signals for the duration of . . (within a page) . the transfer 16 32 . . . . Page 2 . . . 1 17 ...... 16 32 11.7

. 7.0 MULTIMODE VALUE: . . static signals for the duration of . Page selection . the transfer . Page 7 . . 7.7 1 17 . . . . DATA transfer: 16 32 MULTI STROBE (6.5)

MULTIRECEIPT (9.3)

Transfer of MSD data from the PLC to the CNC

Transfer of axis positional and feed set values from PLC to CNC Certain applications with synchronous and/or asynchronous axes require an exter nal set value input for positioning or feed. Whether or not external set value inputs are permitted for positioning values of an axis can be defined with machine para meter P112 (only relevant for asynchronous axes). Whether or not external set value inputs are permitted for feed values of an axis can be defined with interface signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED. The external set value input can be defined either BCD or binary coded, depending on the definition in machine parameter P113, in the unit increments" (for positional inputs), or mm/min or degrees/min (for feed inputs). For BCDcoded positional data, the sign can be specified by the PLC via CNC input 6.7. It is also possible to define the positional set value as a location number (e.g. tool locations D1 − D48). Please refer to the manual Machine parameters", parameter P110. Using the CNC input 6.6, the PLC can stipulate whether the CNC interprets the de fined positioning value incrementally or absolutely.

The speeds to be run can be selected by the PLC in two ways: −by the interface signals MANUAL FEED RAPID, FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW (see O15.0 to O15.3), to which fixed values are assigned for each axis in machine parameters P505−P508, or −by external speed input via the multiinterface, if the CNC input signal 15.4 has High level (see interface signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED).

Programming the relevant axis from the part program is possible even with an ex ternal set value input of the axis position or the axis feed, provided this information is output to the PLC as an auxiliary function via the CNC multiple output (see CNC outputs 3.0 to 7.7). This output information can then be evaluated, processed and

4−43 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

modified by the PLC and returned to the control. When External set value input" for position and speed is defined in machine para meter P112 or by interface signal O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED, the multiple input and the interface signals relevant to this axis are released or activated.

The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals define the axis for which a positioning set value is selected:

Value O7.7 O7.0. decimal: 1st axis : LLLLHLLL 8 2nd axis : LLLLHLLH 9 3rd axis : LLLLHLHL 10 4th axis : LLLLHLHH 11 5th axis : LLLLHHLL 12 6th axis : LLLLHHLH 13 7th axis : L L L L HHHL 14 8th axis : L L L L HHHH 15

The data at the CNC inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are then interpreted as positioning values (in increments). The following applies independently of the active measuring system (metric/inch): 1mm =10 (P103) Increments for linear axes, and 1 degree =10 (P103) Increments for rotary axes.

The end position is defined as the actual machine position (if O6.6 ABSOLUTE/IN CREMENTAL = Low), so NC internal reference point offsets do not have to be con sidered. When grid programming (see machine parameter P108), the position is pro grammed directly without decimal places!

If the PLC has set all necessary signals it instructs the CNC to accept the data by setting the MULTI STROBE signal (6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data and the axes are traversed. The signals to the MULTIRECEIPT I0.0 to I1.7 (POS/NEG TRAVERSE COMMAND xth AXIS) are output delayed. The PLC can query whether the given end position of an axis has been reached via the CNC interface outputs I19.0 to I19.7 (EXT. POS. REACHED 1ST to 8TH AXIS). As soon as synchronous or asynchronous axes are started via the multiinterface, the corresponding CNC interface outputs I19.x are set to Low level. This also applies when the axis does not traverse at all due to an error! After reaching the end position, the CNC firstly generates the axisspecific signal AXIS IN POSITION (I2.x) and then sets I19.x to High level. This output remains set until the corresponding axis is restarted via an external set value input, or control reset is entered. a new set value can be entered for externally programmed axes which cannot reach their predetermined values. For this the FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7) of the axis in question is removed and the new set value is transmitted via the multiinterface. The remaining distance to go is then automatically deleted. If an axis is stopped via FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7), the signal E19.x of the axis in question remains at Low level! If a new set value is stipulated, the signal will not change until the new position has reached High. When setting the signal MULTI STROBE (6.5), the following preconditions must be fulfilled for the axes to be traversed: −An undefined multimodecode leads to the warning OPTION INACTIVE". Interface outputs E19.x are in this case not described.

4−44 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

−If necessary, the reference point for the axis to be traversed must have been approached (except in test operation). Otherwise the warning NO REF. POINTS" will appear. −NC status NC WAITING" (not applicable for externally programmable, asynchronous axes). If not, the warning PROGRAM IS ACTIVE" will appear. − High level at at least one of the inputs O15.0 to O15.4 (feedrate selection). Otherwise the feedrate=0 and the axis comes to a standstill without warn ing. If High level exists at input 15.4 (external feed), the selected axis must be allocated a feedrate value via the multiinterface. − Where software limit switches have been supressed the predetermined set value must not lie past the limit switch; otherwise the warning LIMIT SWITCH x.AXIS" is issued and the axis will not be traversed. −An axis already in motion cannot be restarted (except by removing FEED ALLOW; see above). Otherwise the warning AXIS MOVING" appears.

The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals define the axis for which a feedrate set value is selected: The data at CNC inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are then interp treted as feedrate values (in 0.1 mm/min or in 0.1degrees/min): Value O7.7 O7.0. decimal: 1st axis : L L L HHHL L 28 2nd axis : L L L HHHL H 29 3rd axis : L L L HHHHL 30 4th axis : L L L HHHHH 31 5th axis : LLHLLLLL 32 6th axis : LLHLLLLH 33 7th axis : LLHLLLHL 34 8th axis : LLHLLLHH 35

Changes in speed are possible by overwriting the current value or switching over to manual feed. The transferal of a new feedrate set value is also permitted during the traversing movement of the axis in question, but only becomes active with axes that were not started via jog mode or Reference Point Approach, or during traversing movement. The entry 0" is allowed as feedrate and means no movement". The rapid traverse value (of an axis) defined in P501 cannot be exceeded here by a preset value which is too large. If the PLC has set all necessary signals it instructs the CNC to accept the data by setting the MULTI STROBE signal (6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data.

4−45 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

External program selection If the PLC wishes to select a program in the CNC, it must first check whether that program exists in the CNC (Program search" function). This is also possible while a program is running. If the program is available, the CNC issues the PROGRAM EXISTS signal (9.7) at the same time as the CNC MULTIRECEIPT signal (9.3).

Once this is done the PLC can then activate the program (Program activate" func tion). This is on the precondition that the reference points are approached and FEED HOLD is present. If the program is available in the CNC and is executable (RWED protection), the CNC outputs the EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECTION sig nal, which must be present for at least the duration of a CPL strobe (see machine parameter P 4012) or during a linkage run if this is required. The NC signal is then issued and an NC start can be activated. "Program activate" deselects an already active program.

The following codes for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals specify whether the Pro gram search" or Program selection" has been initiated. The data at the CNC in puts 8.0 to 11.7 are then interpreted as program numbers.

Value O7.7 O7.0 decimal: Program search: LLLHLLLL 16 Program activate: LLLHLLLH 17

If the PLC has set all necessary signals (MULTIMODE VALUE, DATA LINE MULTI MODE), it instructs the CNC to accept the data by setting the MULTI STROBE signal (6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data.

Diagram: Program activate:

DATA AT MULTIPLE INPUT (BINARY/BCD)

Program activate (8 coded inputs)

MULTI STROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

EXT. PROGRAM SELECT (O) (* see below)

NC READY (O)

NC START (O)

PROGRAM RUNNING

Signal must be present for at least as long as the MULTISTROBE signal is present following MULTIRECEIPT (L/H slope).

4−46 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Diagram: Program search

DATA AT MULTIPLE INPUT (BINARY/BCD)

Program search (8 encoded inputs)

MULTI STROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

PROGRAM EXISTS (O)

Note: Error messages can be initiated by the program selection e.g. − Programming error in the part program − Table or subroutine not available − Memory overflow − Program in control (when FEED HOLD is missing)

Data acceptance by CPL The following code for the MULTIMODE VALUE signals stipulates that data at CNC inputs 8.0 to 11.7 are to be interpreted as CPL data. The PLC can stipulate which CPL Task (CPL in dialogue" and/or CPL under execution") should receive the value.

Value Transferal to: O7.7 O7.0 decimal: CPL in dialogue" and CPL under execution": LLLHLLHL 18 Only to CPL under execution": LLHLLHLL 36 Only to CPL in dialogue": LLHLLHLH 37

The PLC can transmit the data either BCD or binaryencoded as defined in ma chine parameter P113 (for BCDencoded data the sign can be defined by the PLC at CNC input 6.7). If the value exists in BCD format, then a BCD/binary conversion into integer format must be performed before it is used in CPL as a numerical value (e.g. filing the value into a variable). If the PLC has set all necessary signals (MULTIMODE VALUE, DATA LINE MULTI MODE), it instructs the CNC to accept the data by setting the MULTI STROBE signal (6.5). The CNC MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) then tells the PLC that the CNC has accepted the data. The CPL data are initially bufferstored by the CNC. These data can be accessed in the appropriate CPL program by using the MIC" command (see CPL program ming manual).

NOTE For the transferal of CPL data to the PLC see I3.0 to I7.7 and I10.7.

4−47 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Drilling axis changeover Apart from making it possible to define the drilling axis via machine parameter P6507 and to change over to other axes using G function 78, this mutlimode func tion facilitates the changeover of the drilling axis through the PLC interface with selected and deselected part programs as well. For this the following multimode value is necessary:

Value O7.7 O7.0 decimal: Change over drilling axis: HHHHHHHH −1

Precondition for the changeover is the signals O5.0 TRANSFER ALLOW and O5.5 (NOT) FEEDRATE HOLD being at LOW level. Which axis is changed over to is determined by using interface signals O8.0 to O11.7 (see description O8.0 to O11.7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE in this manual), as the appropriate axis number (1−8) must be present there in binary or BCD format (e.g. binary: 1st axis = O8.0 at HIGH, 2nd axis = O8.1 at HIGH, 3rd axis = O8.0 and O8.1 at HIGH etc.). The entry of 0" means: no changeover via interface. You give the compensation direction via the signal O6.7 SPECIAL CHARACTERS +/−. The active drilling axis and the compensation direction are displayed in group mode COMPENSATION softkey PROGRAM PARAMETER. Diagram

TRANSFER ALLOW

(NOT) FEED HOLD

Data at multimode input 7.0−7.7 Data at 8.0−11.7 DATA LINE MUL TIMODE and 6.7 SPECIAL CHARACTER +/− MULTI STROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

NOTE! −For changeover of the drilling axis the programming has top priority via G78. If G79 is active (no programmed changeover), the last drilling axis selected via the interface prevails. If no drilling axis was selected via interface, the set ting in machine parameter 6507 prevails. −As the value 0" could also be preset via interface, the control interprets this value (axis number) as if no selection had been carried out via the interface. In this case the machine parameter setting or the programming (G78/79) is ef fective. − After switching on the CNC, the drilling axis which is defined 6507 is the active one. After control reset the last interface setting made becomes ineffective. If this last value was 0", P 6507 becomes relevant again. −If drilling axis changeover takes place during an active program, no pre pared blocks may exist at this time (−> CPL command WAIT).

4−48 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Changing the Feed, Spindle, Rapid Override Values by the PLC Potentiometers for axis and spindle speeds are usually directly connected at the panel or MTB I/O. The CNC the evaluates the data and mofifies the active override values (feed, rapid, spindle) accordingly.

In exceptional cases it is possible to modify the override values via the CNC inter face (only possible for potentiometerswhich are parameteredwith YES" under parameter IF" in machine parameters P 2503 and P 2506).

To achieve this, potentiometers or other suitable controls (digital or analog) must be connected up to the PLC for adjusting the override values (e.g. switches). The PLC then interrogates their data or settings, decodes them and transmits them in digital form to the CNC via the DATA LINE MULTIMODE CNC inputs. The following codes for the CNC MULTIMODE VALUE inputs (7.0 to 7.7)define the potentiometer (1−8) to which these data are assigned.

Value O7.7 O7.0 decimal: Pot.1 (abs) : LLLHLLHH 19 Pot.2 (abs) : L L L HL HL L 20 Pot.3 (abs) : L L L HL HL H 21 Pot.4 (abs) : L L L HL HHL 22 Pot.5 (inc) : L L L HL HHH 23 Pot.6 (inc) : LLLHHLLL 24 Pot.7 (inc) : LLLHHLLH 25 Pot.8 (inc) : L L L HHL HL 26

Depending on the assigned potentiometer numbers the transferred data for feed/ rapid and spindle speed are computed absolutely or incrementally in the CNC (see Machine parameters" manual, Parameter group 2500). Potentiometer data are transferred via the DATA LINE MULTIMODE CNC inputs. Machine parameter P 113 determines how the CNC interprets the transferred data (binary or BCD encoded).113. Absolute potentiometer data can only be transferred within the numerical range 0 to 255, and incremental data in the numerical range −128 to +127. For BCDencoded data the sign can be defined by the PLC through CNC input 6.7, while with binaryencoded data a negative number in two’s complement must be transferred.

4−49 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O8.0 − O11.7 DATA LINE MULTIMODE 32 input signals

Data can be transferred from the PLC to the CNC down this 32bit wide data chan nel. The purpose the data is intended for is defined by the CNC input signal MULTI MODE VALUE (7.0 to 7.7). The way in which the data are interpreted by the CNC (binary/BCD) is determined by machine parameter P 113 (exception: MSD data are always decimal decoded). The value ranges of the transferred data vary according to the setting: 20 − 230, +/− Binary (negative values as two’s complement) 1 − 8 x 107 BCD (sign across CNC input 6.7) 1 − 32 Decimal (always only 1bit or input signal of max. 32)

After it accepts the data − triggered by the MULTISTROBE CNC input (6.5)− the CNC gives the MULTIRECEIPT output signal (9.3) to the PLC in acknowledgment. The latter can then transmit more data to the CNC. The DATA LINE MULTIMODE signals must remain static and present throughout ! the transfer procedure.

Diagram

DATA AT MULTIPLE INPUT (32 BIT)

MULTIMODE VALUE (8bitencoded inputs)

MULTI STROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

* SIGNS (+/−) (E)

*ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (I)

* depends on data type

4−50 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O12.0 AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT 1 input signal

General This signal must be seen in conjunction with the ouput of auxiliary functions across the multiple count of the CNC (CNC outputs 3.0 to 6.7). It is used for reliable data acceptance by the PLC.

H signal Is sent by the PLC to the CNC as soon as the PLC has accepted the data output from the CNC. Once the handshake is completed, more data can be transmitted from the CNC.

L signal Initiated by the negative slope of the corresponding strobe signal (see CNC out puts 7.0 to 7.7, STROBE"), the L signal must be transmitted from the PLC to the CNC.

Diagram

Data at Multiple Output

Delay time

STROBE M, S, T (O)

AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT (I)

Application Output of switching and auxiliary function M, S, T etc., acceptance of data by the PLC and shortening of the strobe duration at maximum setting. The strobe should be set to a time of approx. 200 ms in the Auxiliary Function Re ceipt mode (see Machine parameters" manual, P2008).

Important: Machine parameter P2003 Delete data after issue" must be set to NO ! in Auxiliary Function Receipt (handshake) mode!

4−51 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O12.1 OPTIONAL JUMP ON 1 input signal

General This statistically defined signal acts with a G23 programmed in the part program.

H signal The jump with programmed G23 is performed as log, as the block with G23 has not been not processed by block initialisation at the time of the L/H slope. If the function is also required to be active for program blocks already processed at the time of the L/H slope, then WAIT must be programmed in the block before G23 (see CPL de scription).

L signal Jump at G23 is not executed.

Application One of a number of options for flexible part program configuration depending on workpiece machining.

O12.3 SUPPRESSION OF SOFTWARE LIMITS 1 input signal

General This is a special signal used only in exceptional circumstances. It is a static signal that must be given for the period of the desired software limit suppression. SW limit suppression is active for the axes defined in machine parameter P 1504.

H signal Suppression of SW limit switch is active. There is no range monitoring. ! L signal Suppression of SW limits is not active. The SW limit switch values stored in machine parameter group 1500 are active.

Application Special cases, e.g. individual axis replacement.

Note With active SW limit suppression, both machine and PLC must be secured by the ! safety critical conditions being fulfilled! Before suppression is cancelled, the axis must be moved into the permitted SWL (software limit switch) range. With synchronous axes this signal must be set before NC START (Program start) in order to induce SWL suppression. With asynchronous axes, suppression can also be performed within an ongoing program.

4−52 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O12.4 AUTOMATIC 1 input signal O12.5 SINBLOCK 1 input signal (only with CC220M; functionality with CC220T see next page)

General The operating modes AUTOMATIC and SINBLOCK can also be selected through CNC interface inputs 12.4 or 12.5 − except through softkeys.

Function If the two signals are not active, the user can as before choose between the operat ing modes automatic and single block in the softkey level PROGRAM CHECK. Activating one of the two interface signals causes a changeover to the correspon ding operating mode (see table 1). In this condition a selection via AUTOMATIC or SINBLOCK softkey is not possible (if attempted, the message ACTIVATION NOT PERMITTED" will appear). If both signals are active, the AUTOMATIC signal has priority. If the two interface signals SINBLOCK and AUTOMATIC are deactivated, the last selected status is retained and can be changed again with a softkey.

AUTOMATIC SINBLOCK Function

LL AUTOMATIC/SINBLOCK via softkey LHSINBLOCK active, softkeys disabled LH −> L SINBLOCK remains active, softkeys allowed HL AUTOMATIC active, softkeys disabled HH AUTOMATIC active, softkeys disabled H −> LL AUTOMATIC remains active, softkeys allowed Table1

Note The setting and deleting of breakpoints remains unaffected by a changeover via interface.

4−53 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O12.4 2nd SPINDLE CLOCKWISE ROTATION (M03) 1 input signal (only with CC220T; functionality with CC220M see previous page)

L / H slope Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a positive spindle speed set value. The level of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed programmed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.

H signal No effect (see also note under SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).

L signal No effect.

Note − Effective in every operating mode. − The CNC issues no auxiliary functions of the rotary direction at the interface. −All necessary logical linkages with the inputs must be realised in the PLC via the MTM. −To be linked only for setup in the PLC program.

O12.5 2nd SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE ROTATION (M04) 1 input signal (only with CC220T; functionality with CC220M see previous page)

L / H slope Signal change from L to H causes the issue of a negative speed set value. The level of the set value depends on the gear level selected, the spindle speed pro grammed and the setting of the spindle potentiometer.

H signal Has no effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).

L signal No effect.

4−54 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O12.6 2nd SPINDLE STOP (M05) 1 input signal

H / L slope Signal change from H to L causes a spindle speed set value of 0 V to be issued. The spindle is held stationary in the position control circuit.

Note As interrogation only takes place at a signal change, a static signal remains after execution of the command without the function being modified.

Note − Effective in every operating mode. − The CNC issues no auxiliary functions at the interface. −All necessary logical linkages with the inputs must be realised in the PLC via the MTM. −To be linked only for setup in the PLC program.

O12.7 2nd SPINDLE DIRECT (M19) 1 input signal

L / H slope Signal change from L to H causes introduction of the orientation procedure.

H signal No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal, O12.6).

L signal No effect.

Note − Effective in every operating mode. − Also effective after M5. − The CNC issues no auxiliary functions at the interface. −All necessary logical linkages with the inputs must be realised in the PLC via the MTM.

4−55 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O13.0 − O14.7 JOG +/− 16 input signals

General These signals arrive from the setup panel, are looped via the PLC (with the aid of MTB1 I/O if required), gated and passed on to the CNC. They function together with

− Jog Mode (see CNC output 8.3 and CNC input 16.6/16.7) − Manual feeds and incrementals (see CNC inputs 15.0 to 16.0) − Feed potentiometer (NC panel or MTB1 I/O Port) − Rerence Point Approach (see CNC output 8.4, CNC input 16.1) − Zero set (see CNC input 16.2)

H signal Triggers one of the above functions provided the conditions are fulfilled. Depending on the jog direction keys and other interlock conditions, these signals are sent to the CNC for the duration of the key depression. For functions Reference Point Approach and Zero set (Start function), the slope is evaluated by the CNC (pos.neg. and neg.pos.).

L signal In Jog Mode an ongoing axis movement will be aborted, otherwise no effect.

Application Manual traversing of axes in toolsetting mode, initiates Reference Point Approach and Zero set.

Note The jogging of auxiliary axes is permitted by the CNC while a part program is being executed. Allowance must be made for any machinedependent interlocks. The jog signals required for the spindle axes defined by machine parameter P 7001 or, where the case,P 7100 (2nd spindle) must not be evaluated. There are separate input signals for this (spindle keys).

4−56 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O15.0 − O16.0 MANUAL FEEDS AND INCREMENTALS 8 input signals

General The following 9 input signals are active in the JOG MODE and for external set value selection for asynchronous axes:

− O15.0 MANUAL FEED RAPID − O15.1 MANUAL FEED FAST − O15.2 MANUAL FEED MEDIUM − O15.3 MANUAL FEED SLOW − O15.4 EXTERNAL FEED (*) − O15.5 INCREMENT X (increment selectable with MP 509) − O15.6 INCREMENT 100 − O15.7 INCREMENT 10 − O16.0 INCREMENT 1

*: the signal EXTERNAL FEED is used to programme the feedrate of individual axes via the multiinterface (see O7.0 − O7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE 1−128, sect. Trans feral of axis position and feedrate set values from the PLC to the CNC").

The values for the manual feeds are defined in machine parameters P 505 to P 508. Of the signals listed above, only one may be present at any one time. If a number of signals are simultaneously present, the lowest speed is selected for continuous traversing (true only for EXTERNAL FEED !); for incremental traversing the signal with the most increments is decoded. If a new speed is preselected during an axis movement (jogging), the axes will con tinue to move at the old speed until the jog key is released. The IF signal must be defined in the following time sequence − Select manual feed or increment − Jog

4−57 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O16.1 REFERENCE POINT APPROACH 1 input signal

General Reference Point Approach" is an operating mode (see CNC output 8.4, GMREF ERENCE POINT APPROACH) which can be selected via softkey (manually) or via this interface signal (via PLC). In the automatic area, the reference points can be approached without any action be taken by the user, if certain conditions − to be determined by the project designer − are met. Additional interlocks or conditions should be taken into account on the PLC side.

L / H slope The operating mode is activated with the positive slope, if FEED HOLD is not pres ent at the CNC side (with NC or MANUAL INPUT operating mode).

H / L slope The operating mode is deactivated with the negative slope.

Application with incremental measuring systems Explanations and operating procedures for Reference Point Approach under ap plication of an incremental measuring system can be found in signal descriptions for O2.0 − O4.7.

Application of a distance coded measuring system Distance coded measuring systems are not in normal operation different from in cremental measuring systems. Both systems allow changes of position to be de termined by taking into account pulses provided by the encoder − if the absolute position is known. The differences consist only in the position acquistitoning after switching on the CNC. The reason for this is that a coded reference marking" is also issued in addition to the cyclic reference marking". While the cyclic reference marking is being issued according to a constant number of pulses, the coded reference marking changes its position by a definite number of pulses per cyclic reference marking crossed. Guided by the maximum measuring range (traverse path) of the distance coded encoder, every distance between cyclic and coded reference marking occurs only once among the many possible rotation values. The determination of the absolute machine positions is thus al ready possible after the reading of a maximum of 2 reference markings (less than 2 rotations with rotary encoders); reading 2 markings may require the crossing of 3 markings. The parameters necessary for position calculation are to be entered in machine parameters P 104, P 105, P 115, P 116, P 502and P 1514 to P 1517.

4−58 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Procedure for Reference Point Approach" (determining the absolute ma chine positions): Although with a distance coded measuring system no reference point need now be approached, the determination of the absolute machine positions after switching on the CNC is, as is the case with a normal incremental encoder, triggered by the REFERENCE POINT softkey in group operating mode MACHINE or via interface signal O16.1. After activating the REFERENCE POINT APPROACH group mode, the Reference Point Approach" of an axis must be started via the corresponding signals O13.0 to O14.7 (JOG MODE). The speed of the Reference Point Approach" for each axis is thus set via machine parameter (P 502). The control controls the traverse movement necessary for reading a cyclic and a coded reference marking (approach cycle). The direction of the traverse move ment corresponds to the preset − by the signal O3.0 to O3.7 − direction for Refer ence Point Approach. After recognition of the second marking, the control stops the axis and recalculates the machine position. Finally, the marker last crossed is approached and the axis is brought to a standstill.

End position of the axis

Direction of approach:

2nd marking 1st marking S

Direction of approach: Direction dependent on interface signal O3.x S: Switchon position of the axis

CAUTION! − Software and hardware limits must lie within the travel range of the distance coded measuring system. It is not possible for this range to be left mechan ically! − The traverse path of the approach cycle must lie within the software limit switches. − The cam path for the signal O3.0 to 3.7 DIRECTION REFERENCE POINT APP. must be at least twice as long as the distance between 2 cyclic markers.

4−59 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O16.2 ZERO AXES 1 input signal

General ZERO AXES is an operating mode that can be selected with a softkey (manually) or via this interface signal (with PLC). Otherwise the same process occurs as manually, if the conditions for this are met. For synchronous axes only!

L / H slope The operating mode is activated with the positive slope when FEED HOLD is pres ent on the CNC side (FEED HOLD is only necessary for ZERO AXES during a run ning program).

H / L slope The active operating mode is deactivated again with the negative slope, i.e. when ZERO AXES is completed. Fixed timecontrolled sequence by the PLC.

Application Subfunction within an automatic sequence.

Note ZERO RESET is initiated with the Jog keys (Plus or Minus).

O16.3 CLEAR DIST. TO GO 1 input signal

General This function can be initiated by softkey or IF signal; FEED HOLD must first be ac tive, however. L / H slope Clears the distance to go of the currently active block and the blocks already pro cessed when FEED HOLD is present. The cleared preprocessed blocks are then reprocessed. This signal should be defined as a fixed pulse (approx. 200−500 ms).

H / L slope No effect.

Application Automated program interruption enables the initiation of further measures (strat egies) irrespective of the actual status of the processing/machine.

Note Any additionally required interlocks and conditions must be provided for in the PLC. Conditions in the preprocessed blocks are not rechecked.

4−60 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O16.4 CONTROL RESET 1 input signal

General Control reset can be initiated by softkey or IF signal. This function must be used with the utmost caution, due to the farreaching consequences for the control sys tem and the machine (switchon status).

L / H slope The positive slope executes external Control Reset, provided FEED HOLD and other CNC internal conditions are true (FEED HOLD is only required for NC and MDI modes). Control Reset is equivalent to powering up the CNC with active software (SW) limit switches. The signal must be selected as a pulse with a certain duration (approx. 200 .... 500 ms). The CNC output signal CONTROL RESET (9.1) is also issued during this time.

H / L slope No effect.

Application Total program abort, i.e. to initiate emergency strategies when a reject workpiece has been detected. Restarts the processing of a workpiece or sets the control to a defined reset status.

Note Control Reset sets all G codes to switchon status (according to machine para meter group 3000), resets all error messages and deselects an active program (see also signal description of (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP, CNC input 5.3). The following CNC outputs (or modes) are also reset: AUTOMATIC MODE (8.0) SINGLE BLOCK MODE (8.1) MDI MODE (8.2) JOG MODE (8.3) REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE (8.4) SWITCH FUNCTION MODE (11.5) EXT.POS.REACHED x.AXIS (19.x)

After a CONTROL RESET, the spindle stops with the slope acceleration (deceler ation) defined in the machine parameter and is held stationary by position control.

4−61 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O16.5 100% FEED ASYNCHRONOUS AXES 1 input signal (ANALOG OVERRIDE 100%)

1st effect

General The feed potentiometer is effective for all axes in the system. Since this is not always desirable however, the feed override values can be deactivated for auxiliary axes.

H signal Allows CNCcontrolled auxiliary axes to be traversed with the 100% value of the se lected speed.

L signal CNCcontrolled auxiliary axes are assigned the feed override value of the selected speed.

Application Tool change axes Gantry axes (conveyors for tools/workpieces) Pallet pusher axes

Note This signal is always transmitted under normal conditions.

2nd effect

General Using a potentiometer, it is possible to modify the voltages present at analog out puts while the program is running.

H signal Analog outputs are set at 100% of the programmed value. The analog output potentiometer has no effect.

L signal The analog output potentiometer is effective.

4−62 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O16.6 O16.7 JOG (mm/min) 1 input signal JOG (mm/rev) 1 input signal

General JOG with interface is possible in all group modes. Changing from one group mode to another (e.g. from. machine to manual) does not abort JOG in this case.

L / H slope A positive slope activates the JOG mode in mm/min or mm/rev.

H / L slope A negative slope deactivates the JOG mode in mm/min or mm/rev.

Application Additional external setup panel.

Note All Mode signals" operate on the rising or falling" principle. Care must be taken to ensure that the PLC interlocks are made in such a way that only one signal is trans mitted to the CNC at any one time. If the JOG mode was activated with the interface signal, it can also be deselected by means of the following operations: − Pressing the group mode key MACHINE again when you are already in the group mode MACHINE − Pressing the Level Return key in the group mode MACHINE − Pressing the JOG softkey − Reference Point Approach − Zero Reset

4−63 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O17.0 O17.1 FEED POT EXTERNAL 1 input signal SPINDLE POT EXTERNAL 1 input signal

General Machine parameters can be used to define potentiometer connections for Rapid, Feed and Spindle (see Machine parameters" manual, parameter group 2500). Two potentiometer groups can also be defined (internal/external potentiometers). When using two groups of potentiometers, these signals can be used to switch be tween the internal and external potentiometers. Precondition: one common potentiometer for Rapid and Feed. Note: With 220T and 2nd spindle option, potentiometer combination for 1st and 2nd spindle takes place via machine parameter 2509.

H signal Switches from internal to external potentiometers; external potentiometers are ac tive (for external potentiometers see also descriptions of CNC inputs 7.0 to 7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE)

L signal Internal potentiometers are active.

Application For additional, external manual setup panel.

O17.2 AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (M40) 1 input signal

General This signal is only required when the mutual spindle keys are used to reinstate the original start condition (M40).

L / H slope A change from Low to High activates automatic gear range selection (equivalent to programming M40 or the M code defined in machine parameter 7017 for automatic gear range selection).

H / L slope No effect.

Note − The signal is active in all modes. − The CNC does not issue any auxiliary function. −All logical operation with inputs must be implemented in the PLC by the MTM.

4−64 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O17.3 PIECE COUNTER ON 1 input signal

General The Piece Counter option is active when the input signal Piece counter on" is set. The part program is then run until the actual pieces are identical with a specified quantity.

H signal The piece counter is activated by the Prog. No. entry and the set interface signal. The interface signal Target achieved" is reset. The actual pieces are automatically reset to Zero".

L signal The piece counter is deactivated.

Note When the interface signal Piece counter on" is set, the piece counter remains ac tive even after Control Reset".

O17.4 SPINDLE REVERSE 1 input signal

H signal Effective in every operating mode. Reverses the polarity of the output spindle set point voltage and hence the spindle rotary direction as well. The signal is acrive on Idling speed, CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (see CNC input 17.5) and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (see CNC input 19.3).

L signal The programmed or interfaceselected speed is active. With CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED a positive spindle setpoint voltage is issued.

4−65 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O17.5 CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED 1 input signal

H signal The control issues one positive or negative setpoint voltage per gear range which corresponds to the constant spindle speed defined in machine parameter P 7006 (see also CNC input 17.4).

L signal The control issues the setpoint voltage that corresponds to the programmed spindle speed.

Note The CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED input is effective in all modes.

O17.6 (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT 1 input signal

H signal Permits the CNC to issue a spindle set value.

L signal Inhibits the issue of a spindle set value controlled by the CNC. No idling possible.

Note The input (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V is effective in all modes as a general Spindle set value issue allow (spindle drive ready, no overload etc. ), except with the SPINDLE ORIENT. function.(NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V operates like the FEED ALLOW signal of the spindle axis, but also sets the SWord to 0".

4−66 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O17.7 SET SPINDLE POT 100% (Spindle override 100%) 1 input signal

General A button on the machine panel can be used to override the instantaneous position of the spindle potentiometer and set the active spindle override value to 100%.

H signal Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). Depending on P 7514 (=NO), the spindle override value is automatically set to 100% if this signal is recognised. Spindle 100% remains until the potentiometer value is manually changed to 100% and a further change occurs thereafter (reverse >3%,. or >2% incr.). If P 7514 = YES, spindle override remains set for as long as this interface signal is present. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.

L signal Is transmitted from the interface controller to the CNC when the spindle 100% func tion key is not operated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.

Note The input signal corresponds to the standard SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%. Is set with interface signal G84, for instance. This signal has no effect so long as the (NOT) SPINDLE 0V signal (see CNC input 17.6) is Low.

4−67 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O18.0 − 18.7 RECEIPT GEAR RANGE 8 input signals

The RECEIPT GEAR RANGE signals 1−8 are used to transmit the current gear range to the CNC. If there is no parity between the preselected and the actual gear range, a voltage is issued which corresponds to the idling speed defined in the ma chine parameter program P 7009 (or P 7109 for 2nd spindle).

Preselection of gear range can be made automatically using M40, directly with M41−M48 or with the interface signals SELECT GEAR RANGE (see CNC inputs 19.4 to 20.3).

Note: The M codes for the gear ranges can be freely defined using machine para meter 7017 or 7117 (2nd spindle).

There must be a skew of at least 100 ms between one signal change (gear range changeover):

RANGE 1

RANGE 2

D t > 100 ms

CAUTION! When 2nd spindle is applied (CC220T), only signals 18.0 to 18.3 are available for the 1st spindle (receipt gear range 1−4) ! In this case, signals 18.4 to 18.7 for re ceipt gear range 1−4 are allocated to the second spindle!

4−68 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O19.0 SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL) 1 input signal

H signal No effect (see also note under SPINDLE STOP signal).

L signal No effect.

O19.1 SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL) 1 input signal

H signal No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal).

L signal No effect.

4−69 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O19.2 SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL) 1 input signal

H / L slope Signal change from H to L causes a spindle speed set value of 0 V to be issued. The spindle is held stationary in the position control circuit.

Note As interrogation only takes place at a signal change, a static signal remains after execution of the command without the function being modified.

O19.3 SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL) 1 input signal

L / H slope Signal change from L to H causes introduction of the orientation procedure.

H signal No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal).

L signal No effect.

4−70 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O19.4 − O20.3 SELECT GEAR RANGE 1 signal per gear range

L / H slope When the signal changes from L to H, the system checks whether the preselected gear range is active. If there is no coincidence between the preselected and actual gear ranges, a voltage is issued which corresponds to the idling speed P 7009 (or P 7109 for 2nd spindle) defined in the machine parameter program (see also CNC inputs 18.0 to 18.7, RECEIPT GEAR RANGE).

H signal No effect (see also note with SPINDLE STOP signal).

L signal No effect.

Note − Effective in every operating mode. − The CNC issues no auxiliary functions at the interface. −All necessary logical linkages with the inputs must be realised in the PLC via the MTM.

CAUTION! When 2nd spindle is applied (CC220T), only signals 19.4 to 19.7 are available for the 1st spindle (select gear range 1−4) ! In this case, signals 20.0 to 20.3 for gear range selection 1−4 are allocated to the second spindle!

4−71 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O20.4 QUADRANT PROGRAMMING 1 input signal

General This function is used to enable the programs created with quadrant programming years ago to be executed with new controls as well. The signal must be statically selected.

H signal Quadrant programming active.

L signal Full circle programming active.

Note The NC will only change from quadrant to full circle programming when no pro gram is selected. The selector switch must be provided by the MTM at the NC setup panel.

O20.5 AUTOMATIC RESTART M2/M30 1 input signal

General Used for program repeats and has the same effect as NC START after M2/M30.

H signal Automatically initiates NC START after M2/M30. The signal can always remain present.

L signal No effect.

Application Sequential processing of repeat workpieces, e.g. processing from bar stock.

4−72 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O20.6 RETURN TO CONTOUR 1 input signal

General This signal is derived from a key at the setup panel and operates in conjunction with the 4 reentry cycles. The signal initiates a Return to Contour after one of the 4 reentry cycles has been selected by softkey. It also functions after block search.

L / H slope Initiates return cycle and should be regarded like NC START in terms of import ance. The machine approaches the approach position and then stops. Pulse duration is the duration of key depression.

H / L slope After H / L slope the program is continued after the approach.

Application For example following a tool failure, tool inspection, block search.

Note This signal can also be combined with NC START. It is effective during Return to Contour and Go Block.

O20.7 SINGLE BLOCK G84 (TEST) 1 input signal

General For safety reasons (tap breakage), the tapping cycle G84 may only be run in auto ! matic mode. For testing (without workpiece machining) the G84 cycle can also be run in single block mode by selecting this signal.

H signal Allows single block operation for tapping cycles G84.

L signal Allows normal operation in auto mode (softkey). In single block mode (softkey) an error message appears without execution of G84.

Application Only for test purposes, commissioning.

4−73 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O21.0 DNC/PLC RECEIPT 1 input signal

General This signal only acts in conjunction with the DNC interfaces LSV2 and BAB. This signal need only be decoded when at least one of the functions Start pro gram", CNC Control reset" or Reference Point Approach" is to be carried out by the host computer (cell computer) (Remote operation).

Once the CNC signal has issued a function request to the PLC by setting a DNC specific output signal (DNC/NCSTART", DNC/CONTROL RESET", DNC/REF ERENCE POINT APPROACH" etc.), it will wait for the signal DNC/PLC RECEIPT". As soon as this signal goes HIGH, the NC immediately decodes the input signals relevent for the particular function request (the PLC must set all necessary signals in the same PLC cycle as the DNC/PLC RECEIPT signal). If the condition of all signals is as it should be for starting the desired function, this is taken as a positive receipt. If not, the desired function is momentarily interlocked by the PLC. The CNC accordingly transmits a function receipt or error message to the HOST.

Once the control has finished decoding, it resets the output signal of the desired function (DNC/NC START", DNC/CONTROL RESET", DNC CONTROL RESET", DNC / REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" etc.). The input signal DNC/PLC RE CEIPT" must stay set HIGH until that time, and the input signals assigned to that function must not change within this period. Furthermore, the input signals belong ing to the functions may not change during this period.

4−74 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O21.1 Effect with 220T SET FEED POT 100% 1 input signal

General By programming G63 or a button at the machine panel it is possible to suppress the instantaneous setting of the feed potentiometer and to set the active feed override value (mm/rev or mm/min) to 100%.

H signal Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). Depending on P 7514 (= NO), the feed override value is automatically set to 100% when this signal is detected. Feedrate 100% is then held in mode until G66 is programmed or the feed potentiometer is first manually turned to 100% and then to another value (ro tary adjustment >3%, or>2% incr.). or >2% incr.). If P 7514 = YES, the override remains set for as long as this interface signal is pres ent. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.

L signal Is transmitted by the interface controller to the CNC when the Set Feed 100% but ton is not actuated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.

O21.2 Effect with 220T SET RAPID POT 100% 1 input signal

General A button at the machine panel can be used to suppress the instantaneous setting of the rapid potentiometer and to set the active rapid override value to 100%.

H signal Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). Depending on P 7514 (= NO), the rapid traverse override value is automatically set to 100% when this signal is detected. Rapid 100% is then held in mode until the rapid potentio meter is first manually turned to 100% and then to another value (rotary adjustment >3%, or >2% incr.). or >2% incr.). If P 7514 = YES, the override remains set for as long as this interface signal is pres ent. Thereafter, the value entered is issued again.

L signal Is transmitted by the PLC to the CNC when the Rapid 100% button is not actuated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.

4−75 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O21.1 Effect with 220M SET FEED POT 100% 1 input signal

H signal Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). The feed over ride value is automatically set to 100% and held in mode when this signal is de tected.

L signal A changeover to the current feed override value occurs.

O21.2 Effect with 220M SET RAPID POT 100% 1 input signal

General A button at the machine panel can be used to suppress the instantaneous setting of the rapid potentiometer and to set the active rapid override value to 100%.

H signal Is transmitted from the interface controller to the CNC (for a duration of at least 40 ms). The feed override value is automatically set to 100% and held in mode when this signal is detected.

L signal A changeover to the current rapid override value occurs.

O21.3 COUNTER DECREMENT 1 input signal

General Every time the interface signal Counter decrement" is set, the actual piece count is decremented by 1". The interface signal is permitted at any time within the active piece counter. How ever, the actual piece count cannot assume a value of < zero".

L / H slope The positive slope of the signal decrements the current count by 1".

Application If the workpiece gauging system detects a reject component, the actual count can be decremented by 1" by setting the Counter decrement" interface signal.

4−76 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O21.4 TOOL LIFE MONITOR ON 1 input signal

General The interface signal activates the logic for the tool life monitoring system.

H signal Tool life monitor is active.

O21.5 THREAD GAUGE / REMACHINE 1 input signal

General Once all programmed rough and finished cuts have been executed in thread cycle G330, the gauging position can be approached. The latter movement is initiated by the interface signal Thread gauge / remachine". On completion of thread machining, this signal is checked at G330; if active, the programmed gauging position is approached. If active, the programmed gauging position is approached.

H signal If active, the programmed gauging position is approached.

L signal If, after gauging, the signal is cancelled, the thread cycle is terminated after the next NC start and the NC program continues to execute.

Note IF signal Thread cycle active" is set when G330 is called. The signal is reset when all thread cuts have been executed and the Thread gauge / remachine" signal is reset.

O21.6 TEACH IN FEED 1 input signal

General Actuating the Feed Correction Teach in" button on the toolsetting panel enters the instantaneous percentage value of the feed potentiometer into the tool wear table and assigns it to the currently active tool. The signal is only effective when P 7514 is parameterised!

H signal The input signal enters the current feed potentiometer value into the active tool table.

4−77 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O21.7 TEACH IN SPINDLE 1 input signal

General Operating the Spindle Correction Teach in" button on the toolsetting panel enters the instantaneous percentage value of the feed potentiometer into the tool wear table and assigns it to the currently active tool. The signal is only effective when P 7514 is parameterised!

H signal The input signal enters the current spindle potentiometer value into the tooltable.

O22.0 − O22.7 HANDWHEEL 1 input signal per axis

General Handwheel operation is only possible when G94 (G94: feed in mm/min) is active, the interface signal I8.3 (JOG MODE) and − according to axis − one of the signals O22.0 to O22.7 exist statically. The digital handwheel is effective − in contrast to the analog handwheel − not just at synchronous axes but also at asynchronous auxili ary axes. In addition, G94 has no influence on the digital handwheel.

H signal Activates the handwheel function for the axis concerned.

L signal Deactivates the handwheel function for the axis concerned.

Note If an axis is activated with the HANDWHEEL signal, steps must be taken in the PLC to prevent Jog movements being performed. Hirth axes cannot be traversed with the handwheel. The Feed Allow of the axis concerned must also be set up with the High signal. If one of the signals O15.0 to 16.0 (manual feed/increment) is present, the axis will traverse with the corresponding value. If one of the signals O15.0 to 16.0 is present, these signals are given priority. Where a number of signals are present, the lowest vale is selected. If no signals are present, the INCREMENT 1" value is used.

Note For the digital handwheel, only the signals INCREMENT(S) O15.5 to 16.0 are rel evant.

4−78 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O23.0 − O23.7 INHIBIT MEASURING SYSTEM MONITOR 1 input signal per axis

General This signal is only required in special cases. It is used for temporarily masking the measuring system monitor or cancelling the Reference Point Approach.

H signal The monitor of the measuring system and reference point is inactive.

L signal Monitor of measuring system and reference point is active. Depending on machine parameter P114, the reference point must be newly ap proached when a changeover from H signal to L signal occurs.

Application Measuring system switchover to one or more axes by means of a separating filter (prevents Emergency Stop), dismantling complete axes, alternate use of two refer ence points on one axis.

Note It is essential to remember that the measuring sytem monitor is only masked for the ! duration of the switchover (the measuring system interrupt) so as not to affect the safe operation of the machine. See also Machine parameters", P114.

4−79 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O24.0 2nd spindle: AUTOM. GEAR RANGE SELECTION 1 input signal

General This signal is only required when the mutual spindle keys are used to reinstate the original start condition (M40).

L / H slope A change from Low to High activates automatic gear range selection (equivalent to programming M40 or the M code defined in machine parameter 7117 for automatic gear range selection).

H / L slope No effect.

Note − The signal is active in all modes. − The CNC does not issue any auxiliary function. −All logical operation with inputs must be implemented in the PLC by the MTM.

O24.1 2nd spindle: SPINDLE REVERSE 1 input signal

H signal Effective in every operating mode. Reverses the polarity of the output spindle set point voltage and hence the spindle rotary direction as well. The signal is active on Idling speed, CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (see CNC input 24.2) and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (see CNC input 12.7).

L signal The programmed or interfaceselected speed is active. With CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED a positive spindle setpoint voltage is issued.

4−80 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O24.2 2nd spindle: CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED 1 input signal

H signal The control issues one positive or negative setpoint voltage per gear range which corresponds to the constant spindle speed defined in machine parameter P 7106 (see also CNC input 17.4).

L signal The control issues the setpoint voltage that corresponds to the programmed spindle speed.

Note The CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED input is effective in all modes.

O24.3 2nd spindle: (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT 1 input signal

H signal Permits the CNC to issue a spindle set value.

L signal Inhibits the issue of a spindle set value controlloed by the CNC. No idling possible.

Note The input (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V is effective in all modes as a general Spindle set value issue allow (spindle drive ready, no overload etc. ), except with the SPINDLE ORIENT. function. (NOT) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0V operates like the FEED ALLOW signal of the spindle axis, but also sets the SWord to 0".

4−81 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O24.4 2nd spindle: SET SPINDLE POT 100% 1 input signal (Spindle override 100%)

General A button on the machine panel can be used to override the instantaneous position of the spindle potentiometer and set the active spindle override value to 100%.

H signal Is transmitted by the interface control to the CNC (for at least 40 ms). When this sig nal is detected, the spindle override value is automatically set to 100%. Spindle 100% remains until the potentiometer value is manually changed to 100% and a further change occurs thereafter (reverse >3%, or >2% incr.).

L signal Is transmitted by the PLC to the CNC when the set spindle 100% function button is not actuated. The button signal is passed on to the CNC.

Note Is set with interface signal G84, for instance. This signal has no effect so long as the (NOT) SPINDLE 0V signal (see CNC input 24.3) is Low.

O24.5 2nd spindle: EXTERNAL SPINDLE POTI 1 input signal

H signal Changeover from internal (see Machine parameters 2511) to external (see ma chine parameter 2510) potentiometer; external potentiometer is effective for the 2nd spindle (for external potentiometers see also the descriptions of the CNC in puts 7.0 to 7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE). Note: Whether 1st and 2nd spindle should be allocated to a common spindle po tentiometer can be defined via machine parameter 2509. L signal Internal potentiometer is ineffective. Application For additional, external manual setup panel.

O25.0 − O25.7 Effect with Drift compensation expansion level. DRIFT COMP OFF 1 input signal per axis

General The signals exist in association with the drift compensation" expansion level. The functionality of the expansion level is described in detail in the Machine para meters" manual under parameter group 6600.

H signal As long as HIGH level exists, the drift compensation for the corresponding axis is switched off. If the signal becomes HIGH during a compensation process, the latter is aborted.

4−82 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Diagram

Traverse command (e.g. 1 axis)

IN POSITION 1ST AXIS

Controller enable to drive

DRIFT COMP OFF 1ST AXIS

Notes on the diagram: t1: contains the waiting period (P 6601) and the Offset correction time (the value must be determined empirically, or can be derived from the INPOS signal). t2: corresponds to the waiting period until axis standstill (P 6601). If the traverse command goes away, the delay time t2 is first started. After t2 has expired, drift compensation becomes active. The drift compensation can now be switched off via interface signal either after evaluation of the INPOS signal or after t1 has expired. If the traverse command becomes active again, the controller enable can be given for the drive, and the drift compensation can be cleared again.

NOTE! Drift compensation has no effect on spindles or ANALOG axes. Switching off the drift compensation via interface signal is only possible with SERVOi.

O25.0 − O25.7 Effect with Cross Compensation expansion level DRIFT COMP OFF 1 input signal per axis

General With this signal, the effect of the cross compensation can be switched off axially. H signal The current correction value becomes inactive with the rising edge of the signal. This causes a set value stepchange on the corresponding axis.

L signal The current correction value becomes active again with the falling edge of the sig nal. This causes a set value stepchange on the corresponding axis.

NOTE! Circular compensation has no effect on spindles or ANALOG axes. Switching off the circular compensation via interface signal is only possible with SERVOi.

4−83 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O26.0 − O26.7 The meaning of this signal can be defined according to machine parameters

MACHINE MODE

H signal switchover to Machine" mode takes place with the positive edge of the signal.

L signal No effect

Mirror switch

General In NC" and Manual input" modes, axes can be mirrored via the signal. The mirror image always results around the program zero point. The programmable mirror imaging (G38) must not be active. As many signals are needed as axes are mir rored. −−−> MPP

H signal The corresponding axis is mirrored.

L signal No mirroring of the accompanying axis

O27.0 − O27.3 Switchover only with stationary CAXIS signals spindle/axis

There are 3 different switchover possibilities that can be programmed with freely selectable M functions. − Switchover CAxis Spindle. − Switchover spindle CAxis with ref. point approach by the Caxis. − Switchover spindle CAxis without ref. point approach by the CAxis. The switchover is usually performed with the spindle at rest or with the CAxis posi tioned. The following input and output signals are provided for this facility: Inputs O27.0 SWITCHOVER ON TURNING MODE O27.1 SWITCHOVER ON MILLING MODE O27.2 REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS O27.3 CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC) Outputs E16.4 CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)

There are a number of configurations for CAxis applications: − common axis with a single axis number for spindle and driven tool, Caxis is defined as a separate synchronous axis; a common or separate drive can be chosen for spindle and Caxis.

4−84 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

− separate axes with different axis numbers for spindle, Caxis and driven tool. −It is possible to have a separate or common measuring system for Caxis and spindle.

Sequence generally: − TRANSFER ALLOW is first cancelled and finally reinstated. −IF signals SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE", SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE , REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS" are set or reset depending on the programmed M code. − Give INHIBIT MEASURING SYSTEM MONITOR" if necessary. − Turn on measuring system if necessary. − Turn on analog input if necessary. −If spindle and driven tool are on separate axes, DRIVE OFF must be given in Milling mode for the spindle and in Turning mode for the driven tool. DRIVE OFF must also be given in Turning mode for the Caxis. If the spindle lies on the driven tool, only the drive for the Caxis has to be switched depending on the operating mode. Turning: DRIVE OFF for the Caxis, Milling mode: DRIVE ON for the Caxis − PLC reports the machine status with signal CAXIS ACTIVE. (Low = Turning; High = Milling) Note The Caxis can be manually traversed in the active Milling mode with the following functions: − Jog (+/−) continuous with Rapid, Fast, Medium, Slow. − Jog (+/−) increment in 1, 10, 100, X increments. − Handwheel (+/−) analog/digital corresponding to the general stipulations. As the signals can only be seen in conjunction with Caxis applications, they are not individually described, but the sequence is shown operationally in 3 diagrams. Diagram 1: Switchover to spindle

MCODE

TRANSFER ALLOW

MACHINE STOP

INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 7.A.* INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 8.A.*

DRIVE ON 7.A.

DRIVE ON 8.A.

SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE

CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)

CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)

*See remark in Diagram 3"

4−85 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Diagram 2: Switchover to Caxis without Ref. pt. approach

MCODE

TRANSFER ALLOW

MACHINE STOP

INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 7.A.*

INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 8.A.*

DRIVE ON 7.A.

DRIVE ON 8.A.

SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE

CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)

CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)

*See remark in Diagram 3"

Diagram 3: Switchover to Caxis with Ref. pt. approach

MCODE

TRANSFER ALLOW

MACHINE STOP

INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 7.A.*

INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. 8.A.*

DRIVE ON 7.A.

DRIVE ON 8.A.

SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE

CAXIS REF. PT. APPROACH

CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC)

REF. PT. REACHED 7.A.

CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC)

The drives of the spindle and Caxis must always be switched.

* Inhibit measuring system monitor 7. axis (Caxis) must only be given when the spindle turns too fast for the Caxis. − − = random or unknown condition.

4−86 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O27.0 − O27.3 CAXIS SIGNALS Floating switchover

General It is possible to switch over floating", i.e. from full speed without spindle stop on the Caxis. The zero marker of the Caxis encoder is recorded even during the braking process of the spindle. The referencing of the Caxis is no longer necessary. The Caxis (spindle) is not positioned on the zero marker either any longer, but now brakes as quickly as possible and remains defined at the resulting position (00−359,9990). The handling of the interface signal between NC and PLC is greatly simplified and reduced. The switchovers up to this point remain preserved for reasons of compatability. The new switchovers receive their own machine parameters and M codes. The new switchover is only applicable with machines with a combined spindle/Caxis drive.

CAUTION! The rapid switchover from S to C is distinct from the previous type.

With rapid switchover, the Caxis will after switchover be in an arbitrary, random position. It will not be on the reference point or on C=0.000 !

This must be taken into account when generating part programs.

Switchover with rotating spindle The spindle rotates at the programmed speed. All spindle enables are set. The C axis has no enables.

In the part program, one switchover is programmed to C. The M function is issued to the PLC at the interface.

The NC checks internally if the current spindle speed has exceeded the max. per missible speed of the Caxis (P7610). If this is the case, the spindle brakes immedi ately until this speed is reached. The acceleration parameters of the spindle are thus laid down as a basis. If the spindle speed is less than or equal to the max. permissible Caxis speed, the spindle is slowed down to such a point that it undergoes at least one full switchover. This one switchover is internally used to establish the zero marker of the Caxis en coder. After this has taken place, the spindle stops as quickly as possible with its acceleration. The NC reports to the PLC that the spindle is stationary and the Caxis is active and referenced. As soon as the NC reports to the PLC that the Caxis is active, the PLC switches the drive over to the Caxis, removes all enables from the spindle, switches the DriveOn of the Caxis, reports Caxis active to the NC and gives the Feed Enable for the Caxis. DriveOn of the spindle and the Caxis may not be set simultaneously.

The switchover is complete.

4−87 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Switchover with rotating spindle Outputs of the NC are stable 1 Speed Inputs of the NC must be 1 Inputs/outputs of the NC 1 or 0

S Í is I/O signals PLC/drive I/O from view of PLC

SP7610 Time M58 M58 Receipt O12.0

S Drive On O0.s Í O1.s

S Feed Enable Í I16.0

S stat. ÍÍ I16.4

C in NC active ÍÍ

C is referenced I15.c ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ

Drive is in Cmode Í O27.3

C in PLC active Í

C Drive On O0.c Í

C Feed Enable O1.c ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Meas. sys. Sp. Caxis O23.c

Switchover time % O0.s and O0.c may not be set simultaneously ! % The sequence O27.3 to I16.0 is definite. Switchover with stationary spindle Speed

Sis

Time M58 M58 Receipt O12.0

S Drive On Í O0.s

Í O1.s Í S stat. Í I16.0

C in NC active Í E16.4

C is referencedÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ I15.c ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Drive is in Cmode Í

C in PLC active Í O27.3

C Drive on Í O0.c Í C Feed EnableÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ O1.c

Meas. sys. Sp. ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍCaxis O23.c

Switchover time

4−88 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

Switchover with stationary spindle Spindle is stationary.

In the part program, one switchover is programmed to C. The M function is issued to the PLC at the interface. The PLC notes this, and gives the enables for the spindle as if an M3 S ....." were programmed.

The spindle executes a switchover as quickly as possible in exact correspondence with its parameters P 7610, P7004, P7005 and P7015. This switchover is internally used to establish the zero marker of the Caxis encoder. After this has taken place, the spindle stops as quickly as possible with its acceleration. The NC reports to the PLC that the spindle is stationary and the Caxis is active and referenced.

As soon as the NC reports to the PLC that the Caxis is active, the PLC switches the drive over to the Caxis, removes all enables from the spindle, reports Caxis active to the NC and gives the Feed Enable for the Caxis.

The switchover is complete.

Completion of the switchover from Caxis to spindle It should be ensured that the Caxis is stationary. The M function is issued to the PLC. The PLC then switches the drive over to the spindle, removes all enables from the Caxis and deletes the signal Caxis active. The NC deletes the signal that the Caxis in the NC is active.

The switchover is complete.

4−89 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O27.5 START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION 1 input signal

General The activation of the milling head compensation takes place exclusively via the PLC. After execution of the milling head compensation, the PLC at first enters the corresponding shift values into the compensation window between the NC and PLC (only with word coupling; with systems without word coupling, the values must be entered in the NC side with the CPL command FXC") and activates these by setting the signal O27.5. The milling head compensation is not active until the ref. pt. of the particular axis has been approached ! A milling head change takes place with a deselected program through program ming an M function under GM Manual input. The PLC executes the change, de livers and activates the appertaining compensation values. A milling head change can also be carried out with an active program. On the PLC side it should be ensured that traverse movements of the axis are complete (signal IN POSITION), the program execution has been stopped (signal TRANSFER ALLOW), and the traverse movements of the axes have been stopped (signal (NOT) FEED HALT). Furthermore, care should be taken on the programm/techni cal side that when activating a milling head compensation, no milling radius compensation is activated and no more prepared blocks exist (CPL command WAIT, or delete blocks already prepared with signal DELETE DISTANCE TO GO). H signal Activates the milling head radius compensation values entered in the correction memory (display of values under GM CORRECTION, softkey EXTERNAL ZERO POINT SHIFTS; only with word coupling!).

NOTE After switching on the CNC, the milling head compensation is not active and must be activated anew if necessary by the PLC! For milling head compensation see also signal I17.0 MILLING HEAD COMPENSA TION ACTIVE.

O27.6 FEED RATE REDUCTION 1 input signal

General A maximum speed for synchronous axes can be defined with machine parameter P512 Reduced path speed". The reduction is made effective by the interface sig nal. This reduction is not effective in Jog mode or reference point travel.

H signal The reduced path speed is effective.

L signal No limit of the path speed below the value entered in machine parameter P511.

4−90 DigitalInterface(Description) CC220 CNCInputs Connectionconditions

O27.7 REMACHINE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING 1 input signal

General If required, a thread can be remachined either with all rough cuts or only with the finish cuts. Remachining without all rough cuts is achieved when the interface sig nal Remachine thread without roughing" is active. The IF signal is only active when the IF signal Gauge/remachine thread" is active.

H signal Remachine thread without all rough cuts.

L signal Remachine with all rough cuts and all finish cuts.

4−91 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

4.2.2 Control outputs (PLC inputs)

I0.0 − I1.7 POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 2 output signals per axis

General The control reports its readiness for travel or the traversing of one or more axes to the PLC by means of the directional travel command (continuous signal).

H signal −For the duration of a programmed axis movement following NC Start even with no FEED ALLOW. −For the duration of a jog button operation even with no FEED ALLOW.

A movement interruption by FEED HOLD does not cancel the travel command. The travel command is not cancelled by FEED ALLOW, EMERGENCY STOP, DRIVE ON or FEED 0% either.

L signal −No movement is programmed or preselected. − After program deselection. − After CONTROL RESET.

Application Release a jam (trigger allow), directional interlock in PLC. The travel commands should not be combined with either DRIVE ON" or FEED ALLOW" to ensure a continuous program sequence with interpolation.

Note In Jog Mode the TRAVEL COMMAND is always given inversely to AXIS IN POSI TION when the drive is operating correctly.

4−92 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

No travel command is given when the axes are traversed with the handwheel. In programmed axis mode the negative slope of the TRAVEL COMMAND and the positive slope of AXIS IN POSITION no longer coincide, since the travel command has already been cancelled when Command position equals Actual position" is detected internally by the CNC.

Diagram 1: Jog Mode

SK Jog

JOG + (I)

TRAVEL COMMAND + (O)

AXIS IN POSITION (O)

FEED ALLOW (I)

Axis running

Diagram 2: Programmed Mode

NC START (I)

TRAVEL COMMAND + (O)

AXIS IN POSITION (O)

FEED ALLOW (I)

Axis running

(NOT) FEED HOLD (I)

4−93 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I2.0 − I2.7 AXIS IN POSITION 8 output signals

General Using the axisrelated IF signals AXIS IN POSITION, the CNC tells the matching logic that the selected position has been reached.

H signal The axis is within the InPosition window adjustable using machine parameter P1508.

L signal A movement is executed −or− although a travel command is present, no movement can take place because FEED ALLOW is absent or FEED HOLD is present.

Note See notes and diagrams under POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND signal.

Application Axis jamming. Various interlocks at the PLC.

4−94 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I3.0 − I7.7 MULTIPLE OUTPUT (AUX. FUNCT.)

Up to 6 auxiliary and switch functions (M, S, T etc.) as well as CPL data can be trans ferred to the PLC via the Multiple Output. The Multiple Output at the CNC end of the following CNC outputs: I3.0 to I6.7 32bit data channel (BCD or binary) BCD: 1 .. 8 x 107; Binary: 20 ... 230, +/− I7.0 to I7.7 8 change signals (6 auxiliary functions + 1 x CPL + 1 x spare) O12.0 AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT (Input)

To ensure reliable data transfer, a handshake must be performed between CNC and PLC with the aid of the CNC input signal AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT. With this signal the PLC tells the CNC that it has read the data at CNC outputs 2.0 to 7.7. Several auxiliary functions can be programmed in one block. The auxiliary func tions transferred via the Multiple Output are defined in machine parameter P 2001. The auxiliary functions themselves are issued to the interface serially but bitparal lel (size according to definition) with change signal. The AUX. FUNCT. RECEIPT signal allows the time of the auxiliary function output to be shortened.

The internal Feed Stop can be defined for every auxiliary function (see Machine parameter P 2002).If several auxiliary functions are programmed in a single block, one of which is defined by MPP as Feed Stop, then an internal Feed Stop will be active for all auxiliary functions of that block. The transfer of the next block can be inhibited by cancelling the TRANSFER ALLOW signal if this signal is cancelled while the signal is being changed. The transfer inhibit is cancelled when the signal is turned on again. FEED HOLD has no effect on the output of auxiliary functions.

CPL data can be output in both BCD and binary form according to the internal workings of the Multiple Output. Please note that the transfer of CPL data to the PLC is possible from CPL in dialog" as well as from CPL under execution". The PLC can detect, via signals I7.7 and I10.7 (CPL DIALOG STROBE), from which CPL task the data originate. Valid here are: Data from CPL under execution": Strobe on I7.7 Data from CPL in dialog": Strobe on I7.7 and I10.7 The length of the CPL change signal (I7.7 or I10.7) can be defined with machine parameter 2008.

4−95 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

Diagram: Handshake mode

New block (no Feed Stop) Axis running

Data

Internal Delay T1 T1 T1 CHANGE SIGNAL M Preset time

CHANGE SIGNAL S

CHANGE SIGNAL T

AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT

TRANSFER ALLOW

Internal FEED STOP (independent of MP 2002)

= no fixed time (system dependent)

Note The PLC must ensure that the AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT signal is cancelled immediately after the negative slope of the CHANGE SIGNAL.

Machine parameter group 2000 must be used for the Multiple Output.

For handshake mode, machine parameter P 2003 is set to NO. A change signal time (see P 2008)of approx. 200 ms must also be selected.

Floating auxiliary function output For auxiliary functions which have no internal switching function, a floating output can be defined via machine parameter.

An output is floating" when subsequent blocks are already being processed dur ing auxiliary function output, provided that the transfer allow remains present. The handshake traverse for secure data transfer remains valid.

4−96 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.0 AUTOMATIC MODE 1 output signal

H signal AUTOMATIC MODE is issued at the interface when a program is selected.

L signal After program deselection, for SINGLE BLOCK or after CONTROL RESET.

Note AUTOMATIC MODE is also affected by the CNC input signals AUTOMATIC (O12.4) and SINGLE BLOCK (O12.5) (these signals are only present with CC 220M!).

Diagram:

SK PROGRAM SELECT

SK AUTOMATIC (O)

SK BLOCK (O)

SK CONTROL RESET (O)

PROGRAM ACTIVE

SK JOG MODE

PROGRAM DESELECT

4−97 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.1 SINGLE BLOCK MODE 1 output signal

H signal SINGLE BLOCK MODE is issued at the interface when the softkey SINGLE BLOCK or SINGLE STEP is activated. A precondition is that a program has been selected.

L signal In AUTOMATIC MODE, after program deselection or after CONTROL RESET.

Note SINGLE BLOCK MODE is also affected by the CNC input signals AUTOMATIC (O12.4) and SINGLE BLOCK (O12.5) (these signals are only present with CC 220M!).

Diagram:

SK AUTOMATIC (O)

SK SINGLE BLOCK (O)

SK PROGRAM DESELECT

SK PROGRAM SELECTION

(NOT) FEED (I)

MACHINE MODE

SK SWITCHING FUNCTION (O)

4−98 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.2 MANUAL DATA INPUT MODE 1 output signal

H signal MDI MODE is only issued when it is permitted, the MANUAL MODE is selected and a function in the MDI mode has been entered. If you stay in this mode, the signal continues to be present.

L signal When manual mode is deselected by a mode change, the NC executes the input data following NC Start and then cancels the signal. If no output data are avialable, LOW signal is output after group mode is quit. CONTROL RESET cancels the signal directly.

Diagram: (MDI MODE can also be replaced by SWITCH FUNCTION MODE)

SK PROGRAM SELECTION

SK AUTOMATIC (O)

SK MDI (O)

SK CONTROL RESET (O)

4−99 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.3 JOG MODE 1 output signal

H signal After actuating the JOG softkey or following a rising slope at the CNC interface input (O16.6/O16.7).

L signal If JOG MODE was activated by SK JOG, this signal is cancelled again by means of the following operations: − Approach reference point − Zero Reset − Renewed operation of SK JOG − Negative slope at digital interface JOG (O16.6/O16.7) − Renewed pushing of the group mode key MACHINE again when already in the group mode MACHINE − Pushing the level return key in the MACHINE MODE. − Switching to group mode NC (execute), MANUAL INPUT, PROGRAM MEMORY (edit) or CORRECTION (from MACHINE MODE or DIAGNOSTIC MODE).

If Jog was activated by the JOG interface signal (O16.6/O16.7), a switch to other group modes does not abort Jog mode.

Note When switching to the DIAGNOSTIC group mode (from MACHINE MODE), the IF signal JOG MODE stays on.

4−100 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.4 APPROACH REFERENCE POINT 1 output signal

H signal The signal is given when the REFERENCE POINT softkey is actauated or G74 or G174 or CNC input signal 16.1 (REFERENCE POINT APPROACH) is active.

L signal The signal dispappears when all reference points are reached or the Software limit switch range monitor" condition is fulfilled for all axes. Independent of started or nonstarted axes, the signal disppears when the follow ing operation are performed: − Jog Mode (SK) − Zero Reset (SK) − Switching function (SK) −Direct operations of group modes except for Diagnostic (only when REFERENCE POINT APPROACH mode is initiated by interface signal O16.1 and not by softkey). − Level return in Machine group mode.

Although FEED HOLD interrupts the Reference point approach, it does not inter rupt the status and so does not interrupt the IF signal either.

Diagram

SK REFERENCE POINT

REF. PT. APPROACH (O)

SK JOG MODE (O)

START REF. PT. APPROACH

(NOT) FEED HOLD (O)

AXES TRAVERSE TO REF. PT.

REF. PT. REACHED (A) ALL AXES

4−101 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.5 REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES 1 output signal

H signal This signal appears at the interface when all axes have reached their reference point.

Exceptions: − Masked asynchronous axes (P106 = yes). − Axes that require no ref. pt. (P 1510 = yes). − Axes for which DRIVE ON is not present. This signal stays on for as long as the SOFTWARE LIMITS RANGE MONITORING" condition is fulfilled by the CNC.

L signal After switching on CNC. Exception: If the DRIVE ON signals of all axes are LOW, then this signal has HIGH level after switching on.

Diagram

SWITCH ON CNC

REF. PT. APPROACH (O)

ALL AXES REFERENCED

SK CONTROL RESET

START REF. PT. APPROACH

Note The individual REFERENCE POINT REACHED signals (CNC outputs 15.0 to 15.7) always form the sumcheck signal REF. PT. REACHED ALL AXES. The individual signals are also present for as long as the condition SOFTWARE LI MITS RANGE MONITORING is fulfilled. After the reference point is approached again, the signals stay on (see also CNC outputs 18.0 to 18.7, REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES). If an axis was masked with DRIVE ON while approaching a reference point, the REF. PT. REACHED ALL AXES signal still appears when all axes that were switched on with DRIVE ON have reached their reference points.

If a masked axis is now switched on for the first time, the REFERENCE POINTS RE ACHED ALL AXES signal is cancelled. The PLC can now initiate the required Refer ence point approach for the axis concerned. Evaluation of the individual REF. PT. REACHED signals is also possible.

4−102 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I8.6 RAPID (TRAVERSE) 1 output signal

H signal The CNC transmits this signal for as long as G0 or G10 is active in the Jog, NC (ex ecute) or MDI modes.

L signal In all other CNC modes.

Note The RAPID output signal is only formed by synchronous axes.

I8.7 PROGRAM RUNNING 1 output signal

General The output signal PROGRAM RUNNING is used to capture the execute time or the running time of a part program.

H signal −For each programmed axis movement but not in Jog mode. −In AUTO MODE during a program running time. −In SINGLE STEP MODE as long as the active block is being executed. −In MDI MODE as long as the input block is being executed. − Also in FEED 0% (Potentiometer setting)

L signal −In MDI MODE and AUTOMATIC/SINGLE STEP modes when there is no block to execute or when the active input block has been executed.

−In all modes when FEED HOLD is on. −In Jog mode. − After M0/M1, M2/M30.

4−103 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I9.0 TEST WITHOUT MOVEMENT 1 output signal

General This function selected with the ALL AXES INHIBIT softkey is used for program test without axis movement.

H signal When ALL AXES INHIBIT softkey is active.

Note If the Reference points have not yet been approached following switchon, then this is not necessary when ALL AXES INHIBIT is active, either (performed CNC inter nally).

Only Transfer Allow may be selected for a perfect program run so that a program can be run under the control of the PLC.

Other signals such as: − DRIVE ON − (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP − FEED ALLOW can be given, but need not be, because they are simulated CNCinternally. This means that program test is also possible without the machine turned on. The entire interface remains active even during a Test Without Movement.

I9.1 CONTROL RESET 1 output signal

H signal The signal is on for as long as the CONTROL RESET softkey is pressed. A pulse of at least 250 ms is present at I9.1 following external CONTROL RESET (see CNC Input 16.4).

Note CONTROL RESET can be used to induce defined conditions at the machine and CNC in certain circumstances. CONTROL RESET must be used with the utmost caution − especially when gener ated externally. See also the Note under CNC Input signal 16.4.

4−104 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I9.2 BLOCK SLASH 1 output signal

H signal Is on when BLOCK SLASH softkey is active.

L signal

BLOCK SLASH softkey is not active.

Note If you wish the BLOCK SLASH softkey to be active, this output must be gated with the input of the same name (O5.2).

I9.3 MULTIRECEIPT 1 output signal

General This signal must be seen in conjunction with the Multiple Input (see O6.5, O7.0−O11.7) and tells the PLC that data have been accepted by the CNC.

If invalid MULTIMODE signals are present at the NC input or the option for a particu lar mode is not applied, the OPTION INACTIVE display will appear and no MULTI RECEIPT is given.

Diagram

MULTISTROBE (I)

MULTIRECEIPT (O)

New data (at the earliest)

4−105 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I9.4 MANUAL PROGRAM SELECTION 1 output signal

General Programs can be selected and activated in a variety of ways: −By manual input at the CNC panel −By PLC at Multiple input (see CNC Inputs 7.0 to 7.7) −By DNC from the HOST computer (see CNC Output 21.2)

H signal Appears when program number is acknowledged (press ENTER key).

L signal Appears when of linking the selected program is complete.

Diagram: (a program is active)

SK PROGRAM SELECTION

Program number input

ENTER key

Program activation

Possible Linking Run

MANUAL PROGRAM SELECT

4−106 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I9.5 GO BLOCK 1 output signal

General GO BLOCK is one of 4 ways of direct entry to the program. From the beginning to the preselected block, the CNC computes all data without axis movement and waits until the signal RETURN TO CONTOUR (CNC input 20.6) is tripped.

H signal After operating the GO BLOCK softkey and entering the block number (ENTER), the signal appears at the interface.

L signal Appears when GO BLOCK is terminated. This happens when the last auxiliary func tions have been issued following RETURN TO CONTOUR.

Note The interface remains active during the computer run. The PLC must ensure that DRIVE ON of all axes involved is present during Go Block. Machine parameter P2010can be used to define which of these 2010 possibilities is to be activated: −No output of auxiliary functions (M, S, T etc.) − Output of auxiliary functions last programmed in a block − Output of all auxiliary functions (normal mode) Diagram

Computer run

AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT (O)

GO BLOCK (O)

RETURN TO CONTOUR (I)

REENTRY ACTIVE (O)

Output of the last aux. functions

Ouput of the last aux. func tions in the programmed block Approach the position

Time response of the IF signals with Go Block and Ouput of the last Aux. Func tions. The interface signals GO BLOCK and AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT are set as soon as the computer run starts (see CNC ouput 11.7). At the end of the computer run, the AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT signal is reset and the system waits for the RETURN TO CON TOUR signal. As soon as the RTURN TO CONTOUR signal arrives, the REENTRY ACTIVE signal (see CNC output 17.1) is set and the last programmed auxiliary func tions are issued depending on machine parameter P2010.

4−107 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

When all auxiliary functions are issued − or none need be issued − the GO BLOCK signal is reset. Execution of the selected block can now commence. Any auxiliary functions pro grammed in this block will be issued and the programmed position approached. Once the selected block has been executed, the axes are in position and the RE TURN TO CONTOUR signal is no longer set, the REENTRY ACTIVE signal is can celled.

I9.6 FEEDRATE 0% 1 output signal

General An axis movement can be prevented by FEED HOLD, FEED ALLOW or with the feed potentiometer. If the feed potentiometer is used (0% setting), the CNC will issue the signal FEEDRATE 0%.

H signal When no programmed Rapid is active and the potentiometer value is less than 3% of the total potentiometer range (see Machine parameters 2503 to 2057, para meters MIN" and MAX").

I9.7 PROGRAM EXISTS 1 output signal

General This signal must be seen in conjunction with the PROGRAM SEARCH function via the Multiple Input of the CNC (see O7.0−=7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE). It signals whether a given program is available in the CNC or not.

H signal Appears after manual input, input in switch functions, program select by softkey and external program select by the PLC, provided the program is available in the CNC.

4−108 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I10.0 EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT 1 output signal

General A program can be automatically selected (activated) by the PLC via the Multiple Input of the CNC (see O7.0 to O7.7, MULTIMODE VALUE). The CNC acknowledges the program selection with this output signal.

H signal The CNC issues this signal for at least the duration of the MULTIRECEIPT (I9.1) if a program was able to be activated. If a program must be linked first, then the signal duration is extended by the linking time.

I10.1 NC READY 1 output signal

General A selected program cannot be started until the control reports NC READY.

H signal Appears after manual input, input in switch functions, program selection by softkey and external program selection. It is cancelled by the CNC by an acknowledge fol lowing NC START.

Diagram

Program selection

NC READY (O)

NC START (I)

Program running

4−109 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I10.2 SPINDLE UP TO SPEED (SPINDLE) 1 output signal

H signal Compares command speed with actual speed. If the difference is greater than the percentage value defined in machine parameter P 7016, the interface signal SPINDLE UP TO SPEED is issued. The signal is issued for all programmed speeds depending on the potentiometer.

L signal As long as the SPINDLE STOP signal is active, this signal stays LOW unless a pro grammed command speed is active.

Note: For 2nd spindle see I22.2!

I10.3 RAPID 0% 1 output signal

H signal The signal appears when a Rapid Override value of 0% is set at the potentiometer.

Note The RAPID output signal is only formed by synchronous axes.

4−110 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I10.4 − I10.6 MSD MODE VALUE 3 output signals

General The Machine Error and Status Display (MSD) is accessed via the DIAGNOSTIC GM and the DIAGNOSTIC MACHINE softkey. This facilitates the display and scrolling of up to 7 screen pages with 32 MSD texts each. The MSD page currently active at the CNC is transmitted to the PLC as a binary value.

H signal The appropriate outputs are set each time one of the 7 pages is selected at the panel. MSD page 1 is always transmitted to the PLC when the mode is quit and fol lowing Control reset.

Application Transmits the MSD page number currently active (displayed) at the CNC to the PLC.

Examples

Action I10.6 I10.5 I10.4 Select page 1: L L H Select page 2: L H L Select page 3: L H H : : : Select page 7: H H H

I10.7 CPL DIALOG STROBE 1 output signal

As the transmission of CPL data to the PLC, from CPL in dialog" as well as from CPL under execution" is possible, the PLC must be able to detect which CPL task the data originate from. This is possible through change signals I7.7 and I10.7. Note the following: Data from CPL under execution": Strobe on I7.7 Data from CPL in dialog": Strobe on I7.7 and I10.7 (method of procedure for data transfer, see I3.0 to I7.7).

4−111 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I11.0 PROGRAM STOP AT M0/M1 1 output signal

General M0 means programmed stop", M1 optional programmed stop". These two M codes are used for deliberate program interrupts by the programmer or operator. Start again with NC START.

H signal Appears when M0 or M1 is active in the part program irrespective of whether the mode is AUTOMATIC, SINGLE BLOCK / SINSTEP, MDI. The signal is set at the same time as the M strobe (CHANGE SIGNAL M) and remains statically on.

Note M0/M1 has no delete or suppress function in the CNC.

M0/M1 is also issued via the Multiple Output.

I11.1 PROGRAM END AT M2 OR M30 1 output signal

General M2/M30 is programmed in a separate block at the end of a program; there is no difference between M2 and M30 internal to the CNC.

H signal Appears when M2 or M30 becomes active in a main program. The signal is set with the M strobe (CHANGE SIGNAL M) and remains statically on.

L signal After the CNC is switched on. With the next M function. With the next NC Start. After CONTROL RESET.

Note M2/M30 sets all functions to switchon status (except G70/G71 and G14/G15). M2/M30 is also issued via the Multiple Output.

For VA operation in conjunction with DNC (=P0 mode or direct execution by DNC), this signal is not issued statically after the end of the program, since the program is deselected automatically.

4−112 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I11.2 THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G 33) 1 output signal

General If the THREAD CUTTING option is activated and G 33 is programmed, this signal is issued at the interface during thread cutting.

H signal Is issued when a G33 block is present for execution.

L signal Is issued when another G code from the same group (G0, G1, G2, G3, G5, G10, G11, G12, G17, G73) becomes active.

Application e.g. preventing FEED HOLD during thread cutting.

Note Feed and spindle Override potentiometers are not active during G33 operation.

4−113 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I11.3 G 63 active 1 output signal

General G 63 causes Feedrate 100% to be set. The programmer is thus able to prevent a manual feed override for certain program sections for technological reasons.

H signal Is output when the block in which G 63 is programmed is available for execution. The feedrate potentiometer is then no longer active.

L signal Is issued when the block in which G 66 is programmed is available for execution.

Note If it is intended for G63 to deactivate the spindle override, then this signal must be gated with the SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100% input signal (Spindle override 100%, see O17.7 and O24.4).

I11.5 SWITCH FUNCTION MODE 1 output signal

H signal Is issued when SWITCH FUNCTION mode is active. If you stay in this mode, the signal continues to be present.

L signal If the SWITCH FUNCTION mode is deselected by a mode change or a level return, the control first executes all input data following NC START and then cancels the signal. CONTROL RESET cancels the signal immediately.

Diagram (SWITCH FUNCTION can be replaced by the MDI mode)

SK SWITCH FUNCTION

SWITCH FUNCTION (O)

DIAGNOSTIC GM

DATA INPUT

NC START

Data being executed

4−114 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I11.6 OPTIONAL STOP 1 output signal

General You are able to optionally activate a programmed stop by softkey in order to per form specific activities (program override, visual inspection etc.)

H signal Appears as soon as the softkey OPTIONAL STOP is pressed in the NC group mode. The softkey is shown reversed if the function is active.

L signal Appears when function is not active (softkey OPTIONAL STOP is not shown rev ersed).

Note Must be gated with output signal of the same name (O6.0) if the function is required.

I11.7 AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT 1 output signal

General During Program Test or Go Block (reentry at any point in the program), the CNC can inhibit the output of auxiliary functions in order to suppress machine functions and sequences.

H signal Appears when AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT softkey is active; softkey is highlighted (pro gram test). Appears when MP 2010 is set to 1 or 2 in conjunction with Go Block (see also dia gram under Signal I9.5, GO BLOCK).

L signal When the conditions described under the H signal are cancelled: −AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT softkey not active. − Computer run to the selected block is completed.

4−115 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I12.0 − I13.7 TRAVEL RANGE 1 ... 16 16 output signals

General Mechanical switches or switch ranges on the machine can be replaced by elec tronic ones for certain applications. Machine parameters P 6100 and P 6200 pro vide 20 possible settings that can be freely assigned to the axes. A distinction is made between two types of signal output: −16 signals to the digital interface: −4 signals at the High Speed I/O on the Servo loop card (for fast signal output)

Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the digital interface does not commence until all axes have referenced. Monitoring of the travel limit ranges at the High Speed I/O of the servo loop card commences as soon as the relevant axis has reached its reference point.

H signal Appears when the particular axis moves within the set travel limit range or reaches the position defined in the machine parameter.

Note The travel limit range can also be used for point monitoring, provided minimum and maximum values are identical.

Application Replacement of mechanical limit switches. Monitoring of certain positions where special functions are supposed to take place, e.g. tool change, pallet change etc.

Working areas of axes can also be monitored in relation to one another with the aid of the PLC.

Diagram: Travel range/Signal output

1. RANGE 2. RANGE (PT.) 3. RANGE

ÉÉ ÉÉ

ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉÉ

REF. PT.

ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉÉ

1. RANGE

2. RANGE

3. RANGE

4−116 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I14.0 FEED MM/REV (G95) 1 output signal

General The CNC allows axes to be jogged in both mm/min and in mm/rev mode.

H signal Appears when softkey JOG MM/REV and one of the manual feeds FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW is selected and the modes JOG, NC (execute) or MDI are active.

L signal In all other modes.

I14.1 CUTTING SPEED CONSTANT (G96) 1 output signal

General The CNC signals the modal status of CONSTANT CUTTING SPEED (Vconstant) to the interface.

H signal The signal is statically issued following manual entry of G96 in the MDI mode or programming of G96.

L signal LOW signal is statically issued following manual entry of G97 in the MDI mode or when G97 is programmed.

The on condition is G97. Accordingly a LOW signal is present at the interface after CNC is switched, or following activation of CONTROL RESET.

Application Signal G97 can be used to bridge the spindle runup monitor in the logic circuit to form Feed Allow (Feed Allow is normally disabled until the SPINDLE UP TO SPEED signal is issued by the CNC). However, since the speed can change constantly when G96 is active and the SPINDLE UP TO SPEED signal is issued depending on the spindle dynamics, Feed Allow should, in interpolation mode, not be constantly enabled or disabled.

4−117 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I14.2 SPINDLE IS ORIENTED 1 output signal

H signal SPINDLE IS ORIENTED is issued when the spindle has reached the InPosition range (P 7012), the axisrelated InPosition signal is set and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (corresponding M code) is still active.

L signal Is issued when − after the SPINDLE ORIENT function − new selections (M3/M13, M4/M14, Gear range change, Control reset, M30 or M2 as main program end) are active for the spindle.

Note: For 2nd spindle see I22.0!

I14.3 TOOL LIFE EXPIRED 1 output signal

General The CNC issues this signal when the tool currently fitted reaches the preset tool life limit, provided the tool life monitor is activated.

H signal Is issued as a static signal when the life of the active tool has expired, and stays on until it has been replaced either by a new or an alternative tool.

L signal Is issued when tool life has not yet expired.

Applications Used to operate a warning lamp at the machine panel or to prepare the tool changer to replace the unusable tool with a new one.

4−118 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I14.4 LIFE OF BASIC AND ALTERNATIVE TOOLS EXPIRED 1 output signal

H signal Is issued as a static signal when, with the tool life monitor switched on, a tool is fitted whose basic and alternative tool life has expired.

L signal Is issued when tool life monitor is off or when a residual basic and alternative tool life is still available for the fitted tool.

Application Operates texts within the machine error and status display (MSD). Holds current machining operation, e.g. to fit a new tool.

I14.5 RAPID POT 100% SET 1 output signal

General The CNC sends to the PLC the interface signal, which indicates the 100% evalu ation of the Rapid potentiometer by manual operation of the SET RAPID 100% func tion key.

H signal Is issued as a static signal after activation of the SET RAPID POT TO 100% function (see O21.2). L signal is issued by rotating the rapid potentiometer.

L signal After the SET RAPID POT TO 100% function is deactivated.

Applications Used to drive the indicator lamp in the corresponding function key. Ouput as recorder signal for recording machine data.

4−119 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I14.6 SPINDLE POT 100% SET 1 output signal

General The CNC sends to the PLC the interface signal, which indicates the 100% evalu ation of the spindle potentiometer by manual operation of the SET SPINDLE 100% function key. For the 2nd spindle see I22.7!

H signal Issued as a static signal after activation of the function SPINDELOVERRIDE100% (see O17.7).

L signal After deactivation of SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100% function.

Application Used to drive the indicator lamp in the corresponding function key. Ouput as recorder signal for recording machine data.

I14.7 TARGET ACHIEVED 1 output signal

General The CNC transmits this interface signal to the PLC when the actual piece count equals the target piece count. This signal is only decoded when the piece counter is activated (see O17.3).

H signal Is issued as a static signal when actual count = target count.

L signal Is issued when the actual count is not equal to the target count.

Application Drives indicator lamp in function key for AUTOMATIC RESTART MODE (see O20.5). Function interlock for the automatic barstock advance.

4−120 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I15.0 − E 15.7 REFERENCE POINT REACHED 8 output signals

General After switching on the CNC and the machine, the active axes must approach the reference point. After the axes have referenced, the software limit monitors become active and these signals are also issued for the corresponding axes (see also I18.0 to I18.7).

H signal Appears when the reference point of the particular axis is reached. The signal also remains static on if the reference point is approached again at a later time (unlike the REF. PT. REACHED ALL AXES signal; see I18.0 to I18.7). Spindle: HIGH signal is issued after SPINDLE ORIENT is initiated when the first marker comes, even though the spindle executes several more revolutions. HIGH signal is also issued as soon as M3 or M4 are entered.

L signal − After the CNC is switched on. − With CLEAR ALL LOGIC (softkey) − With measuring system errors

Note CONTROL RESET does not affect this output signal. An axis shut down with DRIVE ON does not need to reference; the signal for the axis concerned stays LOW or HIGH. The REFERENCE POINT REACHED signals together form the group signal REF. PTS. REACHED ALL AXES (I8.5). Diagram

SK REFERENCE POINT

JOG 1.A ... 4.A (I)

REF. PT. REACHED (O) 1.A ... 4.A

REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES

I16.0 SPINDLE STOP 1 output signal

H signal The signal appears when the speed defined by machine parameter P7021 is un dershot. For the 2nd spindle see I22.4!

4−121 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I16.1 IDLING SPEED REACHED 1 output signal

General The idling speed always becomes active when the command gear range does not coincide with the actual gear range (O19.4 to O20.3). This can also happen after the machine is switched on.

H signal This signal is issued when the actual speed is less than:

P7009 x P7016 P7009 + 100

Note When a frequency is superimposed on the idling speed (see Machine para meters" manual, P7010 and P7011), the maximum amplitude of the superimposed speed is included in the tolerance range. The signal stays on until the gear range is acknowledged. For the 2nd spindle see I22.3!

Diagram

SOLD (PROGR.)

SNEW (PROGR.)

IDLING SPEED ACTIVE

ACTUAL SPEED

IDLING SPEED REACHED

GEAR RANGE CHANGE

I16.2 SPINDLE POT 0% 1 output signal

H signal This signal appears when a spindle override value of 0% is set. For the 2nd spindle see I22.6!

4−122 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I16.3 SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT 1 output signal

H signal This signal is output when the spindle is oriented but no position has been pro grammed. It stays on until new selections for the spindle are activated. For the 2nd spindle see I22.1!

I16.4 CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC) 1 output signal

For description see Caxis signals O27.0 to O27.3.

I16.5 TAPPING ACTIVE 1 output signal

H signal For the duration of thread tapping.

Note − During thread tapping, only the spindle potentiometer is active.

−If the CNC input signal INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR changes during tap ping, this does not become active until tapping is completed.

− Tapping does not start until all the axes involved have reached their InPosi tion ranges (InPos. range for tapping axes see Machine parameter P 1508, for the spindle see Machine parameter P 7012).

− DRIVE ON − linkages for the spindle must be considered!

− Additional information on tapping: Programming guide, function G32.

4−123 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I16.7 REVERS. RANGE REACHED 1 output signal

General This signal is only present when the Asynchronous Reciprocal Axis" option is ap plied. If an axis is reciprocating, this signal will be issued for feedin movements at pro grammable reversal points.

H signal Appears when the reciprocal axis has reached an InPosition window at the left or right hand reversal point programmed in the part program.

Diagram

SPEED PROFILE Reversal point

REVERS.RANGE REACHED

TRANSFER ALLOW

TRAVEL COMMAND OF THE FEED AXES

I17.0 MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION ACTIVE 1 output signal

General The signal is issued by the CNC when the control detects a positive edge at the CNC input O27.5 START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION. It remains HIGH for as long as the activation process of the milling head compensation has been success fully completed by the CNC, for 350 ms at the least in any case. If the CNC cannot set the correction values (if, for example, TRANSFER ALLOW and (NOT) FEED HOLD have not been isolated), HIGH level remains at I17.0. In this case, the error source must be removed and CONTROL RESET or CLEAR ALL LOGIC must be carried out. Diagram

START MILL. HEAD COMP. O27.5 MILL. HEAD COMP. ACTIVE I17.0 T0 T1

T0 = at least 350 ms T1 = maximum 1 s (typ. 500 ms); irrespective of system workload

4−124 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I17.1 REENTRY ACTIVE 1 output signal

General Return to Contour can be started in conjunction with Go Block. The CNC outputs this signal for the duration of the return.

H signal Appears when the RETURN TO CONTOUR key is pressed if the contour was previ ously left.

L signal Appears when the approached position is reached (after return).

Diagram See under GO BLOCK signal (I9.5).

I17.2 PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION ACTIVE 1 output signal

General The interface signal is set when the program is selected in program optimization mode. It identifies the active mode and stays set until the program active in Pro gram Optimization is either deselected or aborted by a runtime error (timeout).

H signal Program optimization is active.

L signal The active program in Program Optimization has been deselected or aborted by a timeout.

Note Changing from Program Optimization to another Group Mode does not reset the signal.

4−125 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I17.3 LINKING ACTIVE 1 output signal

General A linking run is executed if a program’s link table is not yet available in the control when that program is selected. Another program can also be linked in the back ground even though a program is currently being run. The same is also true for a linking after system initialisation (Reset, Load Back up, Delete logic, Switch on).

H signal Is issued for as long as a linking run is active.

Application As no new linking process can be initialised during a linking run, this has to be properly interlocked in the PLC.

Note See also MANUAL and EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT (I9.4 and I10.0)

I17.4 GO BLOCK WITHOUT COMP. 1 output signal

General A GO BLock can be executed with this signal with or without compensations. With word coupling, the PLC transmits the corrections to the CNC from the tool table.

H signal Appears when the WITHOUT TOOL COMP. softkey is activated within the Go Block.

L signal Appears when the above mentioned softkey is not active or is deactivated within the Go Block.

Note Switching the CNC on or off, or CONTROL RESET has no effect on the preset status of the softkey.

4−126 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I17.5 TEST RUN WITHOUT COMP. 1 output signal

General Test without movement (All Axes Inhibit) can be executed by this signal with or with out adjustments. With word coupling, the PLC transmits the adjustments to the CNC from the tool table.

H signal Appears when the WITHOUT TOOL COMP. softkey is activated within the test mode.

L signal Appears when the above mentioned softkey is not active or is deactivated within the test mode.

Note Switching the CNC on or off, or CONTROL RESET has no effect on the preset status of the softkey.

I17.7 PROGRAM DESELECT 1 output signal

General A PLC connected to the CNC must be able to recognise when an active program at the CNC is deselected, in order to be then able to initialise closing measures.

H signal Is always used when an active program is deselected. It remains static on until a program is selected anew or CONTROL RESET is actuated.

4−127 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I18.0 − I18.7 REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES 8 output signals

General REFERENCE POINT REACHED ALL AXES is an essential precondition for the or dered and safe program sequence of a machine tool.

The CNC transmits the Referencing time to the PLC via the CNC output O8.5, REF ERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE.

H signal Appears as soon as the reference point is reached. Caution: Does not appear for spindle(s)!

L signal Appears after switching on. Appears when repeated referencing that is not required by the CNC is per formed (unlike I15.0 to I15.7, REF. PT. REACHED) and until referencing by each axis is complete.

I19.0 − I19.7 EXT. POS. REACHED 1ST to 8TH AXIS 8 output signals

General The PLC can inquire via CNC interface outputs I19.0 to I19.7 (EXT. POS. REACHED 1 to 8 axis) whether the preset end position of an axis − started via the external sig nal description − has been reached (see also signal description O7.0 to O7.7 MULTIMODE VALUE 1−128, section Transfer of feed and axis position set values from PLC to CNC").

H signal After reaching the end position, the CNC firstly generates the axisspecific signal AXIS IN POSITION (I2.x) and then sets I19.x to High level. This output remains set until the corresponding axis is restarted via an external set value input, or control reset is entered.

L signal As soon as synchronous or asynchronous axes are started via the multiinterface, the corresponding CNC interface outputs I19.x are set to Low level. This also applies when the axis does not traverse at all due to an error! If an axis is stopped via FEED ALLOW (O1.0 to 1.7), the signal I19.x of the corre sponding axis remains at LOW level! If a new set value is stipulated, the signal will not change until the new position has reached High.

4−128 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I20.0 DNC/NC START 1 output signal

General The DNC computer is able to perform a program start, but requires an Enable from the PLC to do this. The latter decides whether the NC START is performed depend ing on allow conditions.

H signal (EDNC) When the DNC computer issues the STR" command. (Signal approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW)

H signal (LSV2DNC) The signal is set by the CNC on receipt of the DNC command M-CS–– " when the input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) has LOW level (CNC is then in the DNC Re mote Mode).

DNC/NCSTART (ByteO20.0)

DNC/PLCRECEIPT (ByteI21.0)

NCSTART (ByteI5.4)

HIGHorLOWpossible Functionisexecuted FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC

Note: If no suitable precautions are taken in the PLC program, it is possible that the input signal NC START was not set as a result of the output signal DNC/NC START but as the result of simultaneous operation of the NC Start button. In this case, the control sends a function acknowledge to the HOST in the form of a status message even though the NC Start" action was not in response to the DNC call. In this instance, the input signal DNC/PLC RECEIPT must be subsequently set by the PLC. The CNC will then reset the DNC/NC START output signal. The PLC will not perform any other DNC commands until this happens!

4−129 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I20.1 DNC/NC FEED HOLD 1 output signal

General The DNC computer can interrupt an ongoing program if the PLC so allows. This in turn will depend on the momentary machine conditions.

H signal (EDNC) When the DNC computer issues the STP" command. (Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW). There is no checkback from the CNC to the DNC computer.

Note Feed Hold can, for example, be cleared with the next DNC/NC START or with CON TROL RESET.

H signal (LSV2DNC) When the DNC computer sends the telegram M-CH", the CNC first checks for the following conditions: −is CNC in DNC REMOTE" mode and − has the PLC already acknowledged the last DNC instruction.

If these conditions are met, the CNC sets the output signal DNC/FEED HOLD to HIGH level. If the PLC allows FEED HOLD (any gate operations must be considered), it ac knowledges the command with the DNC/PLCReceipt signal (O21.0) and sets the interface signal (NOT) FEED HOLD (O5.5) to LOW.

Caution: The PLC must set the LOW signal (NOT) FEED HOLD and DNC/PLC Receipt within the same PLC run !

DNC/FEEDHOLD

DNC/PLCRECEIPT

(NOT)FEEDHOLD

HIGHorLOWpossible FunctioninterlockedbyPLC Functionisexecuted

The CNC resets the DNC/FEED HOLD signal again after it receives the DNC/PLC Receipt signal.

4−130 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I20.2 DNC/NC FEED HOLD OFF 1 output signal

Application The DNC computer can cancel an existing Feed Hold again (LSV2DNC only) pro vided the PLC permits. This in turn will depend on the momentary machine condi tions.

H signal When the DNC computer sends the telegram M-CR", the CNC first checks for the following conditions: −is CNC in DNC REMOTE" mode and − has the PLC already acknowledged the last DNC instruction.

If these conditions are met, the CNC sets the output signal DNC/FEED HOLD OFF to HIGH level. If the PLC allows FEED HOLD to be cancelled, it acknowledges the command with the DNC/PLCReceipt signal (O21.0) and sets the interface signal (NOT) FEED HOLD to HIGH.

Caution: The PLC must set the LOW signal (NOT) FEED HOLD and DNC/PLC Receipt within the same PLC run !

DNC/FEEDHOLDOFF

DNC/PLCRECEIPT

(NOT)FEEDHOLD

HIGHorLOWpossible FunctioninterlockedbyPLC Functionexecuted.

4−131 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I20.6 DNC/CONTROL RESET 1 output signal

General The DNC computer can request Control Reset from the CNC. Whether CONTROL RESET is actually performed or not will depend on the PLC permission".

H signal (EDNC) When the DNC computer issues the CTR" command. (Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW). The signal must be gated in the PLC. The PLC then decides whether Control Reset will actually be initiated or not.

H signal (LSV2DNC) The signal is set by the CNC on receipt of the DNC command M–CN–– when the input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) has LOW level (CNC is then in the DNC Re mote Mode). The following conditions must also be met for the function to be ex ecuted:

. The last DNC command to the PLC is acknowledged

. No program is just being executed (NC status is WAITING, READY or STOPPED)

. None of the following diagnostics programs are active: − Machine Parameter Program (D4) − Switch over Texts (D8) − Program EEPROM (D9)

DNC/CONTROLRESET (ByteO20.6)

DNC/PLCRECEIPT (ByteI21.0)

CONTROLRESET (ByteI16.4)

CONTROLRESET (ByteO9.1) approx. 250 ms HIGHorLOWpossible Functionexecuted NonewDNCcommandsarepossible FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC untilafterthispointintime.

With the CONTROL RESET" output signal (byte O9.1) the CC 220 tells the PLC that Control Reset has been executed. The signal is present for approx. 250 ms at the output and is then reset by the CNC.

4−132 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I20.7 DNC ON 1 output signal

General A static signal that signals to the PLC whether DNC is active or not.

H signal DNC is active.

L signal DNC is switched off.

Application For interlock purposes in the PLC.

4−133 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I21.0 DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH 1 output signal

General Via the PLC, the DNC computer is able to have individual/all axes (except spindle and ANALOG type axes) approach a reference point, provided the PLC gives the necessary enables. With EDNC, singleaxis Reference Point Approach cannot be initialised.

H signal (EDNC) When the DNC computer issues the RFP" command. (Signal for approx. 500 ms at HIGH, then back to LOW). This signal is used to start a Reference Point Approach installed in the PLC.

H signal (LSV2DNC) The DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" signal is set by the CNC after receiv ing the DNC command M–RF–-", provided the following conditions are met:

. the input signal LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC)" has LOW level (CNC is now in DNC Remote mode),

. the last command to the PLC has been acknowledged,

. NC status is READY", WAITING" or STOPPED",

. of the applied axes with DRIVE ON" status, no singleaxis lockout is active,

. there is no fault present in the CNC (except DNC fault),

. overall lockout is not active.

The applied axes are checked for the presence of these conditions (exception: spindle and analog" type axes).

At the same time as DNC/REF. PT. APPROACH", the CNC activates the DNC/1.AXIS" to DNC/8.AXIS" output signals (see I24.0 to I24.7) of all axes for which Reference Point Approach is permitted and/or desired. This also applies for an active axis. The output signals of axes for which DRIVE ON" is not set or for which YES" is entered in Machine Parameter P 106 ("Asynchronous axis/Spindle not for screen display") are not set. The PLC confirms the command by setting the CNC input signal DNC/PLC RE CEIPT", whereupon the CNC resets the DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" signal again and checks the CNC input signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" (see O16.1). If the command was not executed by the PLC, the CNC aborts the function and sends an error message to the HOST. The CNC interprets an active REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" input signal as a positive receipt from the PLC (Reference Point Approach is permitted). REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" must stay on until the reference points have been approached or until the function is aborted. The CNC output signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE" (see I8.4) stays on for as long as the Reference Point Approach" function is active in the control. In

4−134 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

this condition the PLC must initiate the Reference Point Approach operation for the selected axes by setting the appropriate CNC input signals J O G 1. AXIS" to J O G 8. AXIS" (see O13.0 to O14.7). An axis is selected when the CNC output signal which corresponds to that axis is set, i.e. DNC/1. AXIS" to DNC/8. AXIS". The start sequence and direction of the Reference Point Approach are arbitrary.

Reference Point Approach is terminated by the CNC either by quitting the function or when all started axes have reached their reference points. Quitting is possible by operator input at the control system or by the PLC. To do this, the PLC must reset the CNC signal REFERENCE POINT APPROACH" before the axes have refer enced.

Provided the function has been properly completed, the CC 320 M sends a status message with the Reference points reached" result; following a quit it sends an appropriate error message to the HOST. The output signals DNC/1.AXIS" to DNC/8.AXIS" are reset again by the CNC after completing the Reference Point Approach.

DNC/1.AXIS (ByteO24.0)

DNC/8.AXIS (ByteO24.7)

DNC/REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACH (ByteO21.0)

DNC/PLCRECEIPT (ByteI21.0)

REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACH (ByteI16.1)

REFERENCEPOINTAPPROACHMODE (ByteO8.4)

JOG1.AXIS (ByteI13.0

JOG8.AXIS (ByteI14.7)

HIGHorLOWpossible NonewDNCcommands Functionexecuted arepossibleuntiltheipoint FunctionisinterlockedbyPLC.

4−135 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I21.2 DNC PROGRAM SELECT 1 output signal

General Depending on the preselected LOCAL/REMOTE mode, the DNC computer is able to perform a direct program selection (i.e. without PLC intervention) in the CNC. During program select and during any linking time, the CNC sends this signal to the PLC as a message.

H signal (EDNC) When the DNC computer selects the program i.e. activates it in the CNC. For command syntax for the HOST see EDNC manual. For diagram see under H signal (LSV2DNC)".

H signal (LSV2DNC) The signal is set by the CNC after receiving the DNC command M–SP––" (Activate a table or program select), M–CS––" (Program select with automatic start) or RPPP––" (Direct execution by DNC interface) when the input signal LOCAL/RE MOTE (DNC)" has LOW level (CNC is then in DNC Remote mode). The following conditions must also be met for the function to be executed:

. When selecting a program: − Reference points are known −NC status is WAITING, READY or STOPPED − The program may not be initiated by a CPL program or the Editor −No program may be linked in the background if no Link table exists for the selected program.

. No program may be active yet when a table is activated.

. Program/Table must exist in the CNC.

. Program/Table may not be protected against execution.

The signal stays on as long as the CNC is linking the selected program or until the linking run is aborted (e.g. if an error occurs). The PLC may not perform an exter nal program select during this time.

DNC/PROGRAMSELECT Linktime

Note During Direct execution by DNC interface", the DNC/PROGRAM SELECT" signal is HIGH until the status of the CNC changes to READY (see EDNC and LSV2DNC Manual).

4−136 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I21.3 DNC/QUIT REF. PT. APPROACH 1 output signal

General The signal is set when the computer requests a Quit from the REF. PT. APPROACH function initiated by the DNC (BABDNC only).

H signal DNC computer requests quit.

L signal The signal is reset when the function is completed.

I21.5 DNC/SPE CONNECTION O.K. 1 output signal

General This output signal tells the PLC the status of the transfer connection between CNC and DNC computer.

H signal The transfer connection is ready for operation.

L signal The transfer connection is not ready.

Note The signal goes to LOW temporarily if the conditions for the DNC error LINK FAULT or COMP. NOT READY TO RECEIVE are met. Once the fault is remedied, i.e. the send command in which the condition occurred has been successfully performed, the signal goes HIGH again. The signal goes permanently LOW when a hardware fault is detected at the DNC interface.

4−137 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I22.0 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE IS ORIENTED 1 output signal

H signal 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE IS ORIENTED is issued when the spindle has reached the InPosition range (P 7112), the axisrelated InPosition signal is set and the SPINDLE ORIENT function (corresponding M code) is still active for the 2nd spindle.

L signal Is issued when − after the SPINDLE ORIENT function (for 2nd spindle) − new selections (M3/M13, M4/M14, Gear range change, Control reset, M30 or M2 as main program end) are active for this spindle.

Note: For first spindle see I14.2!

I22.1 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT 1 output signal

H signal This signal is issued when the second spindle is oriented but no position has been programmed. It stays on until new selections for the second spindle are activated. For first spindle see I16.3!

I22.2 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE UP TO SPEED (SPINDLE) 1 output signal

H signal Compares command speed with actual speed. If the difference is greater than the percentage value defined in machine parameter P 7116, the interface signal 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE UP TO SPEED is issued. The signal is issued for all pro grammed speeds depending on the potentiometer.

L signal As long as signal 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE STOP is active, this signal stays LOW if no programmed set speed is active.

Note: For first spindle see I10.2!

4−138 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I22.3 2ND SPINDLE: IDLING SPEED REACHED 1 output signal

General The idling speed always becomes active when the command gear range does not coincide with the actual gear range (O20.0 to O20.3) of the second spindle. This can also happen after the machine is switched on. After switchon, the CNC always requests the first gear range.

H signal This signal is issued when the actual speed is less than:

P7109 x P7116 P7109 + 100

Note When a frequency is superimposed on the idling speed (see Machine para meters" manual, P7110 and P7111), the maximum amplitude of the superimposed speed is included in the tolerance range. The signal stays on until the gear range is acknowledged. For first spindle see I16.1!

Diagram

SOLD (PROGR.)

SNEW (PROGR.)

IDLING SPEED ACTIVE

ACTUAL SPEED

IDLING SPEED REACHED

GEAR RANGE CHANGE

I22.4 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE STOP 1 output signal

H signal The signal appears when the speed defined by machine parameter P7121 is un dershot. For first spindle see I16.0!

4−139 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I22.5 2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE 1 output signal

H signal This signal appears after activation of the second spindle (G202).

L signal Default status. This signal also appears after activation of the first spindle (G201).

I22.6 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE POT 0% 1 output signal

H signal This signal appears when a spindle override value of 0% is set. For first spindle see I16.2!

I22.7 2ND SPINDLE: SPINDLE POT 100% SET 1 output signal

General The CNC sends to the PLC the interface signal, which indicates the 100% evalu ation of the spindle potentiometer by manual operation of the SET 2ND SPINDLE 100% function key. For first spindle see I14.6!

H signal Issued as a static signal after activation of the function SET 2ND SPINDLE POT100% (see O24.4).

L signal After the SET SPINDLE POT TO 100 % function is deactivated.

Application Used to drive the indicator lamp in the corresponding function key. Ouput as recorder signal for recording machine data.

4−140 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I23.0 − I23.7 ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHOVER 1.− 8. AXIS 1 output signal

General Synchronous axes can be switched to asynchronous mode via G function G178. With G179/M30/M02, all switched over axes are switched back to synchronous mode. Switching back to synchronous mode can also be attained through Program Dese lect, Control Reset and Delete Logic.

H signal The corresponding synchronous axis is switched to asynchronous mode.

L signal Default status. No switchover active.

I24.0 − I24.7 DNC 1. AXIS to DNC 8. AXIS 8 output signals

(LSV2DNC only) The CNC output signals DNC 1.AXIS to DNC 8. AXIS are set for the axes for which Reference Point Approach is selected and permitted (machine parameter P 106).

For sequence and diagram see under DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (I21.0).

I25.0 − I25.7 The meaning of this signal can be defined according to machine parameters

Movement ON

General The signal indicates if a synchronous axis is being moved.

H signal When the lag is larger than entered machine parameter P6517 for at least one of the synchronous axes. Condition is that no P2 error exists.

L signal With all synchronous axes, the lag is smaller/larger than entered in machine para meter P6517.

4−141 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

POSITION REACHED

General With the help of this signal, a switching function can be initiated through a random axis from a position before the end point has been reached.

H signal A distance to the end point concerned, defined in machine parameter P6517, has been reached.

L signal Default status When reading in a new block and leaving the last end position

I26.0 − I26.1 Coupling 1st or 2nd axis pair active 1 output signal

General Machine parameter P124 can be used to determine which axes are to be traversed coupled to each other. This coupling is activated or deactivated via function G995.

H signal The coupling of the 1st or 2nd axis pair is active.

L signal Default status The coupling of the 1st or 2nd axis pair is not active.

I31.5 THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE 1 output signal

General This signal is issued where the expansion option Thread cutting" is active and G330 is activated.

H signal A G330 block is ready for processing.

L signal Is issued when another G code from the same group (G0, G1, G2, G3, G5, G73) is active.

Note Feed and spindle override pots. are inoperative during G330 operation.

4−142 Digitalinterface(Description) CC220 CNCOutputs Connectionconditions

I31.6 G 86 active 1 output signal

H signal Appears as soon as the block in which drilling cycle G86 is programmed becomes active.

L signal On completion of drilling cycle G86. CONTROL RESET resets G86.

Application Special interlock facilities.

I31.7 G 84 active 1 output signal

H signal Appears as soon as the block in which drilling cycle G84 is programmed becomes active. The feed potentiometer is automatically deactivated.

L signal Appears on completion of the cycle. CONTROL RESET resets G84.

Note If the current spindle override value is to be deactivated as well, then the SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100% input can also be assigned this signal.

4−143 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

4.3 Other signals

Ready 2 READY 2 is a hardware relay contact on the PS 75 Power Supply Mode (switch rat ing: 50 W/24V/ max.2A) that breaks when the following faults occur: ‘ CNCinternal voltage fault ‘ Overtemperature (> 58 °C internal) ‘ Measuring system fault ‘ Control loop fault ‘ Computer fault

CAUTION! The READY2 contact must be networked to the emergency stop circuit! ! The control is not ready if the READY2 contact is open! For this reason all dan gerous functions must be made safe immediately after opening the contact! In particular, it must be ensured that with an open READY 2 contact no axes are able to traverse! When switching off, the power to the drives must first be shut off before the CNC logic voltage is switched off!

MTB1 I/O Inputs/Outputs

I32.0 to I39.7 MTB1 I/O inputs 64 input signals and O32.0 to O35.7 MTB1 I/O outputs 32 output signals

With the MTB1 card, 64 inputs and 32 outputs can be signalled to/from the machine panel to the PLC. The MTB1 I/O must be installed in the panel enclosure by the ma chinetool manufacturer. For connections, supply voltage and addressing of the MTB1 I/O, please refer to section 1.5.1 MTB I/O".

Caution: −No timecritical signals should be routed via the MTB1 I/O (e.g. strobe signals).

−All inputs that are signalled via the MTB1 I/O to the PLC must be present for at least 2 PLC cycles before the PLC can interpret them as HIGH or LOW signals.

− The inputs and outputs of the MTB1 I/O may only be used for the machine panel (buttons and signal lamps).

− The max. cable length allowed at the inputs is 0.5 m.

4−144 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

High Speed I/O of the control loop card

Apart from the signal inputs/outputs at the digital interface of the CNC, a number of other inputs/outputs are available at the HighSpeed I/O of the servo loop card SERVO i. As a rule, these signals are optional, i.e. they depend on the presence of options. The terminal assignment of these signals are userconfigurable with machine parameter group P 9500.

The inputs/outputs at the HighSpeed I/O differ from those of the digital interface by the reaction of the CNC to an event, e.g. with axisstop. The reaction time at the digital interface is affected by the block cycle time of the CNC and by machine parameter P 6006 (I/O start time). The reaction time at the HighSpeed I/O on the other hand is only affected by the interpolation time (parametered with machine parameter P 9901, usually set to 10 ms).

4−145 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

4 HIGHSPEED LIMITS 4 output signals

General Mechanical switches or switch ranges on the machine can be replaced by elec tronic ones for certain applications. There are 20 possible settings in machine para meters P 6100 and P 6200 that are freely assignable to the axes. A distinction is made between two types of signal output: −16 signals to the digital interface: −4 signals at the High Speed I/O on the Servo loop card (for fast signal output)

H signal Appears when the particular axis moves within the set travel limit range or reaches the area defined in the machine parameter.

Note The highspeed limit switches can also be used for point monitoring when mini mum and maximum values are identical.

Application − Replacement of mechanical limit switches. − Monitoring of certain positions where special functions are supposed to take place, e.g. tool change, pallet change etc.

Working areas of axes can also be monitored in relation to one another with the aid of the PLC.

Diagram: Travel range/Signal output

1. RANGE 2. RANGE (PT.) 3. RANGE

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉ

ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉÉ

REF. PT.

ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉÉ

1. RANGE

2. RANGE

3. RANGE

4−146 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

4 HIGHSPEED INPOS SIGNALS 4 output signals

General The CNC uses these signals to tell the PLC that the specified position of an axis (1. to 4. axis) is reached.

H signal The axis is within the InPosition window adjustable using machine parameter P1508.

L signal A movement is executed −or− although a travel command is present, no movement can take place because FEED ALLOW is absent or FEED HOLD is present.

Note See notes and diagrams under POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND signal.

Application Special cases

4−147 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

TANGENTIAL TOOL GUIDANCE: RAISE 1 output signal

General With tangental tool guidance, a tool is turned by a rotary or endless axis in such a way that it is always tangentally guided to the contour programmed in the XY plane. When moving between 2 programmed blocks, it is usually necessary to turn the tool by a certain angle. When this turn angle exceeds a certain maximum limit, the tool must be raised before a turn and then lowered again.

H signal Is issued before the turn depending on machine parameters P6401 and P 6402 for time T = P9901 x 6403 (ms).

TANGENTIAL TOOL GUIDANCE: LOWER 1 output signal

General See above.

H signal Is issued before the turn depending on machine parameters P6401 and P 6402 for time T = P9901 x 6404 (ms).

RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER SPINDLE 1 output signal

General

H signal Is issued when the following conditions are simultaneously met: − Position control active − Endpoint reached (Interpolator) − No Caxis mode − Spindle lag is less than P 7021 (spindle stop).

Application Drive switchover to 16fold input decoding.

4−148 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP 1 output signal

H signal Is issued when the following conditions are met: − Position control active − Endpoint reached (Interpolator) − No Caxis mode − Spindle stopped in InPos window (Lag < P1508 of the spindle axis)

L signal When lag > P7012.

Application Switchover to control in drive.

(NOT) FAST FEED HOLD 1 input signal

H signal Precondition for normal CNC operation, e.g. program run after NC Start or Jog mode.

L signal Initiates FEED HOLD. Controlled interrupt or inhibition of axis movements. No effect on spindle speed. Acts on the output signal PROGRAM RUNNING (Low signal).

Application Inclusion of machinedependent safetyrelevant machine functions, e.g. to prevent Feed Hold" during thread cutting (G 33) and tapping (G 84).

Note In the PLC, FEED HOLD VIA SERVO INPUT must be decoded. NC START and FEED HOLD must be configured in the PLC as flipflop functions because NC START must be able to clear the FEED HOLD conditions.

4−149 DigitalInterface(Descriptions) CC220 Othersignals Connectionconditions

4−150 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

4.4 Signal register

To facilitate quick location of the individual signal descriptions, this register lists all the signal names together with their addresses in alphabetic order. Other signals (e.g. HighSpeed I/O) are marked with the corresponding page numbers. New or altered signals (with respect to previous manual editions) are denoted with ‘".

100% FEED ASYNCHRONOUS AXES (O16.5) 2ND SPINDLE ACTIVE (I22.5)

ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL (L/H) (O6.6) (ANALOG OVERRIDE 100%) Activate program (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) AUTOMATIC (O12.4). AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (M40) (O17.2) AUTOMATIC GEAR RANGE SELECTION (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.0) AUTOMATIC MODE (I8.0) AUTOMATIC RESTART M2/M30 (O20.5) AUXILIARY FUNCTION RECEIPT (O12.0) ASYNCHRONOUS SWITCHOVER 1.−8. AXIS (I23.0 − I23.7) ‘ AUX. FUNCT. INHIBIT (I11.7) AXIS IN POSITION (I2.0 − I2.7)

BLOCK SLASH (O5.2) BLOCK SLASH (I9.2)

CAXIS ACTIVE (CNC) (I16.4) CAXIS ACTIVE (PLC) (O27.3) CAXIS SIGNALS (O27.0 − O27.3) ‘ Change override values via PLC (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) CHANGE SIGNALS (STROBE) (I7.0 − I7.7) CLEAR DIST. TO GO (O16.3) CONTROL RESET (O16.4) CONTROL RESET (I9.1) CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (O17.5) CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.2) CONTROLLED SPINDLE STOP (page 4−130) CORRECTION ACTUAL COUNT (O21.3) Coupling 1st or 2nd axis pair active (O26.0 − O26.1) ‘ CPL DATA TRANSFER TO PLC (MULTIMODE) (I7.7 / I10.7) CPL DATA TRANSFER FROM PLC (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) CPL DIALOG STROBE (I10.7) CPL DIALOGUE MACHINE (O6.3) CUTTING SPEED CONSTANT (G96) (I14.1)

4−151 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

DATA LINE MULTIMODE (O8.0 − O11.7) DIRECT CALL (O6.1) DNC/1.−8. AXIS (I24.0 − I24.7) DNC/ABORT REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (I21.3) DNC/CONTROL RESET (I20.6) DNC/FEED HOLD (I20.1) DNC/FEED HOLD OFF (I20.2) DNC/LSV2 CONNECTION O.K. (I21.5) DNC/NC START (I20.0) DNC ON (I20.7) DNC/PLC RECEIPT (O21.0) DNC PROGRAM SELECT (I21.2) DNC/REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (I21.0) DRIFT COMP OFF / 1.−8 AXIS (O25.0 − O25.7) DRIVE ON 1. 8. AXIS (O0.0 − O0.7)

EDIT INHIBIT (O5.1) EXT.POS.REACHED 1.−8. AXIS (I19.0 − I19.7) EXTERNAL FEED (O15.4) EXTERNAL FEED POT (O17.0) EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECT (I10.0) EXTERNAL SPINDLE POTI (O17.1) EXTERNAL SPINDLE POT (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.5)

FEED ALLOW 1.−8. AXIS (O1.0 − O1.7) FEED IN MM/REV. (G95) (I14.0) FEEDRATE 0% (I9.6) FEEDRATE REDUCTION (O27.6) ‘

G 63 active (I11.3) G 84 ACTIVE (I31.7) G 86 ACTIVE (I31.6) GO BLOCK (I9.5) GO BLOCK WITHOUT COMP. (I17.4)

HANDWHEEL 1.−8. AXIS (O22.0 − O22.7) HIGHSPEED INPOS SIGNALS (page 4−128) HIGHSPEED LIMITS (page 4−127) HIRTH AXIS ERROR (I17.6)

IDLING SPEED REACHED (I16.1) IDLING SPEED REACHED (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.3) INCREMENT 1 (O16.0) INCREMENT 10 (O15.7) INCREMENT 100 (O15.6) INCREMENT X (O15.5) INHIBIT MEAS. SYS. MONITOR 1.−8. AXIS (O23.0 − O23.7)

4−152 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

JOG 1.−8. AXIS POS./NEG. (O13.0 − O14.7) JOG (mm/min) (O16.6) JOG (mm/rev) (O16.7) JOG MODE (I8.3)

LIFE OF BASIC AND ALT. TOOLS EXPIRED (I14.4) LINKING ACTIVE (I17.3) LOCAL/REMOTE (DNC) (O5.6)

MACHINE MODE (O26.0 − O26.7) ‘ MANUAL FEED FAST (O15.1) MANUAL FEED MEDIUM (O15.2) MANUAL FEED RAPID (O15.0) MANUAL FEED SLOW (O15.3) MANUAL MODE (I8.2) MANUAL PROGRAM SELECTION (I9.4) MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION ACTIVE (I17.0) MIRROR SWITCH (O26.0 − O26.7) ‘ MODE INHIBIT (O6.4) MOVEMENT ON (I25.0 − I25.7) ‘ MSD DISPLAY (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) MSD MODE VALENCY 1−4 (I10.4 − I10.6) MST AUX (I3.0 − I4.3) MULTIRECEIPT (I9.3) MULTIMODE VALENCY 1−128 (O7.0 − O7.7) MULTISTROBE (O6.5)

NC READY (I10.1) NC START (O5.4) NEG./POS. TRAVEL COMMAND 1.−8. AXIS (I0.0 − I1.7) (NOT) EMERGENCY STOP (O5.3) (NOT) FAST FEED HOLD (page 4−130) (NOT) FEED HOLD (O5.5) (NOT) REDUCTION 1.−8. AXIS (O4.0 − O4.7)

OPTIONAL JUMP ON (O12.1) OPTIONAL STOP (O6.0) OPTIONAL STOP (I11.6)

PIECE COUNTER ON (O17.3) POS./NEG. TRAVEL COMMAND 1.−8. AXIS (I0.0 − I1.7) POSITION REACHED (I25.0 − I25.7) ‘ PROGRAM DESELECT (I17.7) PROGRAM END AT M2 OR M30 (I11.1) PROGRAM EXISTS (I9.7) PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION ACTIVE (I17.2) PROGRAM RUNNING (I8.7) PROGRAM STOP AT M0 OR M1 (I11.0)

4−153 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

QUADRANT PROGRAMMING (O20.4)

RAPID (TRAVERSE) (I8.6) RAPID 0% (I10.3) RAPID POT 100% SET (I14.5) REENTRY ACTIVE (I17.1) READY 2 (page 4−125) READY 2 (page 4−125) RECEIPT GEAR RANGE 1−8 (O18.0 − O18.7) RECEIPT GEAR RANGE 1−4 2ND SPINDLE (O18.4 − O18.7) REFERENCE POINT APPROACH (O16.1) REFERENCE POINT APPROACHED 1.−8. AXIS (I18.0 − I18.7) REFERENCE POINT REACHED 1.−8. AXIS (I15.0 − I15.7) REFERENCE POINTS REACHED ALL AXES (I8.5) REFERENCE POINT APPROACH CAXIS (O27.2) REFERENCE POINT APPROACH DIRECTION 1.−8. AXIS (O3.0 − O3.7) REFERENCE POINT APPROACH MODE (I8.4) REMACHINE THREAD WITHOUT ROUGHING (O27.7) RETURN TO CONTOUR (O20.6) REVERS. RANGE REACHED (I16.7)

SEARCH program (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) SET FEED POT 100% (O21.1) SET RAPID POT 100% (O21.2) SET SPINDLE POT 100% (O17.7) SET SPINDLE POT 100% (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.4) SELECT GEAR RANGE 1−4 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O20.0 − O20.3) SELECT GEAR RANGE 1−8 (MANUAL) (O19.4 − O20.3) SIGN (+/−) (L/H) (O6.7) SINGLE BLOCK (O12.5) SINGLE BLOCK G84 (TEST) (O20.7) SINGLE BLOCK MODE (I8.1) SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL) (O19.1) SPINDLE ANTICLOCKWISE M04 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O12.5) SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL) (O19.0) SPINDLE CLOCKWISE M03 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O12.4) SPINDLE IS ORIENTED (I14.2) SPINDLE IS ORIENTED (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.0) SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT (I16.3) SPINDLE ON REFERENCE POINT (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.1) SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL) (O19.3) SPINDLE ORIENT M19 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O12.7) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT (NOT) (O17.6) SPINDLE SET VALUE 0 VOLT (NOT) (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.3) SPINDLE STOP (I16.0) SPINDLE STOP (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.4) SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL) (O19.2) SPINDLE STOP M05 (MANUAL) (2ND SPINDLE) (O12.6) SPINDLE POT 0 PER CENT (I16.2) SPINDLE POT 0 PER CENT (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.6)

4−154 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

SPINDLE POT 100% SET (I14.6) SPINDLE POT 100% SET (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.7) SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER (page 4−129) SPINDLE REVERSE (O17.4) SPINDLE REVERSE (2ND SPINDLE) (O24.1) SPINDLE SPEED REACHED (I10.2) SPINDLE SPEED REACHED (2ND SPINDLE) (I22.2) ST AUX (I4.4 − I5.3) START MILLING HEAD COMPENSATION (O27.5) SUPPRESSION OF SOFTWARE LIMITS (O12.3) SWITCH FUNCTION MODE (I11.5) SWITCH OVER DRILLING AXIS (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) SWITCHOVER MILLING MODE (O27.1) SWITCHOVER TURNING MODE (O27.0)

T AUX (I5.4 − I6.7) TAPPING ACTIVE (I16.5) TANGENTAL TOOL GUIDANCE (page 4−129) TARGET ACHIEVED (I14.7) TEACH IN SPINDLE (O21.7) TEACH IN FEED (O21.6) TEST WITHOUT MOVEMENT (I9.0) TEST RUN WITHOUT COMP. (I17.5) THREAD GAUGE / REMACHINE (O21.5) THREAD CUTTING ACTIVE (G33) (I11.2) THREAD CYCLE ACTIVE (I31.5) TOOL LIFE MONITOR ON (O21.4) TOOL LIFE EXPIRED (I14.3) Transfer position set value of an axis (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) TRAVEL COMMAND 1.−8. AXIS (O2.0 − O2.7) TRANSFER FEED SET VALUE OF AN AXIS (MULTIMODE) (O7.0 − O7.7) TRANSFER ALLOW (O5.0) TRAVEL RANGE 1 ... 16 (I12.0 − I13.7)

ZERO RESET (O16.2)

−

4−155 DigitalInterface CC220 SignalRegister Connectionconditions

4−156 CC220 Partslist Connectionconditions

Parts list

Card rack:

NC card rack 1.05 065 610 Fan unit 242 (24V=) for NC card rack 1.05 054 092 NC/PLC card rack 1.05/8 incl. fan 066 750 NC/CL3 card rack 1.05/7 incl. fan 066 860 Assembly kit for card rack rear side assembly 050 409

Operating panels, keyboard:

12" monochrome operating panel 1.012" 063 547 14" colour operating panel 1.014" 063 554 Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM ’ panel) 2.5 m 048 028 Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM ’ panel) 5 m 052 265 Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM ’ panel) 10 m 048 029 Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM ’ panel) 20 m 048 668 Connection cable X22 (CP/MEM ’ panel) 25 m 065 617 Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5’ panel) 2.5 m 065 620 Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5’ panel) 10 m 065 622 Connection cable X21 (CP/MEM5’ panel) 25 m 065 624 ASCII keyboard: 050 461 Cyrillic ASCII keyboard: 062 521 Drawer for ASCII keyboard: 050 910

MTB1 I/O:

MTB1 I/O 063 551 Connection cable X61 (MTB1 I/O ’ panel) 065 619 Connection cable X62 (MTB1 I/O ’ panel) 065 618

Handwheels:

Digital handwheel (100 pulses/rev.): 069 167 Special cable for digital handwheel (max. 14 m): 070/908 558 Analog handwheel (1kOhm, linear): 038 341 Special cable for analog handwheel/potentiometer (max. 30 m): 904 696

Module CP/MEM5:

CP/MEM5 base 15/30 MHz 070 991 Processor module CG16/15F 15 MHz, with FPU 062 860 Processor module CG160/25F 25 MHz, with FPU 071 298 Processor module GX32/30F 30 MHz, with FPU 070 423 Processor module GX32/30F 30 MHz, with FPU/2MB RAM 070 456 Graphics module 064 982 EEPROM module 32k 064 971 EEPROM module 128k 064 974 System software Z25 German 066 991

Parts−1 CC220 Partslist Connectionconditions

System software Z25 German (E) 066 992 System software D25 German 066 994 System software D25 German (E) 066 995

(E) = COMECON export version

SCP2 module: Plugin module SCP2 (LSV2DNC), without FPU 065 632 EPROM module for SCP2 063 686

SERVOi module: SERVO4iS 065 596 SERVO6iS 063 897 SERVOi EXE3/3S 070 476 SERVO4iS 15 analog Out4 068 006 SERVO6iS 15 analog Out7 068 008 SERVOi EXE3/3S 15 analog Out7 070 740 SERVO6iS 25 analog Out7 071 494 SERVOi EXE3/3S 25 analog Out7 070 741 Setpoint module analog Out4 065 599 Setpoint module analog Out7 062 704 Processor module CG16/15 15 MHz 062 858 Processor module CG160/25 25 MHz 071 296

Measuring system cable (CC220 ’ ROD or CC220 ’ EXE): Readyassembled cable length 5 m 048 662 Readyassembled cable length 8 m 048 663 Readyassembled cable length 16 m 048 664 Readyassembled cable length 25 m 048 665 Readyassembled cable length 35 m 048 666 Readyassembled cable length 50 m 048 667 Single parts: Cable 10 x 0.142 + 4 x 0.52 903 499 Dplug, 15pin 904 440 Metal cover for 15pin Dplug 913 724 Socket 12 pin Souriau 909 131 Accessory kit for Souriau socket 909 688 Note: These cables must not be tightened by chain!

I/O 24/0.2 module (digital I/O), PIC 250: I/O 24/0.2 without PIC 250 068 347 I/O 24/0.2 + PIC250 068 349 I/O 24/0.2 + PIC250 + V24/20mA extension card for DNC 068 357 Interface cable X11 048 034 Interface cable X21 048 033 Interface cable X22 048 032 PIC 250 066 635

Parts−2 CC220 Partslist Connectionconditions

NCPLCBit module (bit coupler):

NCPLCBit 044 339 NCPLCBit + V24/20 mA extension card for DNC 056 752 Cable NCPLCBit 0.5 m (for AG/Z or AG/P) 041 535 Cable NCPLCBit 0.75 m (for AG/Z or AG/P) 062 970 Cable NCPLCBit 1.8 m (for AG/P) 048 081 AG/Z 041 523 AG/P 047 944

NCPLCWord3 module (word coupler):

NCPLCWord3 060 668 NCPLCWord3 + V24/20MA extended module for DNC 060 670 Connection cable 0.7 m to AG/NC3S 060 742 Connection cable 1.5 m to AG/NC3S 060 743 Connection cable 0.55 m from AG/NC3S to AG/Z_S 064 754 Battery for NCPLCWord3 046 800 AG/NC3S 071 204

PCI/OS module:

PCI/OS + PIC250 071 356 PCI/OS + PIC250 + V24/20MA extension card for DNC 071 358 PIC 250 066 635 Connection cable 0.55 m from PCI/OS to AG/ZS 064 754 AG/ZS 064 719

PS200 / PS75 modules (power supply modules):

PS75 047 181 PS200 052 910

PLC modules:

AG/ZS 064 719 AG/NC3S 071 204 AG/Z 041 523 AG/P 047 944 E 24V/DC, 95way 071 252

Power supply modules to VDE 0551:

24 V=; 6 A / 3*400 V 916 535 24 V=; 16 A / 3*400 V 916 327

Dummy cover for card rack slots:

Dummy cover (CNC section) 050 515 Dummy cover (PLC section) 046 208

Parts−3 CC220 Partslist Connectionconditions

DNC modules:

Extended module V24/20mA (EDNC + LSV2DNC) 056 737 Plugin module SCP2 (LSV2DNC), without FPU 065 632 EPROM module for SCP2 063 686

DCR cassette player:

DCR cassette player 036 485 Blank cassettes (min. qty. 10) 037 087 Connection cable CNC ’ DCR (2.5 m) 046 266

MiniCass cassette player:

MiniCass 044 198 Blank cassettes (min. qty. 10) 910 749 Connection cable CNC ’ MiniCass (2.5 m) 046 266

PTR punched tape reader:

Punched tape reader 914 122 Connection cable CNC ’ PTR (5 m) 050 336 Connection cable CNC ’ PTR (10 m) 050 337

CC disk:

CC disk 062 957 Connection cable CNC ’ CC disk (2.5 m) 064 785 Diskettes 3½", formatted 720 kByte (min. qty. 10) 054 599 Diskettes 3½", unformatted 1.44 MByte (min. qty. 10) 915 486

Software XTRANS:

XTRANS on 3½" diskette 062 625 XTRANS on 5¼" diskette 064 780 V24 transmission cable (CNC ’ PC) 054 956

BIBURN software:

Incl. software protection adaptor on 3½" diskette 064 135 Incl. software protection adaptor on 5¼" diskette 064 806 Without software protection adaptor on 3½" diskette (update) 066 728 Without software protection adaptor on 5¼" diskette (update) 066 730

Parts−4 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

Glossary

12"−monochrome panel 1−25 14"−standard colour panel 1−14 14"−special colour panel 1−34 20 mA interface at CP/MEM5 3−6 20 mA interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA 1−62 20 mA interface at SCP 3−47

A Address distribution CL 300 1−72 Address distribution PC 600 with bit coupling 1−74 Address distribution PC 600 with word coupling 1−75 Address distribution PIC 250 1−71 AG/NC3S coupling (see NCPLCWord3) AG/P coupling (see NCPLCBit) AG/ZS coupling (see NCPLCBit) Angular position measuring systems 3−14 Analog setpoint output of SERVOi 3−29 Analog handwheel, connection to 12" monochrome panel 1−30 Analog handwheel, connection to 14" colour panel (standard) 1−2 0 Analog handwheel, connection to 14" colour panel (special) 1−41 Analog handwheel, connection to MTB1 I/O 1−57 ASCII keyboard 1−59

B Battery for CP/MEM5 2−29, 3−3 Battery for NCPLCWord3 3−43 BIBURN, EPROM programmable software 1−96 Bit coupling, definition 1−69 Block diagrams and conductor cross sections, voltage connection 2−17 Brightness, screen 1−14, 1−25, 1−35

C Cable, panel / MTB1 I/O 1−52 Cable for PIC 250 output signals 3−36 Cable for PIC 250 input signals 3−37 Cable NCPLCBit to AG/ZS 3−41 Cable NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S 3−44 Cable SERVOi measuring system 3−18 Cable screening 2−14 Cable plug housing Safety notes/screen connection Cable connector, housing Safety notes/screen connection Card rack, installation 2−10 Card rack, permissible slot assignment 1−7 Card rack, dimensions 2−1, 2−2 Card rack, versions 1−4

−Gloss−1 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

Card rack, maintenance 2−26 CL 300 1−72 CNC digital interface (see manual part 2) CNC, conditions for use 2−22 Communication memory 3−43 Conductor cross sections, voltage connection 2−17 Corrosive influences 2−22 CP/MEM5 3−2 CTS/RTS 1−68 Current loop interface at CP/MEM4 3−6 Current loop interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA 1−62 Current loop interface at SCP 3−47

D Data transfer software 1−96 Data transfer software, XTRANS 1−96 DCR cassette player 1−87 Diskette unit CC disk 1−95 Distance coded measuring systems 3−14 Digital handwheel, connection to SERVOi 3−20 Digital handwheel, connection to MTB1 I/O 1−58 DNC, LSV2 via SCP 3−45 DNC interfaces 1−60 Drawer with keyboard, dimensions 2−5 Drawer with keyboard, installation 2−8 DTR/DSR 1−65

E Earthing stud, 12" monochrome panel 2−3 Earthing stud, 14" colour panel (standard) 1−23 Earthing stud, 14" colour panel (special) 1−47 Earthing stud, card rack 1−4 Electrical connections 2−12 Encoder power supply 3−14 Environmental/operating conditions 2−22 EPROM programming software 1−96 Equipotential bonding at interfaces Safety notes, 2−14 Error message CP/MEM5 BATTERY LOW" 3−3 EXE, integrated, connection to 3−19 EXE, external, connection to 3−17 Extended module V24/20 mA (for DNC) 1−60

F, G Fast inputs/outputs of SERVOi 3−23 Fast retract" input, SERVOi 3−28 Fast retract" signal input, SERVOi 3−28

Grey tones 1−25

−Gloss−2 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

H Handwheels, analog/digital 1−59 Handwheel, analog, connection to 12" monochrome panel 1−30 Handwheel, analog, connection to 14" colour panel (standard) 1−20 Handwheel, analog, connection to 14" colour panel (special) 1−41 Handwheel, analog, connection to MTB1 I/O 1−57 Handwheel, digital, connection to MTB1 I/O 1−58 Handwheel, digital, connection to SERVOi 3−20 Handwheel, installation 2−9 Handwheel, dimensions 2−6 Hardware handshake 1−66 High Speed I/O of SERVOi 3−23 High Speed I/O, signal descriptions (see manual part 2) Humidity 2−22

I IN 95, module 1−84 Interface 20 mA at CP/MEM4 3−6 Interface 20 mA at DNC extended module V24/20 mA 1−62 Interface 20 mA at SCP 3−47 Interface RS422 at SCP 3−49 Interface V24 at CP/MEM4 3−4 Interface V24 at DNC extended module V24/20 mA 1−60 Interface V24 at SCP 3−46 Interfaces, required equipotential bonding Safety notes, 2−14 Interfaces for DNC 1−60 Interference suppression 2−15 Installation, panels 2−7 Installation, card rack 2−10 Installation, electronic handwheel 2−9 Installation, MTB1 I/O 2−9 Installation, drawer with keyboard 2−8 Integrated EXE 3−19 Interface cable for PIC 250 output signals 3−36 Interface cable for PIC 250 input signals 3−37 Interface tables (see manual part 2) I/O 24/0.2 3−31

K Keyboard, ASCII 1−59 Keyboard, MF2, connection 1−45 Keyboard with drawer, installation 2−8 Keyboard with drawer, dimensions 2−5

L Load/logic power supply modules 2−13 LSV2DNC with SCP 3−45

−Gloss−3 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

Linear measuring systems 3−14

M Maintenance, panels 2−25 Maintenance, card rack 2−26 Maintenance, MEM5 2−29 Maintenance, NCPLCWord3 2−29 Measuring systems for SERVOi, permissible 3−13 Measuring system inputs, SERVOi 3−12 MF2 keyboard 1−45 MiniCass cassette player 1−89 MiniCass cassette player 1−89 Module AG/ZS (PLC) 1−82 Module AG/NC3 (PLC) 1−81 Module CP/MEM4 3−2 Module I/O 24/0.2 3−31 Module E 24V/DC, 95way (PLC) 1−84 Module MTB1 I/O 1−51 Module NCPLCBit 3−39 Module PCI/OS 3−50 Module NCPLCWord3 3−42 Module PS 75 3−53 Module SCP 3−45 Module SERVOi 3−10 MTB1 I/O 1−51 MTB1 I/O, dimensions 2−5 MTB1 I/O, installation 2−9

N, O NCPLCBit 3−39 NCPLCBit to AG/ZS, connection cable 3−41 NCPLCWord3 3−42 NCPLCWord3, maintenance 2−29 NCPLCWord3 to AG/NC3S, connection cable 3−44

Operating conditions 2−22 Overview, system configuration 1−1

P Panel 12" monochrome 1−25 Panel 14" colour (standard) 1−14 Panel 14" colour (special) 1−34 Panels, dimensions 2−3, 2−4 Panels, installation 2−7 Panels, maintenance 2−25 Panel / MTB1 I/O connection cable 1−52 PC 600 1−73 PE conductor 2−14

−Gloss−4 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

PE conductor 2−14 PE connection, 12" monochrome panel 2−3 PE connection, 14" colour panel 1−23 PE connection, card rack 1−4 PIC 250 1−71 Pin assignment, 20mA interface at CP/MEM4 3−6 Pin assignment, 20mA interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA 1−62 Pin assignment, 20mA interface at SCP 3−47 Pin assignment, RS422 interface at SCP 3−49 Pin assignment, V24 interface at CP/MEM4 3−4 Pin assignment, V24 interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA 1−60 Pin assignment, V24 interface at SCP 3−46 Plugin module CP/MEM5 3−2 Plugin modules, permissible slot assignment in card rack 1−7 PLC couplings 1−69 PLC coupling, examples 1−78 PLC program generation, limits to 1−76 Power supply 230 V / 24 V, general data 2−12 Power supply modules for load/logic supply 24V 2−13 Power supply module PS 75 3−53 Potentiometers, connection to 12" monochrome panel 1−30 Potentiometers, connection to 14" colour panel (standard) 1−20 Potentiometers, connection to 14" colour panel (special) 1−41 Potentiometers, connection to MTB1 I/O 1−57 Probe inputs, SERVOi 3−25 Probes to SERVOi, connection examples 3−26 Programming units 1−96 Protection standards 2−22 PS75 3−53 Punched tape reader 1−91

READY2 contact 3−54 READY2 contact 3−54 Repairs to CNC components Safety notes, 2−24 Retract", fast signal input to SERVOi 3−28 RS422 interface at SCP 3−49 RTS/CTS 1−66

Sceening Safety notes, 2−14 SCP 3−45 SERVOi 3−10 SERVOi measuring system inputs, terminal assignments 3−15, 3−16, 3−17 SERVOi measuring system inputs (integrated EXE), terminal assignments 3−19 Setpoint outputs, SERVOi 3−29 Signal name register (see manual part 2) Slot assignment, card rack 1−7 Slot variations 1−7

−Gloss−5 CC220 Glossary Connectionconditions

Software handshake 1−66 Status signals of interfaces, general 1−65 Switch cabinet construction, notes 2−21 System components, dimensions 2−1 System configuration 1−1

V24 interface at CP/MEM5 3−4 V24 interface at DNC extended module V24/20mA 1−60 V24 interface at SCP 3−46 Ventilation unit, card rack 1−5, 2−26 Voltage connection, block diagrams and conductor cross section 2−17 VGA connection 1−46

Word coupling, definition 1−69 Write protection switch PIC 250 3−32

Xon/Xoff 1−66 XTRANS, data transmission software 1−96

−Gloss−6

1070 073 301-103 (95.05) GB · HB NC · AT/VSP · Printed in Germany